Home

Snapper 1695195 Lawn Mower User Manual

1. No Page Item Settings Default Description 05 REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE EXEC Save reference file in internal memory REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC Clear reference file REFERENCE LOAD EXEC Load reference file REFERENCE SAVE EXEC Save reference file to Memory Stick F ID 16 characters Name reference file SCENE WHITE DATA OFF ON OFF see White balance setting data to be saved in the scene file on page 149 06 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL EXEC Load lens file LENS FILE STORE EXEC Save lens file F ID 16 characters Name of selected lens file SOURCE MEMORY1 Number of selected lens file LENS NO OFFSET EXEC Clear lens file IRIS GAIN 99 to 99 O Iris gain value of lens file LENS AUTO RECALL OFF ON S No ON When a serial lens is connected with this item set to ON the corresponding lens file is loaded automatically and its content is reflected in the lens settings L ID Name of the lens file corresponding to the connected serial lens L MF Manufacturer of the connected serial lens 07 LENS FILE 2_ LENS MVMOD 1 99 to 99 O Lens file V Saw seed LENS CENTER H 7 48 to 47 0 Horizontal position compensation of lens file center marker LENS CENTER V 7 15 to 14 0 Vertical position compensation of lens file center marker TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects signal output to TEST OUT connector LENS R FLARE 1 99 to 99
2. To select from the thumbnail screen Proceed as follows T With the sub clip indicator off press the THUMBNAIL button turning on the thumbnail indicator The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear e If the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON set it to OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button If you set the MENU ON OFF to ON during thumbnail display thumbnail display is cancelled and replaced with menu display SS an i 23 AUG 14 30 DUR 00 03 10 00 Use the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the clip you want to include in the clip list Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET dial or MENU knob The scene selection window appears To return to the previous screen Press the RESET button Press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob This adds the selected clip to the current clip list as a sub clip At the same time this closes the scene selection window and returns to the original thumbnail display Repeat steps 2 to 4 until all desired clips have been added to the current clip list You can select the same clip any number of times The scene selection window shows the thumbnails of the sub clips that have been added to the current clip list The cursor within the window indicates the position in which the next sub clip will be added 4 2 Creating Clip Lists 73 uogo j g eueoS p Je deyo NAN uolDaag aUsDg yy Ja deYyD HAI 74
3. Recorded material clips Clip list 1 Cipi Clip list 1 Clip 2 AR Clip 3 Disc PDW 510 510P 530 530P Sub Clip Sub Sub 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Play back clip list 4 1 Overview 71 uogoaj g eueDS p Je deyD HII uoIDaag aUBDg yy Ja deYyD HAI Clips Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called clips A clip contains the material between a recording start point In point and a recording end point Out point Clips have numbers beginning with C for example C0001 Out point Out In point point Out point In point Out point In point In point Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4 C0001 C0002 C0003 C0004 i number ao ae 23 AUG 14 30 DUR 00 03 10 00 Clip lists Data called a clip list is created when you use the scene selection function to select desired clips from the clips stored on a disc Clip lists have numbers beginning with E for example E0001 Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc Clip list number DUR 00 05 20 00 27 AUG 14 00 Thumbnails of selected clips 72 4 1 Overview Sub clips clips in clip lists The specified clips or parts of clips in a clip list are called sub clips Sub clips are virtual data specifying ranges in the original clips Clip data in the original clips is not overwritten For this reason sub clips do not have clip m
4. No Page Item Description 01 HOURS METER OPERATION Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on in units of hours OPERATION rst Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on in units of hours reset possible SPINDLE rst Displays the total time that the spindle has been rotating in units of hours reset possible LASER rst Displays the total number of output parameters to the optical heads reset possible LOADING rst Displays the number of times that discs have been loaded reset possible SEEK rst Displays the total seek time by the optical heads in units of hours reset possible 02 TIME DATE ADJUST See 7 3 6 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock on HOUR page 135 MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY 03 ROM VERSION 1 AT Displays ROM version PACKAGE 04 ROM VERSION 2 SY1 Ver X XX PIER Ver X XX VAIN Ver X XX SYS2K Ver X XX SYS2U Ver X XX DRV Ver X XX FP Ver X XX DSP A Ver X XX PRX A Ver X XX PRX V Ver X XX 05 DEV STATUS 1 0 EEPROM LSI Display only IFA CN PX FP DCP BCS CN PA FRAM SCl AT SY RM 06 OPTION BOARD SDI OUTPUT COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT PULL DOWN 24P 204 Menu List COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT PULL DOWN 24P No Page Item Description 07 DISC STATUS USER ID Displays the user ID of the disc itself TITLE Displays the title of the disc itself REMAIN Displays the remaining capacity of the
5. TC Preset the first time code in the current clip list PRESET see page 79 SORT BY Sort the clip lists by name or date of creation see page 80 To escape from the CLIP menu Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP button 4 3 Managing Clip Lists CLIP Menu 4 3 1 Loading a Clip List From Disc Into Unit Memory Proceed as follows 1 Display the CLIP menu See Displaying the CLIP menu page 78 2 Inthe CLIP menu move the cursor to LOAD and press the SEL SET dial or the MENU Knob A clip list appears The date of creation or the title is displayed for each clip list LOAO CLIP LIST ESC E0001 04 08 08 21 57 E0002 04 08 24 11 15 E0003 04 08 25 15 30 E0004 NEW FILE E0005 E0006 SET KEY To switch between display of dates of creation titles and clip list names With the SHIFT button held down press the SET button With each press the display changes as follows Dates of creation gt titles gt clip list names gt dates of creation 3 Select the desired clip list and press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob The message LOAD OK YES NO appears 4 Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to move the mark to YES and press the dial knob The selected clip list is loaded into the current clip list 5 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP button CLIP menu operations end To display thumbnails of the sub clips in the
6. Spare indicator This is a spare indicator This can be used as a REC indicator by setting REC TALLY to BOTH in the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu SAVE indicator This indicator lights when the VDR SAVE STBY switch is set to SAVE putting the VDR into power save mode 2 10 Indicators in the Viewfinder 35 S 01 U0Q puke sey JO SuONOUNY pue suoneoog Zz JeldeyD NII 36 Recording and Playback chapter 3 1 Handling Discs 3 1 1 Discs Used for Recording and Playback This camcorder uses the following disc for recording and playback PFD23 Professional Disc capacity 23 3 GB It is not possible to use the following discs for recording or playback e Blu ray Disc e Professional Disc for Data 3 1 2 Notes on Handling Handling The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge and is designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or fingerprints However if the cartridge is subjected to a severe shock for example by dropping it this can result in damage or scratching of the disc If the disc is scratched it may be impossible to record video audio or to play back the content recorded on the disc The discs should be handled and stored carefully Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the cartridge Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage Do not disassemble the cartridge The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for indexing discs Apply the label in the
7. 59 to 142 0 PDW 510P 530P GL SC PHASE 99 to 99 0 Genlock subcarrier phase setting GL SC 0 180 SEL 0 180 180 Genlock subcarrier phase setting 17 ND COMP ND OFFSET OFF ON Turns on and off the mode which sets ND PDW 530 530P ADJUST neutral density filter color compensation only values CLEAR ND EXEC Clears ND filter color compensation values OFFSET 18 AUTO SHADING AUTO BLK EXEC EXEC Execute the auto black shooting function SHADING RESET BLK SHD EXEC EXEC Clears black shooting compensation values TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT connector MASTER GAIN 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 0 dB Temporarily sets the master gain value TMP 24 30 36 42 48 dB 19 DISC DELETE LAST CLIP EXEC EXEC Delete the last clip DELETE ALL CLIPS EXEC EXEC Delete all clips on the disc QUICK FORMAT EXEC EXEC Formats the disc All the recorded data is deleted 20 NETWORK DHCP ENABL DSABL DSABL Selects whether to enable automatic acquisition of the IP address from a DHCP server IP ADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX 192 168 1 Sets the IP address 10 SUBNET MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX 255 255 2 Sets the subnet mask 55 0 DEF GATEWAY XXX XXX XXX XXX 0 0 0 0 Sets the default gateway LINK SPEED AUTO 10 Mbps AUTO Sets the communications speed 100 Mbps DUPLEX AUTO FULL HALF AUTO Sets the duplex mode 1 The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of BEFORE END 3 when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 pa
8. CAUTION CLASS 1M LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS ATTENTION RADIATIONS LASER DE CLASSE 1M EN CAS D OUVERTURE ET DE DESACTIVATION DES VERROUS NE PAS REGARDER DIRECTEMENT AVEC DES INSTRUMENTS OPTIQUES Denne meerkat sidder pa apparatets verste panel Tama kyltti sijaitsee laitteen yl pinnalla VORSICHT KLASSE 1M LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GEOFFNET UND SPERREN AUSSER FUNKTION Dette merket er plassert p oversiden av produktet NICHT BLICKEN DIREKT MIT OPTISCHEN INSTRUMENTEN ADVARSEL LASERSTRALING AF KLASSE 1M VED ABNING OG OMGAELSE AF LASEANORDNINGER SE IKKE DIREKTE IND LASERSTRALEN MED OPTISKE INSTRUMENTER ADVARSEL LASERSTRALING I KLASSE 1M NAR DEKSELET ER APENT OG LASENE UTE AV FUNKSJON SE IKKE DIREKTE MED OPTISKE INSTRUMENTER RNING KLASS 1M LASERSTRALNING N R DENNA DEL R PPNAD OCH SP RRMEKANISMER AR FRIGJORDA n BETRAKTA EJ STR LEN MED OPTISKA INSTRUMENT VAROL LUOKAN 1M LASERS TEILY AVATTUNA JA SISAISET LUKITUKSET POISTETTUINA ALA KATSO SITA SUORAAN OPTISEN LAITTEEN LAPI CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure VAROITUS LAITTEEN KAYTTAMINEN MUULLA KUIN TASSA KAYTTOOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATT
9. See 4 2 6 Saving the Current Clip List to Disc page 77 4 2 5 Previewing the Current Clip List Press the SUB CLIP button turning it on and then press the PLAY button If the thumbnail indicator is not lit playback starts from the first sub clip If the thumbnail indicator is lit playback starts from the first frame of the selected clip 4 2 6 Saving the Current Clip List to Disc Proceed as follows 1 Display the CLIP menu See Displaying the CLIP menu page 78 2 Use the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select SAVE in the CLIP menu and press the dial knob A clip list appears NEW FILE is displayed for clip lists without any registered data The date of creation or the title is displayed for each clip list The date of creation is always displayed for clip lists without titles SAVE CLIP LIST 04 08 08 21 57 04 08 24 11 15 04 08 25 15 30 ILE FILE SHIFT SET KEY 009 NEW TITLE To switch between display of dates of creation titles and clip list names With the SHIFT button held down press the SET button With each press the display changes as follows Dates of creation gt titles gt clip list names gt dates of creation Use the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the desired clip list name and press the dial knob The message SAVE OK YES NO appears Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to move the mark to YES and press the
10. The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark To set other items go back to step 3 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section 7 3 4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance Setting By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance you can make the picture warmer or colder The OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu allows you to do this setting Proceed as follows 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OPERATION and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OFFSET WHT and press the MENU knob to display the OFFSET WHT page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the OFFSET WHT page appears and press the MENU knob to select the page P17 OFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE lt A gt WARM COOL lt A gt COLOR FINE lt A gt OFFSET WHITE lt B gt WARM COOL lt B gt COLOR FINE lt B gt TOP OFF 3200 Item Description OFFSET WHITE Turns the setting of the offset for lt A gt channel A ON or OFF ON Adds the offset adjusted on this page to the
11. 2 4 D to 0 5 D A 8314 798 A 3 x magnification Connection through i LINK interface Devices with a DV connector AC power supply Camera adaptor 1 BP L40 M50 cannot be used Extension board Product Model name AC Adaptor AC 550 550CE AC Adaptor AC DN10 Battery Product Model name Battery Charger BC M150 L500 L70 Battery Pack BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S Product Model name Input of audio channels CA 701 3 4 and SDI output CCZ 26 pin output analog composite SDI input CA 702 702P Memory Stick see page 206 SDI Output Board CBK SD01 Product Model name Composite Input Board CBK SC01 Pull Down Board CBK FC01 2 Network Adaptor CBK NC01 Memory Card Adaptor CBK PC01 2 For PDW 510 530 only Audio signal source External microphone ECM 670 678 or similar microphone RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit CAC 12 Microphone Holder Video monitor for color image check during shooting Audio equipment WRR 861 862 series UHF Portable Tuner XLR 5 pin connector for stereo microphone service part WRR 855 series UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit CCXA 53 audio cable DMX P01 Portable Digital Mixer 1 2 Example of System Configuration 11 rao sia hI MOIMOAC
12. 4 2 Creating Clip Lists 75 uonodejeS eueDS Je deyoD HII uoyoajag euesg 4 Jaldeyo HA 76 1 Carry out steps 1 to 4 of 4 2 2 Deleting a Sub Clip to select a sub clip and display the sub clip operation menu Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select TRIM and press the dial knob The first frame of the selected sub clip appears In this state you can carry out playback and search all clips on the disc SUB CLIP TRIM _ ae Ret B TER 00700 20 00 Ia IN 00 00 00 00 OUT 01 16 00 00 To cancel the trim and return to the previous screen Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET dial or MENU knob Carry out playback and search to find the new location of the IN point or OUT point of the selected sub clip At the point where you want to set the new IN point or OUT point turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the IN when changing the IN point or the OUT when changing the OUT point and press the dial knob To change both the IN point and the OUT point repeat steps 3 and 4 To reset the IN point or OUT point selecting IN or OUT hold down the RESET button and press the SEL SET dial The IN or OUT point is restored to the value it had before the sub clip trim screen opened To cue up the IN point or OUT point hold down the SHIFT button and press the NEXT or PREV button When you set IN and OUT points stretching across several clips one sub clip is created for each of th
13. EXECUTE OK appears 2 Select YES to execute the format The message COMPLETE appears when the format finishes All of the data in the memory card is deleted The message MEMORY CARD INHIBIT or M Card INHI appears if you insert a write protected memory card and attempt to record to it In this case eject the memory card clear the Write Inhibit tab and insert the memory card again The message NO MEMORY CARD appears if you attempt to record with no memory card inserted Insert a memory card and try again To check the memory symbol and the remaining memory As shown below a memory symbol and a remaining memory indication appear in the viewfinder while a memory card is in use ZO Memory symbol Remaining memory 1B W A 0 amp 8 ieeeeeco 35 30 _ocF11 About the memory symbol This symbol indicates the following states lt A usable memory card is loaded g An unusable memory card is loaded Exchange the memory card or format it 3 2 Recording If the usable memory card symbol does not appear after you insert a memory card power the camcorder off and on and then try inserting it again The symbol may never appear no matter how many times you try if you were using a memory card other than the recommended products Remaining memory indications Examples of remaining memory recording time indications Indication Re
14. FO4OSCENE FILE STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE The SCENE STORE page appears P00 SCENE STORE DISPLAY MODE MEM O1 STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD 4 Select the desired file number When no Memory Stick has been inserted Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired file number and press the MENU knob When the save is completed the SCENE FILE page appears again When you select a file number where data has already been saved The message OVERWRITE OK YES NO appears In this case the mark is placed on the left of NO e To stop overwriting press the MENU knob e To overwrite move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob When a Memory Stick has been inserted You can use up to 20 pages from P01 to P20 to save scene files in the Memory Stick Each page can hold up to 5 files Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then press the MENU knob P01 SCENE STORE DISPLAY MODE 0 SCENE 1 ESC ALL FEB 05 02 STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD SFILE SAVE e MEMI 5S Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message STORE OK YES NO appears P01 SCENE STORE ESC STORE OK YES NO DISPLAY MODE ALL
15. If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the POWER SAVE page appears then press the MENU knob The POWER SAVE page appears The current settings appear on the right side of each item Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The TOP menu appears Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to PAINT and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the PAINT menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears If the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to WHITE and press the MENU knob to display the WHITE page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the WHITE page appears and press the MENU knob to select the page connector during recording O4OPOWER SAVE TOP i LINK OUT DSABL REC AUDIO OUT EE PO2OWHITE NETWORK THUMB SAVE COLOR TEMP lt A gt 3200 COLOR lt a gt 0 lt A gt 0 lt A gt 0 lt A gt OFF COLOR TEMP lt B gt COLOR FINE lt B gt 0 0 DS600K OFF Item Setting i LINK OUT Enable or disable i LINK AV C OUT item Description earn een kocu COLOR TEMP Sets the color temperature for the lt A gt desired value Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error NETWORK Select whether to permanently enable tends to be bigger for adjustment of THUMB the CBK
16. LENS connector Lens cable clamp Shoulder strap posts Attach the supplied shoulder strap to these posts For details see 9 7 Attaching the Shoulder Strap on page 166 Light shoe Attach an optional accessory such as a video light to this shoe LIGHT connector 2 pin female Connect the cable of an Anton Bauer Ultralight System attached to the light shoe The system operates with lights powered by 12 V with a maximum power consumption of 50 W Lens mount special bayonet mount Use this for mounting the lens Lens locking lever After inserting the lens in the lens mount rotate the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position Lens mount cap Remove this cap by pushing up the lens locking lever When no lens is mounted keep this cap fitted for protection from dust LENS connector 12 pin Fit the lens cable to this connector Contact your Sony representative for more information about the lens you can use Tripod mount When using the camcorder on a tripod attach the tripod adaptor option Shoulder pad You can move the shoulder pad forwards or backwards by raising up the shoulder pad locking lever Do this to ensure the best balance when shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder For details see 9 8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position on page 166 2 2 Accessory Attachments 15 S 01 UO0Q puke sey JO suonouny pue suoneoogq Zz JeldeyD HII
17. Message Message Display display mode condition setting 1 2 l3 When the filter ND n CC m wheren N N JY selection has 1 2 3 4 m A B C D been changed When the gain GAIN n where n 3dB N N Y setting has been 0dB 3dB 6dB 9qdB 12dqB changed 18dB 24dB 30cB 36dB 42dB 48dB When the WHITE n where n A N IN Y setting of the CH B CH PRESET or WHITE BAL ATW RUN switch has been changed When the DCC ON or OFF N IY Y OUTPUT DCC selector has been set to DCC ON or OFF When the SS 1 100 PDW 510 530 IN IY Y shutter speed or 1 60 PDW 510P 530P and mode or 1 125 1 250 1 500 setting has been 1 1000 1 2000 ECS SLS changed When the black E g WHITE OK N IY IY or white balance has been adjusted 1 This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER selector is set to ON 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen Changing the display mode The currently set display mode appears on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu To change it proceed as follows 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in 7 2 2 Selecting the Display Items on page 123 until the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu appears on the screen 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to VF DISPLAY MODE and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of WF DISPLAY MODE changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 3 Turm the MENU knob until the desire
18. The Picture Cache time determines the number of seconds recorded from the Picture Cache counting back from the time when you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording However the number of seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache may be shorter immediately after the setting of the VDR SAVE STBY switch is changed and in the special situations explained in the following notes e The contents of picture cache memory are unstable for a short time immediately after you select Picture Cache mode or change the Picture Cache time Therefore if you put the unit into recording mode by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens immediately after such operation pictures just before such operation cannot be recorded Also a certain amount of time is required to actually start recording to a disc immediately after you insert a disc and when the VDR SAVE STBY switch is set to SAVE In these cases the number of seconds that can actually be recorded from the picture cache may be fewer than the specified picture cache time During playback or recording review no data is saved to the picture cache memory Thus it is not possible to use this function to rerecord the last few seconds of material from playback or recording review To turn Picture Cache mode on proceed as follows 3 2 Recording MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The las
19. In consecutive mode MANU INTERVAL SEC FRAME SFR AME means the number of frames and SEC the length of interval for the consecutive mode The camcorder exits Manual Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off However the NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL and PRE LIGHTING settings are maintained You do not need to set them again the next time you use Manual Interval Rec mode To shoot and record in Manual Interval Rec mode After making the required settings proceed as follows After performing the basic procedure for shooting and recording following the instructions in 3 2 1 Basic Procedures page 40 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Press the REC START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens The camcorder starts recording in Manual Interval Rec mode In the viewfinder MANU INTERVAL FRAME and the TALLY indicator green flash e In the single shot mode the TALLY indicator flashes twice per second e In the consecutive mode the TALLY indicator flashes four times per second To exit Manual Interval Rec mode Do one of the following e In the single shot mode press the EJECT button e In the consecutive mode press the camcorder REC START button or the lens VTR button to stop recording e Set the camcorder POWER switch to OFF After the camcorder has exited from Manual Interval Rec mode it records picture data stored in memory to the disc Notes on
20. Total duration of the sub clips in the current clip list Cursor indicates where the next sub clip will be added Thumbnails of sub clips already added to the current clip list 4 2 2 Reordering Sub Clips To move the cursor in the scene selection window When the scene selection window appears as you carry out step 3 turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to move the cursor in the desired direction 6 When you have finished selecting all the clips you want save the current clip list to disc For details see 4 2 6 Saving the Current Clip List to Disc page 77 Unless the current clip list has been saved to disc its contents will be lost when the camcorder is powered off or the disc is ejected After creating a clip list be sure to save it 4 2 Creating Clip Lists SEL SET dial THUMBNAIL button Thumbnail indicator SUB CLIP button _ _ SHIFT button Proceed as follows Press the SUB CLIP button turning on the indicator Press the THUMBNAIL button turning on the indicator Thumbnails of the sub clips within the current clip list appear If the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON set it to OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button e If you set the MENU ON OFF to ON during thumbnail display thumbnail display is cancelled and replaced with menu display 00 05 20 00 If the clip list you want to edit is not the current clip list Load the
21. be careful never to remove the battery BP GL65 pack GL95 L60S L80S Align these lines 154 9 1 Power Supply 9 1 2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to an Exhausted Battery When the battery pack is becoming exhausted you can perform battery replacement without causing a break to the camcorder operation by using an AC adaptor To do this proceed as follows T Connect an AC 550 AC 550CE Adaptor to an AC power source then connect it to the DC IN connector of the camcorder For details see the next section The power source switches automatically from the battery pack to the AC adaptor connected to the DC IN connector There may be some noise on the video signal at the time of power source switching 2 Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one 9 1 3 Using an AC Adaptor Using the AC 550 550CE AC adaptor Connect the camcorder to the AC power supply through the AC 550 550CE AC Adaptor as shown in the following figure and turn the POWER switch of the AC 550 550CE on to an AC power source AC Adaptor Power switch on AC 550 DC OUT DC output cable supplied with the AC 550 550CE Using an AC adaptor Using the AC DN10 AC adaptor Mount the AC DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack then connect to the AC power supply The AC DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power gt to an AC power source Connecting
22. mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob until the lens file No in use appears then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark If you do not want to use a lens file Select NO OFFSET 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section 7 3 8 Selecting the Aspect Ratio The FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu allows you to select the aspect ratio of the video output signal When the CA 701 702 702P camera adaptor is used with the camcorder this function is not available To select the aspect ratio disconnect the CA 701 702 702P camera adaptor from the camcorder or turn off the power of the CA 701 702 702P camera adaptor Proceed as follows 1 Follow the procedure of steps 1 to 3 described in 7 3 4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance Setting on page 133 to display the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu 20 FORMAT 916 9 4 3 SELECT 16 9 SCAN MODE I UC J SELECT UC 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to 16 9 4 3 SELECT and press MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 3 Tur the MENU knob to display the desired aspect ratio and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes t
23. mark changes toa mark and the mark changes to a mark The message Valid after power off appears if you change this item 5 Power the camcorder off and then power it on again The setting made in step 4 is enabled 6 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF to end the menu operation File data v PDW 510 510P 530 530P Transfer of files lt Laptop computer etc i LINK cable not supplied 6 2 1 Making FAM connections Proceed as follows Ifthere is a disc loaded in this unit put the unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations Stopped Thumbnail indicator see page 26 Off Disc access by DELETE LAST CLIP DELETE ALL CLIPS see page 42 QUICK FORMAT see page 38 and so on Stopped Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function Off MENU ON OFF switch OFF LIVE LOGGING see page 57 OFF Unsaved current clip list Save or clear 2 If this unit is connected to a remote computer by FTP log out from the FTP session see page 107 3 Connect the i LINK DV IN OUT S400 connector on this unit to the i LINK EEE1394 connector on the remote computer using an i LINK cable 6 2 File Access Mode File Operations Windows recognizes this unit as aremovable disc and displays one of the following icons on the remote computer s task bar Windows 2000 ie a Windows XP The remote computer is
24. 0 0 N Q TEST OUT SELECT 6 Add the items Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the desired items appears then press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the desired item then press the MENU knob The USER P2 EDIT page appears again displaying the newly added item T Add the remaining items by repeating steps 4 to 6 7 1 Menu Organization and Operation You can add up to 10 items on one page Deleting items from a page by using the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch You can delete items from any of the USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages Proceed as follows 1 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item to be deleted 2 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST The message PRESET DATA OK appears 3 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST again The item is deleted Deleting items from a page by using the menu Proceed as follows T Move the mark to the item to be deleted and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears 2 Select DELETE and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and the message DELETE OK Yes No appears at the upper right 3 To delete turn the MENU knob to move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob Replacing items on a page You can replace the items on any of the USER 1 EDIT to USER 5 EDIT pages Proceed as follows T Tum the ME
25. 5 3 Setting the Electronic Shutter 89 BulpsooeyY 104 sues pue s ueujsnipy gJeldeyD HII Bulpsooey 104 sues pue sjuewisnipy gse deyo WA When the RM B150 Remote Control Unit is connected You can set the shutter speed of ECS with the rotary encoder of the RM B150 Setting the shutter speed in SLS mode Proceed as follows MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch Changing the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while holding down the MENU knob The TOP menu appears Setting the shutter speed in SLS Slow Speed Shutter mode Set the shutter speed mode to SLS For the operation see Setting the shutter mode and standard mode shutter speed on page 89 lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE EILE DIAGNOSIS SLS 1 30 1FRAME Example of viewfinder screen display for SLS setting operation 2 Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of frames appears The number of frames can be set to values in the range 1 to 8 and 16 1 frame nearly equals to 1 30 second PDW 510 530 or 1 25 second PDW 510P 530P Changing the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode and speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu Proceed as
26. ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL REC TAKE H TOTAL TIME REC TIME PRE LIGHTING 1 3 Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of REC TIME changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 14 Tum the MENU knob until the desired time to be recorded on the disc appears As you turn the MENU knob the setting of REC TIME changes in the following sequence 5SEC gt 10SEC gt 15SEC gt 20SEC gt 30SEC gt 40SEC gt 50SEC gt IMIN gt 2MIN gt Here SEC means seconds 5SEC is 5 seconds and MIN means minutes 1 MIN is one minute You cannot set a REC TIME that is more than one thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME For example When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H the maximum value of REC TIME is 2 MIN 60 minutes divided by 30 gives 2 minutes 1 5 Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 1 6 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to PRE LIGHTING 3 2 Recording 47 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup MIMI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Ja deyo HAIN 48 O3SOFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL REC TAKE_TOTAL TIME REC TIME gt PRE L IGHT ING 1 T Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of P
27. CENTER H POS 48 to 47 H position of the center marker CENTER V POS 15 to 14 0 V position of the center marker O 11 GAIN SW GAIN LOW 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 0 dB See 7 3 1 Setting Gain GAIN MID 30 36 42 48 dB 9 dB a o PEAY Sak GAIN HIGH 18 dB GAIN TURBO 42 dB TURBO SW IND OFF ON OFF O 12 VF SETTING ZEBRA OFF ON OFF See 7 2 5 Setting the ZEBRA SELECT 1 2 BOTH 1 Viewinaar Olnpege 149 ZEBRA1 DET LEVEL 20 to 107 70 ZEBRA1 APT LEVEL 1 to 20 10 ZEBRA2 DET LEVEL 52 to 109 100 VF DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 0 VF ASPECT AUTO 16 9 AUTO 1 84 Menu List USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu O 13 AUTO IRIS IRIS OVERRIDE OFF ON OFF See 5 4 Changing the IRIS SPEED 99 to 99 0 ae acu inane on CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF ON OFF page 91 IRIS WINDOW 1 2 3 4 5 6 VAR 1 IRIS WINDOW IND OFF ON OFF IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 465 245 IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 120 85 72 IRIS VAR H POS 447 to 446 0 IRIS VAR V POS 104 to 104 0 O 14 SHOT ID ID 1 12 characters _ See 7 2 7 Setting the Shot ID 2 ID on page 127 ID 3 ID 4 O 15 SHOT DISP SHOT DATE OFF ON OFF See 7 2 6 Recording Shot SHOT TIME OFF ON OFF TEA DAN eae SHOT MODEL NAME OFF ON OFF SHOT SERIAL NO OFF ON OFF SHOT ID SEL OFF ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 OFF ID 4 SHOT 16 9 ID OFF ON OFF SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF ON OFF O 16 SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL OFF
28. High F pa pa DDD Internal Operation Power the unit off and TEMP temperatur continues move it to a cool e high place 1 74 10 3 Operation Warnings Alarm Indicators on color Indicators in viewfinder Warning Message monochrome LCDs _ on camcorder body sounds Warning Flashing xx Continuous 2 1 flash s 9 9 9 Battery continuous 5 4 flashes s a beeps s status ae oy indication WARNING REC tally BATT 1 beep s ey 00 Continuou s beep ACC pa pa DDD Sensor Skew Sensor Problem VDR Action to take operation Internal Operation Protect the unit from drive continues shock and vibrations sensor turn off the power error and contact a Sony service representative 1 Asterisks are replaced by digits in the display 2 During recording 3 During playback fast forward fast reverse or stop 4 1 flash second 5 4 flashes second Operation error messages An operation or error message is displayed in the operation error message display area see page 121 in the viewfinder Operation error message AUTO INTERVAL M S Meaning Indicates the camera is in the Auto Interval Rec mode M S indicates the shooting interval MANU INTERVAL Indicates the camera is in the single FRAME shot mode of the Manual Interval Rec mode FRAME indicates the number of frames INTERVAL S M Indicate
29. J9 deUD Ml 1 3 Precautions Use and Storage Do not subject the unit to severe shocks The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped After use Always turn off the power Before storing the unit for a long period Remove the battery pack Use and storage locations Store in a level ventilated place Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places e Places subject to temperature extremes e Very damp places e Places subject to severe vibration e Near strong magnetic fields e In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this unit be powered off Note on laser beams Laser beams may damage the CCDs If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam be careful not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the camera Use at a high temperature If the unit is used at a high temperature white flecks may appear on the screen About the LCD panels LCD panels are manufactured with extremely high precision technology that yields effective pixel rates of 99 99 or higher However very rarely one or more pixels may be permanently dark or permanently lit in white red blue or green Th
30. OK then press the MENU knob The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 5 to 7 The TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears again The time set on the TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed To cancel the setting Before executing step 8 move the mark to ESC at the top right of the window and press the MENU knob Alternatively push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears 7 3 7 Selecting the Lens File The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to change the lens file according to the lens in use 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus When you are using a serial lens you can automatically load the lens file number corresponding to your lens by setting LENS AUTO RECALL in the LENS FILE 1 page of the FILE menu to ON Proceed as follows to select the lens file T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Tum the MENU knob until the LENS FILE page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page The LENS FILE page shows the number and the name of the currently selected lens file UISOLENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT F ID lt LENS INFORMATION gt L ID L MF 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to LENS FILE SELECT and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a
31. S 01 U09 pue Sued JO SUOROUNJ pue sUOI e007 Z Je deyD HAIN 16 2 3 Audio Functions Microphone MIC IN connector Neal 2 MIC LEVEL control Cf EARPHONE jack front monaural Built in speaker Ne N EARPHONE jack rear stereo a W ALARM volume control MONITOR volume control MONITOR switch and CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch Audio functions 1 Microphone This is a super cardioid directional monaural microphone with an external power supply 48 V system MIC IN microphone input connector XLR type 3 pin female Connect the supplied microphone to this connector A microphone other than the supplied one may also be connected as long as it can operate with the power 48 V supplied from this connector By fitting a 5 pin connector service part number A 1053 453 A you can also use a stereo microphone MIC microphone LEVEL control This control adjusts the audio level of the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector EARPHONE jack front monaural minijack EARPHONE jack rear monaural stereo switchable minijack You can monitor the E E sound during recording and playback sound during playback Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built in speaker When an alarm is indicated you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone You can use the rear EARPHONE jack for stereo output by setting the H
32. SCENE 1 STANDARD FEB 05 02 STANDARD STANDARD 05 STANDARD SFILE SAVE MEMI 5S To carry out the storing move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving the mark pointing to NO You can select the contents of the user file to be displayed on the page For details see Selecting the display contents on page 151 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section To return to the SCENE FILE page After the message COMPLETE is displayed move the mark to ESC at the top right of the page by turning the MENU knob then press the MENU knob White balance setting data to be saved in the scene file The white balance setting data to be saved in the scene file depends on the setting of the SCENE WHITE DATA item on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu FOSOREFERENCE REFERENCE STORE REFERENCE CLEAR REFERENCE LOAD EXEC EXEC EXEC REFERENCE SAVE EXEC F 1D 00000000000000000 SCENE WHITE DATA OFF 8 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files 149 geq Bunjes 1 sn Bulpeo7 pue Bunes g uajdeyo A eyeq Bunjes sn Bulpeo7 pue Bulnes g Jaydeup 150 When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to ON The white balance setting data selected when you save the scene file is saved For example when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A the adjusted values in memory
33. The audio input connectors of the camcorder are female and 3 pin and the audio output connectors are male and 5 pin A converting adaptor may be required depending on the audio equipment to be connected to the camcorder Extension boards CBK SD01 SDI Output Board CBK SCO1 Composite Input Board CBK FCO1 Pull Down Board for the PD W 5 10 530 only CBK NCO1 Network Adaptor CBK PCO1 Memory Card Adaptor Equipment for maintenance and easier handling LC 777 Hard Carrying Case LC DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case Tripod Adaptor VCT 14 Maintenance Manual Design and specifications are subject to change without notice Notes e Always make a test recording and verify that it was recorded successfully SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER Specifications 179 sexipueddy Ml Menu List This section briefly explains me
34. The unit may not operate properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use If you notice bending deformation or surface corrosion contact your dealer or a Sony service representative as soon as possible to have the battery terminal replaced Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime Contact your dealer or a Sony service representative for more information about inspections 10 2 Maintenance 173 vueugueN 0L Ja deyD WM soueuelule OL Ja deyo WA 10 3 Operation Warnings When a problem occurs at power on or during operation a warning is given by the relevant indicators on the color and monochrome LCDs in the viewfinder and on the camcorder body The speaker and earphone also give audible warnings Operation warnings Alarm Indicators on color Indicators in viewfinder Warning Problem VDR Action to take Message monochrome LCDs __ on camcorder body sounds operation Warning Flashing xx Continuous 1 flash s 9 Battery continuous gt e 4 flashes s 4 beeps s status a DDD indication WARNING REC tally BATT 1 beep s eo LIQ Continuou s beep Exec 1 Soe Jot ey NYY Recording Recording Turn off the power error stops and consult your Sony repr
35. With a CA 701 Camera Adaptor option connected to the camcorder you can record separate sounds on audio channels 3 and 4 LINE AES EBU MIC selectors These select the audio source of the audio input signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors LINE Line input audio equipment AES EBU AES EBU format audio signal MIC Microphone input When these switches are in the MIC position and the 48V switch described below is on if you inadvertently connect any audio device other than a microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors the device may be damaged 48V OFF switches Select either of the following positions for the microphones to be connected 48V For a microphone to use an external power supply OFF For a microphone to use an internal power supply 2 3 Audio Functions AUDIO OUT audio output connector XLR type 5 pin male This connector outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4 The MONITOR CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switches allow you to select the audio signal to be monitored AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 audio channel 1 and channel 2 input connectors XLR type 3 pin female These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone When the LINE AES EBU MIC selector is set to AES EBU the CH1 connector is used for channel 1 and 2 inputs and the CH2 connector for channel 3 and 4 inputs DC OUT
36. external time code Turbo gain Video amplifier gain increased from 30 dB by 6 to 18 dB by combining adjacent pixels of the CCD Glossary sexipueddy Ml 210 UMID Unique Material Identifier A standard SMPTE 330M for video and audio metadata The Basic section of a UMID contains a globally unique number and a material number for the identification of recorded material An optional section called the Source Pack contains information such as the time and location of recording A UMID with the Basic section only is called a Basic UMID A UMID with the Source Pack is called an Extended UMID User bits A total of 32 bits are provided in the time code which the user can use to record such information as date scene number or reel number on video tape Also called user s bits VBS A composite signal consisting of video signal burst signal and sync signal Vertical smear A bright vertical line which appears on the screen when shooting a very bright object with a CCD camera Also called smear Video gain Amount of amplification for video signals expressed in decibels dB VITC Vertical Interval Time Code A time code recorded in two horizontal lines during each vertical blanking period of a video signal White balance adjustment In the light of a particular color temperature to adjust the white levels of the R G and B channels of a color video camera so that any white object shot in that li
37. list press this button Pressing it switches from the whole screen display to a thumbnail display Press once more to return to the whole screen display To search thumbnails by essence marks hold down the SHIFT button and press this button Thumbnail indicator This lights when thumbnails are shown Sub clip indicator This lights when playing back following a clip list 2 5 Output Video Operating Section SUB CLIP button Press this to play back according to a clip list You can play back a particular clip or sequential clips or carry out a search of the selected clip list When no clip list is selected pressing this button has no effect and the operation is invalid To carry out operations such as saving recalling or deleting a clip list hold down the SHIFT button and press this button SHIFT button Use this in combination with other buttons 2 6 Menu Operating Section MENU knob MENU knob Use this knob to change the page selection or a setting within the menu Press If you press this knob when the arrow is placed at the page title on the menu the arrow changes to a question mark and you can change the page by turning this knob When the arrow mark is placed at a position other than the page title you can change the setting of the current item by pressing and turning this knob Turn Turn this knob to change the page or change item settings STATUS ON SEL OFF
38. menu display on page selection display off switch To enable this switch set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF ON SEL Each time this switch is pushed upward a window to confirm the menu settings and status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen The window consists of three pages which are switched each time the switch is pushed upward Each page is displayed for about 10 seconds OFF To clear the page immediately after display push this switch down to the OFF position You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu For details see 7 2 8 Displaying the Status Confirmation Windows on page 128 OFF ON B STATUS ON SEL OFF switch MENU ON OFF switch MENU CANCELIPRST ESCAPE CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch Memory Stick compartment Cover MENU ON OFF switch To use this switch open the cover This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to OFF ON Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen at the last accessed page When the menu is used for the first time the first page is displayed OFF Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen CANCEL PRST preset ESCAPE switch To enable this switch set the MENU ON
39. newly loaded current clip list Press the SUB CLIP button and the THUMBNAIL button turning on the indicators Thumbnails of the sub clips in the clip list appear If the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON set it to OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button If you set the MENU ON OFF to ON during thumbnail display thumbnail display is cancelled and replaced with menu display Unless the current clip list has been saved to disc its contents will be lost when you load a new clip list from the disc 4 3 2 Deleting Clip Lists Froma __ Disc Proceed as follows 1 Display the CLIP menu See Displaying the CLIP menu page 78 2 Select DELETE in the CLIP menu and press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob A clip list appears The date of creation or the title is displayed for each clip list The date of creation is always displayed for clip lists without titles To switch between display of dates of creation titles and clip list names With the SHIFT button held down press the SET button With each press the display changes as follows Dates of creation gt titles gt clip list names gt dates of creation 3 Select the name of the clip list to delete and press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob The message DELETE OK YES NO appears 4 Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to move the mark to YES and press the dial knob The selected clip list is deleted from the disc 5 Hold down the SHI
40. such as Dolby E and Dolby Digital AC 3 XDCAM can record non audio as an input signal 1 Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories Non drop frame mode A mode of advancing time code which ignores the difference in frame values between real time and the time code Using this mode produces a difference of approximately 86 seconds per day between real time and time code which causes problems when editing programs in units of seconds using the number of frames as a reference Progressive scan mode CCD output A scanning method in which odd rows and even rows are read at the same time Also called full screen scanning Proxy AV data Low resolution data with a video bandwidth of 1 5 Mbps and an audio bandwidth of 64 Kbps per channel This unit records proxy AV data automatically whenever high resolution MPEG IMX or DVCAM data is recorded Reference video signal A video signal that contains a sync signal or sync and burst signals used as a reference for synchronization of video equipment Return video A video signal returned to a camera from a VTR or a video signal selected from among several camera angles in a control room and returned to a camera so the cameraman can check the video SDI Serial Digital Interface An interface standardized as SMPTE 259M which enables the transmission of an uncompressed digital component stream Shot data Data recorded while shooting in the color bars the user
41. white balance When OFFSET WHITE lt A gt is ON sets the offset for the white balance of channel A using the color temperature Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature WARM COOL lt A gt Item COLOR FINE lt A gt Description Adjusts the value more precisely if the adjustment by WARM COOL lt A gt is not satisfactry OFFSET WHITE lt B gt Turns the setting of the offset for channel B ON or OFF ON Adds the offset adjusted on this page to the white balance WARM COOL lt B gt Sets the offset for the white balance of channel B using the color temperature Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature COLOR FINE lt B gt Adjusts the value more precisely if the adjustment by WARM COOL lt B gt is not satisfactory 4 Set the WHITE BAL switch to the position corresponding to the desired channel A or B If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B when you operate the camcorder the adjustment value will not be reflected in the output signal 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and press MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 6 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting
42. x lt DEL ALL MEM CLP EXEC i FORMAT MEMORY EXEC 1 This is supported from firmware version 1 4 Menu List 187 sexipueddy WA PAINT Menu List The following table lists and describes the items in the value The setting range shown on the menu screen may PAINT menu differ from what is shown in the manual When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses the setup value is a relative No Page Item Settings Default Description 01 SW STATUS GAMMA OFF ON ON Turns the gamma correction on or off CHROMA OFF ON ON Turns the chroma of the composite signal on or off MATRIX OFF ON ON Turns the linear matrix correction on or off KNEE OFF ON ON Turns the knee correction on or off WHITE CLIP OFF ON ON Turns the white clipping correction on or off DETAIL OFF ON ON Turns the detail signal on or off APERTURE OFF ON ON Turns the aperture function on or off FLARE ON OFF ON Turns the flare function on or off EVS OFF ON OFF Turns the EVS shutter on or off TEST SAW OFF REC SAW_ OFF Selects the test signal 02 WHITE COLOR TEMP lt A gt Display color 3200 Sets the color temperature of WHITE A temperature COLOR FINE lt A gt 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN lt A gt 99 to 99 0 Only the value of R GAIN is changed
43. 1 25 sec for PDW 510P 530P to 8 16 frames 1 2 sec for PDW 510 530 2 3 sec for PDW 510P 530P For shooting subjects in low level lighting conditions 5 3 Setting the Electronic Shutter 1 Only when the CBK FC01 is installed 2 The SLS mode can only be selected when the CCD scan mode see page 138 is set to I interlace scan Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing shutter speed When the automatic iris is used the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases thus reducing the depth of field Under artificial light particularly fluorescent or mercury lamps the light intensity may appear to be constant but the red green and blue intensities are actually changing in synchronization with the frequency of the power supply causing flicker Using an electronic shutter under such lighting could make the flicker even worse Color flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power supply frequency is 60 Hz with the PDW 510 530 or 50 Hz with the PDW 510P 530P However if the power frequency is 50 Hz with the PDW 510 530 or 60 Hz with the PDW 510P 530P setting the shutter speed to 1 100 or 1 60 can reduce this flicker When a bright object is shot in EVS mode or ECS mode in such a manner that it fills the screen the upper edge of the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs Before using EVS mode o
44. 2 Move the ll mark to the digit you want to change and then press the MENU knob 3 Rotate the MENU knob to move the Ill mark to the desired digit in the list of selectable digits and then press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the remaining digits 5 When you have finished entering the value rotate the MENU knob to move the W mark to END and then press the MENU knob The camcorder exits numeric input mode and the original CLIP TITLE page appears To check clip titles Press the THUMBNAIL button to display thumbnail screen and select the clip whose title you want to check The title of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen See Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails page 64 for more information about the thumbnail screen It is not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value Even if you enter 00000 the value is reset to 00001 when the camcorder exits numeric input mode The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every time a title is generated When the value reaches 99999 the next number restarts from 00001 Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the serial number after recording several clips or the same is true depending on the value setting Care should be taken when setting the serial number 3 2 9 Assigning User Defined Clip and Clip List Names The following standard format names are assigned automatically to clips and clip lists that are cre
45. 24H Menu List USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu 04 FUNCTION 2 D5600 OFF ON OFF Turns on and off the function which electrically applies a 5600K color temperature filter WIDE AWB OFF ON ON Turns on and off the function which widens the range adjustable by Auto White Balance WHITE SWTCH lt B gt MEM ATW MEM Sets the function of the WHITE BAL B switch SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF 1 2 3 1 Changes the white gain smoothly when operating the WHITE BAL switch ATW SPEED 1 2 3 4 5 4 Sets the convergence speed for Auto Tracing White balance ZOOM SPEED 0 to 99 20 Sets the zoom speed when a serial lens is connected LOW LIGHT 99 to 99 0 Turns the warning display on or off when the video average level is less than the preset value LOW LIGHT LEVEL 99 to 99 16 Sets the level at which the LOW LIGHT function becomes effective VF BATT WARNING 10 20 10 Sets the threshold value of remaining battery capacity to make the remaining capacity indication flash 05 POWER i LINK OUT ENABL DSABL DSABL See 7 3 2 Selecting the SAVE REG AUDIO OUT EE SAVE EE Output Signals on page 131 NETWORK THUMB STBY SAVE STBY O 06 VF DISP 1 VF DISP OFF ON ON See 7 2 2 Selecting the VF DISP MODE 1 2 3 3 Display Items on page 123 DISP EXTENDER OFF ON ON DISP FILTER OFF ON ON DISP WHITE OFF ON ON DISP GAIN OFF ON ON DISP
46. 3 FTP File Operations Description Specifies the type of data to be transferred Specifies the data structure Specifies the transfer mode Sends a list of files from this unit to the remote computer Command syntax TYPE lt SP gt lt type code options delimited by lt SP gt gt lt CRLF gt lt type code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM data is always transferred as I regardless of the type code specification e A ASCII N Non print T Telnet format C ASA Carriage Control e E EBCDIC N Non print T Telnet format C ASA Carriage Control e IMAGE Binary default e L LOCAL BYTE SIZE byte size Input example TYPE STRU lt SP gt lt structure code gt lt CRLF gt lt structure code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM the structure is always F regardless of the structure code specification e F File structure default e R Record structure e P Page structure Input example STRU F MODE lt SP gt lt mode code gt lt CRLF gt lt mode code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM the mode is always S regardless of the mode code specification e S Stream mode default e B Block mode e C Compressed mode Input example MODE S LIST lt SP gt lt options gt lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt lt options gt can be any of the following e a Also display file names that begin with e
47. 9 7 Attaching the Shoulder Strap Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown below Shoulder strap post Attaching the shoulder strap Attaching Pull up the strap to lock Clip the fitting Attaching the shoulder strap Removing Press here and pull in the direction shown by the arrow to release gt So q Y Removing the shoulder strap 9 7 Attaching the Shoulder Strap 9 8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position 9 8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position factory setting backward by up to 10 mm 3 8 inch or forward by up to 25 mm 1 inch This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder 1 3 S T q Bottom 2 Shoulder pad Adjusting the shoulder pad position Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad 2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position 3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position 9 9 Connecting the Remote Control Unit Connecting the RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit enables remote control of the principal camera functions Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE connector 8 pin automatically puts the camcorder into remote control
48. A are saved in the scene file and when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST the preset value is saved When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to OFF White balance setting data is not stored in the scene file Saving scene files from the camcorder memory to the Memory Stick You can save five scene files from the camcorder to the Memory Stick in a single operation Proceed as follows After displaying the SCENE FILE page see page 148 turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SCENE STORE then press the MENU knob One of the SCENE STORE pages appears 2 Turn the MENU knob until the desired SCENE STORE page appears then press the MENU knob PO1 SCENE STORE DISPLAY MODE 0 SCENE 1 ESC ALL FEB 05 02 FEB 06 02 SCENE4 FEB 08 02 SCENES FEB 08 02 SFILE SAVE e MEMI 5 SCENE2 NO FILE 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SFILE SAVE MEM1 5 and press the MENU knob The message SAVE OK YES NO appears PO1 SCENE STORE ESC SAVE OK YES NO DISPLAY MODE i ALL SCENE 1 SCENE2 NO FILE SCENE4 SCENES SFILE SAVE e MEMI 5 4 To carry out the save move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving the mark pointing to NO When the save is completed the message COMPLETE appears 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 8 2 Saving and Loading Scene
49. A or B the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory On the PDW 530 530P models with two switchable filters the memory stores a separate white balance setting for each CC filter setting BLACK Automatic adjustment of the black set and black balance GAIN selector This selector switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting The gains corresponding to the L M and H settings can be selected from the setup menu The factory settings are L 0 dB M 9 dB and H 18 dB When this selector is adjusted the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds For details about setting the gain values see 7 3 1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions on page 130 OUTPUT DCC output signal dynamic contrast control selector This selector switches the video signal that is output to the VDR viewfinder and video monitor between the following two BARS Outputs the color bar signal CAM Outputs the video signal from the camera When this is selected you can switch DCC D on and off with this selector 1 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject objects in the background will be lost in the glare The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is particula
50. AV C FAM AV C FRONT MIC SELECT MONO STREO STREO when stereo microphone is connected EXT VIDEO SOURCE i LINK CMPST i LINK when option board is connected EXT OUTPUT DELAY SYNC VIDEO SYNC when option board is connected SETUP REMOVE 0 0 7 5 7 5 PDW 510 530 only 22 UMID SET COUNTRY CODE 4 byte alphanumeric See 7 3 10 Using UMID strings Data on page 139 ORGANIZATION 4 byte alphanumeric strings USER CODE 4 byte alphanumeric strings TIME ZONE 00 00 to xx 00 23 CLIP TITLE TITLE DSABL ENABL DSABL _ See 3 2 8 Assigning User Defined Clip Titles SELECT PREFIX When EXEC the TITLE item is set to Automatically on page 52 ENAB CLEAR NUMERIC EXEC When the TITLE item is set to ENABL LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC When the TITLE item is set to ENABL PREFIX When the Up to 10 TITLE TITLE item is set to alphanumeric ENABL characters and symbols NUMERIC When the 5 digit number 00001 TITLE item is set to ENABL 24 FILE NAMING FORM C FREE iii See 3 2 9 Assigning User NAMING AUTO NAMING When C TITLE Crt rine a pl ag re the NAMING FORM item pag 99 is set to FREE 1 86 Menu List USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu 25 MEMORY COPY CURRENT CLP EXEC See 3 2 11 Recording Proxy REC Data to Memory Cards With gt COPY ALL CLIPS EXEC CBK PC01 Installed on 3 ABORT COPY EXEC page 58 a
51. Color Bars veces reisctss toute sesentes 126 7 2 7 Setting the Shot ID ee 127 7 2 8 Displaying the Status Confirmation WiINdOWS linnaei 128 7 2 9 Confirming the Image of the Return Video Signal in the Viewfinder 129 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus Lucile Sadie eRutacondeuaus dactrenspianensieuecearuneen 130 7 3 1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions c cee 130 7 3 2 Selecting the Output Signals 131 7 3 3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually E E A E AEAEE 132 7 3 4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance Setting c ccecuccpesmak ethane 133 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 SWItCNES letahna dnon 133 7 3 6 Setting the Date Time of the Internal CIOCK sis asessinvasasdeecanmuspnsaara uray 135 Table of Contents 5 7 3 7 Selecting the Lens File 0 0 136 7 3 8 Selecting the Aspect Ratio 136 7 3 9 Setting the CCD Scan Mode 138 7 3 10 Using UMID Data 139 7 3 11 Making Network Settings 141 7 4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard SettingS cccessssee 143 Chapter 8 Saving and Loading User Setting Data 8 1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a Memory Stick 000 144 8 1 1 Handling the Memory Stick 144 8 1 2 Saving User Menu Data to the Memory SUCK sista siiseriiase usw ee 145 8 1 3 Loading Saved Data From a Memory SUCKS E E A 147 8 2 Saving and Loading
52. Effective picture elements more than 99 99 Viewfinder CRT 2 inch monochrome quick start type Horizontal resolution 4 3 mode 600 TV lines at screen center 16 9 mode 450 TV lines at screen center Specifications Optical Disc Drive Section General Usable disc PFD23 Professional Disc Data transfer rate Max 72Mbps per optical head Recording playback time MPEG IMX 50Mbps 45 minutes 40Mbps 55 minutes 30Mbps 68 minutes DVCAM 85 minutes Digital video Sampling frequency Y 13 5 MHz R Y B Y 6 75 MHz Quantization 10 bits sample 8 bits sample for compression processing Compression MPEG 2 4 2 2P ML 50 40 30 Mbps or DVCAM Audio with standard playback machine Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz 1 0 dB Dynamic range 85 dB min Distortion THD 0 08 max Cross talk 70 dB max Wow and flutter Below measurable limit Input output connectors Signal inputs AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 XLR type 3 pin female 60 dBu 4 dBu 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms MIC IN XLR type 3 pin female 60 dBu GENLOCKIN BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced TC IN BNC type 0 5 V to 18 Vp p 10k Q Signal outputs TEST OUT BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced VIDEO OUT BNC type 75 Q unbalanced VBS OUT 1 0 Vp p SDI OUT 0 8 Vp p only when the CBK SD01 is installed AUDIO OUT XLR type 5 pin male 0 dBm TC OUT BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q EARPHONE minijack 8 Q to 18 dBs variable Others DC IN XLR type 4 pin ma
53. IMX REAR BNC OUT SEL LIVE LOGGING i 5 Tur the MENU knob to display ON and then press the MENU knob The camcorder enters Live Logging mode 6 start recording in the normal way by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens In Live Logging mode you cannot set the F FRUN SET R RUN switch to SET to make time code settings To make time code settings first exit Live Logging mode During Live Logging operations the time code generator run mode is always F RUN regardless of the setting of the F FRUN SET R RUN switch In Live Logging mode you cannot set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN to read time code from the disc and generate consecutive time code The Picture Cache and Interval Rec functions are not available in Live Logging mode Even if you turn these functions on they are turned off when the camcorder enters Live Logging mode 3 2 11 Recording Proxy Data to Memory Cards With CBK PC01 Installed 1 This is supported from firmware version 1 4 and PDZ 1 version 1 4 When the optional CBK PCO1 memory card reader is installed on this unit you can save proxy AV data and metadata this chapter refers to both types of data as proxy data for the clip being recorded or the clips on the disc to a memory card or Memory Stick inserted into the CBK PCOl1 You can then insert these memory cards into a computer with the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software installed t
54. Manual Interval Rec mode Take note of the following points i LINK During interval recording signal input output through the i LINK interface is impossible Time code In Manual Interval Rec mode the internal time code generator runs in R RUN mode regardless of how the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set Audio Audio signals are not recorded in Manual Interval Rec mode Playback control buttons While recording in the single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode the TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes twice per second you cannot use most of playback control buttons F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE and STOP To exit the single shot mode press the EJECT button While recording in the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode the TALLY indicator green flashes four times per second you cannot use the disc control buttons EJECT F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE and STOP To use these buttons stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens Menu operation In the single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode you cannot change the settings of CACHE INTVAL REC and NUMBER OF FRAME on the FUNCTION 1 page after the camcorder starts recording To change the settings stop recording by pressing the EJECT button or setting the POWER switch to OFF While recording in the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode you cannot change the settings of CACHE INTVAL RE
55. Memory Stick with the notch facing downward and the arrow facing away from you and insert the Memory Stick into the Memory Stick slot until it clicks into place Then close the cover Inserting the Memory Stick If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some resistance when you insert it the Memory Stick may be turned around or upside down Do not force the Memory Stick into the slot Confirm the direction of the notch and arrow on the Memory Stick before inserting the Memory Stick and then try inserting it again Removing the Memory Stick Check that the access indicator is not lit then gently press in the Memory Stick and release It pops out and you can withdraw it from the slot Check that the access indicator is not lit Gently press in Removing the Memory Stick Do not remove the Memory Stick while the access indicator is lit You may lose data or damage the Memory Stick Protecting saved data To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data use the LOCK switch on the Memory Stick Slide the switch right to the write protect position It is now impossible to write or delete data on the Memory Stick gt LU LOCK When storing and carrying the Memory Stick keep it in its original case to ensure protection of important
56. No a With firmware version 1 5 and higher files having a user defined name in g When a C MXF file is created a C MO1 XML file with the same name the C part can be handled b Possible with firmware version 1 5 and higher c Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length in a format matching the line mode format 525 625 and recording format IMX50 IMX40 IMX30 DVCAM and number of audio channels of the recorded sections of the disc and which can be overwritten by XDCAM d Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording With firmware version 1 4x and lower only the most recently recorded clip may be deleted With firmware version 1 5 and higher any clip may be selected and deleted e Only files which can be written by XDCAM f With firmware version 1 5 and higher when the C part of a C MXF file name is changed a C M01 XML file with the same name in the C part is also changed automatically in the C part is created automatically h When a C MXF file is deleted the C M01 XML file with the same name in the C part is also deleted automatically e Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory e When the following operations supported by version 1 5 and higher XDCAM devices are carried out on a disc then it becomes impossible for version 1 4x and lower XDCAM devices to record new clips or delete existing 6 1 Overview suoiesedo aji4 9 Jeldeup Hh
57. O Adjustment of lens file flare R LENS G FLARE 99 to 99 O Adjustment of lens file flare G LENS B FLARE 99 to 99 O Adjustment of lens file flare B LENS W R OFST 99 to 99 O R compensation value when extender and shrinker used LENS W B OFST 99 to 99 O B compensation value when extender and shrinker used 08 LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL R G B TEST R Selects the channel adjusted by this menu If TEST is selected the setting is the same as the setting of TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT connector LENS R G B H SAW 1 99 to 99 O H Saw white shading compensation LENS R G B H PARA 2 99 to 99 O H Parabola white shading compensation LENS R G B V SAW 99 to 99 O V Saw white shading compensation LENS R G B V PARA 1 99 to 99 O V Parabola white shading compensation 09 MEMORY M S FORMAT EXEC Format Memory Stick SDIGR M S MS IN gt JUMP TO OFF USER OFF See 8 3 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page ALL SCENE When Inserting a Memory Stick on page LENS REFER 153 USER1 1 EX is displayed when the extender is on and 0 8 is displayed when the shrinker is on Menu List 203 sexipueddy MM DIAGNOSIS Menu List The following table lists and describes the items in the DIAGNOSIS menu
58. OFF switch to ON Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF CANCEL PRST Pushing this switch up to this position displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their initial values depending on the menu operating condition Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings or resets the settings to their initial values ESCAPE Use this switch when the menu page which has a hierarchical structure is opened Each time the switch is pushed to this position the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy 27 2 6 Menu Operating Section g 04JUOD puke sey JO suonouny pue suoneoogq ZJeldeyD HIN S 01 U09 pue s Jeq JO SUOROUNJ pue sUOI e007 Z Je deyD HAIN 28 Memory Stick compartment Memory Stick Access indicator Memory Stick How to insert a Memory Stick Open the lid of the menu operating section and insert a Memory Stick with the notch facing downward in the direction shown by the arrow so that it clicks into place To remove a Memory Stick first press it in to release the lock then withdraw The Memory Stick access indicator lights when the Memory Stick is being accessed for reading or writing For details about types of Memory Stick see About a Memory Stick on page 206 e Do not insert remove a Memory Stic
59. ON ON See 7 2 8 Displaying the STATUS FUNCTION OFF ON ON Wee ones a STATUS AUDIO OFF ON ON 17 OFFSET OFFSET WHITE lt A gt OFF ON OFF See 7 3 4 Specifying an WHT WARM COOL lt A gt Display color 3200 AET cree emperature 133 COLOR FINE lt A gt 99 to 99 0 OFFSET WHITE lt B gt OFF ON OFF WARM COOL lt B gt Display color 3200 temperature COLOR FINE lt B gt 99 to 99 0 18 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER SLS OFF ON ON See 5 3 Setting the SHUTTER ECS OFF ON ON Be epee SHUTTER 1 60 OFF ON ON The items which can be set SHUTTER 1 100 OFF ON ON oe A en SHUTTER 1 125 OFF ON ON 139 SHUTTER 1 250 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 500 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 1000 OFF ON ON SHUTTER 1 2000 OFF ON ON O 19 LENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32 1 See 7 3 7 Selecting the Lens FID Display only File on page 136 L ID Display only L MF Display only Menu List 185 sexipueddy Ml USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu 20 FORMAT 16 9 4 3 SELECT 16 9 4 3 16 9 See 7 3 8 Selecting the Aspect Ratio on page 136 SCAN MODE I PsF 24P See 7 3 9 Setting the CCD 24P only when Scan Mode on page 138 option board installed UC J SELECT UC J UC Selects the signal format PDW 510 530 only 21 SOURCE REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM EXT CAM See 3 4 Recording Video SEL Signals From External EXT REC CONTROL OFF ON OFF Equipment on page 67 i LINK MODE
60. SMI to E9999 SMI The following names should be avoided Clips C5000 MXF to C9999 MXF Clip lists E0001 SMI to E0099 SMI To assign clip names on this unit The title assigned to clip becomes its clip name file name f TITLE00001 When sub item AUTO NAMING is set to C 5 TITLE00001 MXF bh TiTLEDo00 When sub item AUTO NAMING is set to TITLE m T Before starting set TITLE in the CLIP TITLE page to ENABL and set a title see page 53 2 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 3 Turn the MENU knob to select OPERATION and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 2 Recording 4 ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to FILE NAMING and then press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob to scroll the screen to FILE NAMING and then press the MENU knob The FILE NAMING page appears The current settings of the items on the page appear to the right of the items 5 Turn the MENU to select NAMING FORM and then press the MENU knob 6 Tum the MENU to display FREE and then press the MENU knob You can now enter a u
61. Tuner for a UHF Wireless Microphone System To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system fit one of the following UHF portable tuners e WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit e WRR 862 UHF Portable Tuner For each of these UHF portable tuners use the following attachment procedure For details refer to the UHF portable turner manual Fitting the WRR 855A 855B You can use the WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit simply by inserting it into the slot in the camcorder and fastening the fixing screws Undo the four fixing screws holding the cover of the slot and remove the cover ECM 672 or similar microphone 5 Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2 connector Set the switches as described in the section Switch settings when using an external microphone see page 161 9 5 Audio Input System 2 Insert the WRR 855A 855B and fasten the four fixing screws eG Set the AUDIO IN switch see page 161 to WIRELESS for the channel to be used For details about attaching the BP GL65 GL95 L60S M100 Battery Pack see 9 1 1 Using a Battery Pack on page 154 For the operation of the WRR 855A 855B refer to the manual supplied with the WRR 855A S55B When the XLR connection automatic detection function is on even if the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch is set to WIRELESS the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector is a
62. Workflows can be improved by the ability to use FTP commands to transfer files to remote locations over networks 1 1 5 Other Functions Usability oriented design e There is more space around the rear panel connectors than on previous models making cable connections and switch operations easier e The adjustment range of the shoulder pad in the front to rear direction is increased making it easier to ensure proper balance when using the unit 2 5 inch color LCD panel The side of the unit has an LCD that can be switched to show the following images and data e Status information including audio level meters and time code e Thumbnails of the video recorded on the Professional Disc e A playback image of the video recorded on the Professional Disc e The camera image Monochrome LCD panel Even when this unit is powered off the time code remaining disc capacity battery capacity and other status information appears on the monochrome LCD This requires either a battery or a DC power supply connected 1 1 Features Instant operation assignable switches Two switches provided on the side panel and on the top of the grip respectively can be assigned to any functions by a menu operation Furthermore the TURBO GAIN button can also be used as an assignable switch Alarm function If a fault is detected on the optical disc drive or if the disc or battery capacity is low notication is provided by warning indicators
63. an extremely bright object such as a strong spotlight or flashlight is being shot vertical tails may be produced on the screen or the image may be distorted Vertical tails shown on the image Monitor screen Bright object e g strong spotlight strong reflected light flashlight the sun Aliasing When fine patterns stripes or lines are shot they may appear jagged or flicker Appendixes Specifications General Power voltage 12 V DC 5 0 1 0 V Power consumption Approx 32 W with 12 V DC supply when recording with the color LCD off Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Operating humidity 10 to 90 relative humidity Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Recording format Video MPEG IMX 50 40 30 Mbps DVCAM 25 Mbps Proxy video MPEG 4 1 Audio MPEG IMX 16 bits or 24 bits 48 kHz 4 channels DVCAM 16 bits 48 kHz Proxy audio A law 8 4 channels 8 bits 8 kHz 1 The MPEG 4 CODEC is a product of Ingenient Technologies Inc Continuous operating time Approx 120 min with BP GL95 Mass Approx 4 1 kg 9 Ib main body only Approx 5 7 kg 12 lb 9 oz with microphone viewfinder disc and BP GL95 Battery Pack Dimensions in mm inches 124 5 3 Gade 269 10 5 8 222 8 3 4 332 13 1 8 l Supplied accessories Shoulder strap 1 Monaural microphone s
64. and channel 2 recording level controls These controls adjust the audio levels of channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT switches are set to MANUAL 2 3 Audio Functions 17 g 04JUOD puke sey JO suonouny pue suoneoogq zg 3 deyg HII S 01 U09 pue Sued Jo SUOROUNJ pue suOI e007 Z Je deyD HAIN AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 and channel 2 adjustment method selection switches These switches select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels 1 and 2 AUTO Select this setting for automatic adjustment MANUAL Select this setting for manual adjustment AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 audio input selection switches AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches These switches select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 FRONT The input signal source is the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector REAR The input signal source is the audio equipment connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors WIRELESS The input signal source is a WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit option AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches These switches select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 F front The input signal source is the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector R rear The input signal source is the audio equipment connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors W wireless The input signal source is a WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
65. and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark To set other items go back to step 3 To set the other white balance channel go back to step 2 T To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 Switches You can assign the desired function to any of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches and the TURBO GAIN button Proceed as follows 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus 133 sBulyjeas paylejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deup III sBues pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WN 2 Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears then press the MENU knob to select to page UOS3SOFUNCT ION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL Function Description TEST OUT Assigns the function to switch whether or CHARACTER not text is superimposed on the video signal to be output from the TEST OUT connector MARKER Assigns the ON OFF function to display all markers RETAKE Assigns the function to delete the last recorded clip ATW Assigns the ON OFF function of auto tracing white balance RETURN VIDEO Assigns the ON OFF function to display the image of the return video signal on
66. and then press the dial or knob All clips are locked and you return to the thumbnail screen To unlock all clips Carry out the procedure in To lock all clips selecting UNLOCK ALL CLIPS in step 2 3 3 Checking Recording and Playback Deleting clips e Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is in the recording disabled position e Locked clips cannot be deleted e Ifa clip which is referenced in a clip list is deleted that clip list is also deleted You can use the DISC menu to delete the last clip or all clips For details see To delete the last recorded clip page 42 T With the sub clip indicator off press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail indicator lights and the thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear 2 Turn the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to select the thumbnail to delete 3 Holding down the SHIFT button press the SUBCLIP button The THUMBNAIL MENU appears see step 3 of Locking Clips page 65 To escape from the THUMBNAIL menu to the previous screen Press the RESET button 4 Turn the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to select DELETE CLIP and then press the dial or knob Thumbnails of 4 frames in the target clip appear One of the following messages appears in a confirmation dialog depending on whether the target clip is referenced in a clip list When the target clip is not referenced in a clip list DELETE CLIP When the target c
67. are combined integrally The camera s CCDs have approximately 1 000 000 picture elements pixels the number of effective pixels approximately 500 000 In addition to the well established high image quality and vibration resistant dustproof and dripproof constructions of the Betacam SP SX camcorders this unit adds a range of new functionality exploiting the capabilities of optical discs 1 ENG Electronic News Gathering 2 EFP Electronic Field Production PDW 530 530P recording format and internal optical 1 1 1 Principal Differences Between the PDW 510 510P and PDW 530 530P There are the following differences between the PDW 510 510P and PDW 530 530P in the specifications of recording format internal optical filters and so on PDW 510 510P recording format and internal optical filters Recording DVCAM Video 25 Mbps format compatible DVCAM format recording audio 16 bits 48 KHz 4 channels Recording 85 minutes time MPEG IMX Video MPEG IMX 2 format compatible 4 2 2 high image recording quality video recording using MPEG2 intra frames Audio 16 bits or 24 bits 9 48 kHz sampling 4 channels Recording 50 Mbps 45 minutes time 40 Mbps 55 minutes 30 Mbps 68 minutes Optical Separate CC filters and ND filters two filters filters can be used simultaneously 1 DVCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation 2 MPEG IMxX is a trademark of Sony Corporation 3 For analog au
68. as follows 3 2 Recording T After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording following the instructions in 3 2 Basic Procedures page 40 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Press the REC START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode When you use the PRE LIGHTING function recording starts after the light is switched on The actual recording to disc begins when the camcorder has saved about ten seconds of video in memory so disc access is intermittent While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode the TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes 4 flashes second and the message AUTO INTERVAL M S flashes on the viewfinder screen When the camcorder is capturing the picture in memory the REC indicator red in the viewfinder lights After the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME has elapsed the camcorder automatically stops recording To continue auto interval recording Press the REC START button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens again The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode again To interrupt auto interval recording Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens The camcorder stops recording However disc access may occur for recording picture data already stored in memory To end auto interval recording You can exit Auto Interval Rec
69. at a time at the specified interval and stored in memory To use this function you must set the total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME Manual Interval Rec mode A specified number of frames NUMBER OF FRAME is recorded when you press the REC START button or the lens VTR button There are two Manual Interval Rec modes a single shot mode in which recording is done once with each press of the button and a consecutive mode in which recording is done repeatedly at a specified interval after the button is pressed A pre lighting function is available in Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode This function automatically turns on the light before recording starts which allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions The camcorder cannot be put into Interval Rec mode when the scanning mode is 24P with the CBK FCO1 expansion board see page 138 installed Auto Interval Rec mode settings and shooting To make settings before shooting To record in Auto Interval Rec mode you need to turn on Auto Interval Rec and set the total time from start to finish of shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME using the USER menu 3 2 Recording To make settings for Auto Interval Rec mode set TAKE TOTAL TIME first then REC TIME To turn on the light
70. attach the rotation mechanism assembly of the BKW 401 to the camcorder 9 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder 9 2 6 Detaching the Eyepiece Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen from further away It is also easy to remove dust from the viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is detached 1 Tumthe eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise to align the red marks on the locking ring and the viewfinder barrel Red mark Red mark LOK Line up the red marks Locking ring 2 Detach the eyepiece Reattaching the eyepiece 1 Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel 2 Align the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel Then insert the eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel Red mark on the end of the eyepiece 3 Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its LOCK arrow points at the red mark on the viewfinder barrel When the eyecup is worn out replace it with a new one service part number 3 723 079 03 The camcorder was shipped with an eyecup whose part number is 3 776 341 01 9 3 Mounting the Lens To mount the lens proceed as follows For information about using the lens refer to the lens manual Lens mount securing rubber Mounting the lens 1 Push the lens locking l
71. be used for external data storage Memory Stick is available in two sizes standard size and compact Memory Stick Duo size Once attached to a Memory Stick Duo adaptor Memory Stick Duo turns to the same size as standard Memory Stick and thus can be used with products compliant with standard Memory Stick Types of Memory Stick Memory Stick is available in the following four types to meet various requirements in functions Memory Stick R Stored data are not overwritten You can write data to Memory Stick R with Memory Stick R compatible products only Copyright protected data that requires MagicGate copyright protection technology cannot be written to Memory Stick R Memory Stick Stores any type of data except copyright protected data that requires the MagicGate copyright protection technology MagicGate Memory Stick Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection technology Memory Stick ROM Stores pre recorded read only data You cannot record on Memory Stick ROM or erase the pre recorded data Available types of Memory Stick With this camcorder you can use a Sony Memory Stick whose capacity does not exceed 128 MB or a Sony Memory Stick PRO whose capacity does not exceed 2 GB You can not use a Memory Stick Duo with your product Note on data read write speed Data read write speed may vary de
72. been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to TIME DATE and press the MENU knob to display the TIME DATE page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the TIME DATE page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page O40TIME DATE ADJUST HOUR MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY 4 Press the MENU knob The TIME ADJUST setting window appears 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus 135 sBulyjas paylejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sues pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WA 136 TIME ADJUST ESC HOUR MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY OK Item Description HOUR Sets the hour value MIN Sets the minutes value SEC Sets the seconds value YEAR Sets the year MONTH Sets the month DAY Sets the day 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and press MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 6 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark T To continue the remaining settings repeat steps 5 and 6 8 When you finish settings turn the MENU knob to move the mark to
73. bits up to 8 hexadecimal digits you can record user information such as the date time or scene number on the time code track To set the user bits proceed as follows ESSENCE MARK SUB CLIP oJ 410 F O Auto MANUAL LAUDIO SELECTA CLP NENU am Hz AUDIO IN PRESET 7 FRONT REGEN SET REAR Ne WIRELESS Setting the user bits T Set the DISPLAY switch to U BIT 2 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit flashes 3 Use the SEL SET dial to set the user bit data To change the value of the flashing digit turn the dial and to shift to the next digit press the dial Repeat this until all desired digits are set Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as follows Hexadecimal A B C D E F Display A b C d E To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET button 4 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN corresponding to the desired operating mode for the time code generator The set user bit data will be recorded for both LTC and VITC To store the user bit setting in memory The user bit setting apart from the real time is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off 5 6 4 Synchronizing the Time Code You can synchronize the internal time code generator of this camcorder with an external generator for the regeneration
74. bits data of VITC and so forth Includes the model name serial number date time shot number and ID1 to ID4 Shutter speed The time that the shutter is open Slow shutter speeds give bright images but motion resolution is lower SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers a professional association established in the U S A mainly for the purpose of setting forth motion picture and television engineering standards S N Signal to Noise ratio The relation of the strength of the desired signal to the accompanying electronic interference the noise If S N is high sounds are reproduced with less noise and pictures are reproduced clearly without snow SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol XDCAM uses this protocol to monitor equipment operating status via network connectors Sub clip One of the sections which make up a clip list A sub clip may be part of a clip or an entire clip Thumbnail image A reduced still picture of video for display on a GUI screen XDCAM creates thumbnail images from proxy video and displays them as index pictures on GUI screens Time code A digitally encoded signal which is recorded with video data to identify each frame of the video by hour minute second and frame number SMPTE time code is applied to NTSC system and EBU time code to PAL and SECAM systems Time code synchronization To synchronize the built in time code generator of video equipment to an
75. card into the PC card slot 2 Search for the video of the clip that you want to copy The camcorder can be either playing or stopped 3 In the TOP menu select OPERATION 4 Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the MEMORY REC page Alternatively select MEMORY REC on the CONTENTS page The MEMORY REC page appears 240MEMORY REC COPY CURRENT CLP COPY ALL CLIPS ABORT COPY DEL ALL MEM CLP FORMAT MEMORY 5 Select COPY CURRENT CLP with the MENU knob and then press the MENU knob The message EXECUTE OK appears 6 Select YES to execute the copy Proxy data for the playing or stopped clip is copied to the memory card During the copy the message MEMORY ACCESS where is a progress percentage number from 0 to 99 appears in the viewfinder and color LCD To copy proxy data for all clips on the disc to a memory card To copy proxy data to a memory card for all clips on the disc proceed as follows Insert a memory card into the PC card slot 2 Insert the disc that you want to copy into the camcorder 3 On the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu see page 59 select COPY ALL CLIPS and then press the MENU knob The message EXECUTE OK appears 4 Select YES to execute the copy Proxy data for all clip on the disc is copied to the memory card During the copy the message MEMORY ACCESS where is a progress percentage number from
76. change gt lt CRLF gt RNTO renamed with the RNFR command RNTO lt SP gt lt path name after change gt lt CRLF gt and specify the new name with the RNTO command Always follow a Input example RNFR General info txt RNEFR command with a RNTO RNTO General clip_info txt command DELE Deletes the specified file on this unit DELE lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Input example DELE Clip C0099 MXF Depending on the directory and file type deletion may not be possible For details see 6 1 2 File Operation Restrictions page 101 STAT Sends information about properties of STAT lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt the specified file or about data transfer status from this unit to the remote The following data is transferred depending on whether a file computer is specified with lt path name gt The following property information is e File specified The properties of the specified file sent depending on the file type e No specification The size of the data transferred thus far e MXF file unit bytes File name File type Input example STAT Clip C0001 MXF CODEC type Frame rate Number of audio channels Duration UMID non MXF file File name ABOR Requests this unit to abort a file ABOR lt CRLF gt transfer currently in progress SYST Displays the system name of this unit SYST lt CRLF gt HELP Displays a list of the commands HELP lt SP gt lt command name gt lt CRLF gt supported by th
77. clip list from the disc into the unit memory see page 78 To return to the full screen display Press the THUMBNAIL button turning off the indicator Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the desired sub clip Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET dial or MENU knob The sub clip operation menu appears To return to the thumbnail display without moving the sub clip Do either of the following Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select EXIT and press the dial knob e Press the RESET button Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select MOVE and press the dial knob The sub clip movement screen appears The sub clip selected in step 3 appears surrounded by a frame Indicates that the third sub clip will be moved to the position of the eighth sub clip 8 3 34 Cursor indicating the move destination for the selected sub clip To return to the previous screen Press the RESET button 6 Tum the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to move the cursor to the position where you want to move the selected sub clip To return to the previous screen Press the THUMBNAIL button 7 Press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob The sub clip thumbnail display appears and you can check the new position of the sub clip 8 Save the current clip list to disc See 4 2 6 Saving the Current Clip List to Disc page 77 4 2 3 Trimming a Sub Clip Proceed as follows
78. correct position Storage Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct sunlight or in other places where the temperature or humidity is high 3 1 Handling Discs e Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain ingress e Store cartridges in their cases Care of the discs e Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using a soft dry cloth e If condensation forms allow ample time to dry before use 3 1 3 Write Protecting Discs To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental erasure move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the arrow as shown in the following figure Lower surface of the disc Write Inhibit tab Slide in the direction of the arrow Write Inhibit tab settings SAVE gt SAVE gt Recording enabled Recording disabled You can lock individual clips to prevent them from being deleted For details see Locking Clips page 65 3 1 4 Loading and Unloading a Disc Loading a disc Proceed as follows 1 Turn on the POWER switch POWER switch HUMID indicator If there is condensation inside the VDR section the message HUMID appears in the viewfinder screen and the color LCD If this happens wait until the indicator goes off before going on to step 2 2 Press the EJECT button This opens the lid of the disc compartment EJECT button Lid of the disc compart
79. cycle through the settings of mode and speed preselected on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu Note that all modes and all standard mode speeds listed in the table on page 88 are preselected using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu By factory default all available shutter modes and shutter speeds are displayed in the sequence shown in the following figure You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to make a setting so that only the desired or most frequently used modes and speeds are displayed Standard mode with scan mode 1 1 100 or 1 60 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 SLS mode lt _ ECS mode 1 100 for PDW 510 530 1 60 for PDW 510P 530P Shutter speeds in standard mode can also be switched to angle display by using SHT DISP MODE in the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Setting the shutter speed in ECS mode Proceed as follows Setting the shutter speed in ECS Extended Clear Scan mode Set the shutter speed mode to ECS For the operation see the previous item Setting the shutter mode and standard mode shutter speed ECS 60 00Hz Example of view finder screen display for ECS setting operation 2 Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired frequency appears See the table Selectable shutter modes and shutter speeds page 88 for the frequency range which can be changed
80. data When carrying the camcorder with the Memory Stick inserted close the cover of the menu operating section Avoid removing the Memory Stick from the insertion slot while the access indicator is lit Do not format the Memory Stick using a PC For formatting the Memory Stick see the description of the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu on page 203 8 1 2 Saving User Menu Data to the Memory Stick You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder as user files in the Memory Stick You can save up to 100 user files in the Memory Stick Insert the Memory Stick then proceed as follows 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Tum the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page UIS USER FILE USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SAVE EXEC F 1D OQOOO0000000000000 D EXEC USER PRESET LOCK switch on the Memory Stick Notes on using and storing the Memory Stick e Avoid touching the connector of the Memory Stick or contacting it with a metal object When attaching a label to the Memory Stick use only the label supplied for the Memory Stick Do not drop bend or submit the Memory Stick to external shock Do not disassemble or modify the Memory Stick Avoid getting liquids on the Memory Stick Avoid using
81. data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Partial write Write data to a part of the file only File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial read Partial write INDEX XML Contains data for management of Yes No No No No the material on the disc ALIAS XML 2 Contains conversion tables for Yes No No No No assigning user defined names to clips and clip lists DISCMETA XML_ Contains metadata to indicate the Yes Yes P No No No disc properties MEDIAPRO XML_ Contains a list of material onthe Yes No No No No disc basic properties related information and information about access methods Other files Files other than the above No No a Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE b Only files which can be written by XDCAM e Directories cannot be created in the root directory The directories in the root directory Clip Edit Sub and General cannot be deleted or renamed Clip directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial read Partial write C MXF 2 Clip file created by recording MXF Yes No No Yes Yes 9 file 0001 to 4999 C M01 XML Metadata file generated Yes Yes No No 9 No automatically when C MXF file is created 0001 to 4999 Other files Files other than the above No
82. dial knob The current clip list is saved to disc Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP button CLIP menu operations end To assign a title to a clip list Use the supplied PDZ 1 software For details see the PDZ 1 online help 4 2 Creating Clip Lists 77 uonodejeS eueDS Je deyoD AN uoD9ag aUsDg yy Ja deYyD HA 4 3 Managing Clip Lists CLIP Menu After you create a clip list you can use the CLIP menu to save it to disc load it from disc into the unit memory and delete it from the disc The CLIP menu also allows you to clear and edit the current clip list Displaying the CLIP menu Proceed as follows The CLIP menu can handle up to 99 clip lists With the thumbnail indicator off hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP button The CLIP menu appears If the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON set it to OFF then press the SUB CLIP button with the SHIFT button held down e If you set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while the CLIP menu is being displayed thumbnail display is cancelled and replaced with menu display lt CLIP MENU gt LOAD SAVE DELETE CLEA TC PRESET SORT BY clip list see page 78 Item Operation LOAD Load a clip list from the disc into the current SAVE Save the current clip list to disc see page 77 DELETE Delete a clip list from the disc see page 79 CLEAR Clear the current clip list from the unit memory see page 79
83. follows The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM B150 Remote Control Unit is connected to the camcorder 5 3 Setting the Electronic Shutter 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OPERATION 3 Press the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 4 ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SHT ENABLE then press the MENU knob to display the SHT ENABLE page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the SHT ENABLE page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page 17 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER This menu display is for the PDW 510 530 For the PDW 510P 530P SHUTTER 1 60 is displayed instead of SHUTTER 1 100 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the shutter mode or shutter speed you want then press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 6 Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark To set another mod
84. for more information about the FTP command If the connection succeeds you are prompted to enter a user name 4 Enter the user name admin and press the Enter key When the user name is verified your are prompted to enter a password 5 Enter the password and press the Enter key The password is set to pdw 530 or 510 when the unit is shipped from the factory The login is complete when the password is verified See 6 3 2 Command List page 107 for the protocol supported by this unit If the connection times out This unit terminates FTP connections if no command is received within 90 seconds of the last command If this occurs log out see the next section and repeat steps 2 to 4 If you power this unit off during an FTP connection the data transferred thus far is discarded 6 3 2 Command List This unit supports standard protocol see the next section and extended protocol see page 111 e To execute FTP commands you must install application software such as PDZ 1 on your computer Standard commands The following table shows the standard FTP commands supported by this unit To log out To log out after finishing file operations enter QUIT at the command prompt and press the Enter key The commands supported by application software vary e An FIP client that supports UTF 8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters Command prompt FTP commands do not
85. if you record in this state 3 2 Recording 53 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup HII yoeghe q pue Bulpiovey a deyo HANK 54 The title of the next clip to be recorded will be a combination of the prefix in the PREFIX field and the serial number in the NUMERIC field To create a list of title prefix strings Prepare the data beforehand according to the following rules File name Assign the name TITLES TXT to the file Input format Enter title prefixes one at time separated by newline CRLF characters Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long A prefix file can contain up to 20 prefixes Allowable characters e Digits 0 to 9 e Alphabetic characters a to z A to Z The following symbols amp L semicolon comma period _ underscore e Space Title prefix list example Tennis lt CRLF gt Basketball lt CRLF gt Skiing_1 lt CRLF gt Skiing_2 lt CRLF gt To transfer a title prefix list to the unit s internal memory Proceed as follows 1 Copy the title prefix file TITLES TXT to the following folder on the Memory Stick MSSONY PRO XDCAM GENERAL VAL_LIST This folder is created when you insert a Memory Stick into the camcorder Do not create this folder yourself on a computer 2 Inserta Memory Stick with the title prefix file TITLES TXT into the Memory Stick slot of the camcorder 3 On the CLIP TITL
86. input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu with the REAR XLR AUTO item 9 5 Audio Input System Line input connection 9 6 Tripod Mounting You can easily mount and dismount the camcorder on a tripod by using the VCT 14 tripod adaptor not supplied Attach the tripod adaptor to the tripod Tripod adaptor Camera mount Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks Removing the camcorder from the tripod adaptor While pressing the red button against the lever move the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow Red button Lever Removing the camcorder from the tripod adaptor The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed If this happens press the red button against the lever a second time and move the lever as shown below until the pin returns to the stowed position If the pin remains in the engaged position you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor Stowed position Pin If the pin remains in the engaged position 9 6 Tripod Mounting 165 Japioowey y dN Bumes 6 Ja deyo III Jepiooweg y dn Humes 6 se deyo WA 166
87. is activated the time data is displayed in the following format OTe ray WLLL LIL For details of the counter display see 2 9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs on page 32 SEL SET select set dial To set a time code user bit or real time value press this dial so that the digit you want to change flashes 2 7 Time Code System Turning the dial upward increases the value of the flashing digit and turning it downward decreases the value PRESET REGEN regeneration CLOCK switch This switch selects whether to set a new time code or to follow the already recorded time code PRESET Records time code with a preset initial value REGEN Records time code continuous with the existing time code recorded on the disc Regardless of the setting of the F FRUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in R RUN mode CLOCK Records time code synchronized to the internal clock Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in F RUN mode F RUN SET R RUN free run set recording run switch This switch selects the operating mode for the internal time code generator F RUN Time code keeps advancing regardless of the operating state of the VDR Use this setting when aligning the time code with real time or when synchronizing the time code with an external time code SET Set the switch to this position to set the time code or user bits R RUN The time code value advances only dur
88. is output during the Color Bar mode OFF a 1 kHz test tone is not output during the Color Bar mode AUTO a 1 kHz test tone is output only when the CH 1 AUDIO SELECT switch on the inside panel is in the AUTO position MIC CH1 LEVEL SIDE1 FRONT F S1 FRONT When recording the front microphone sound on CH 1 selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment SIDE 1 Adjust it with the LEVEL control left side on the side panel FRONT Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel F S1 It can be adjusted using either the LEVEL control left side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2 FRONT F S2 FRONT When recording the front microphone sound on CH 2 selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment SIDE 2 Adjust it with the LEVEL control right side on the side panel FRONT Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel F S2 It can be adjusted using either the LEVEL control right side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other REAR1 WRR LEVEL SIDE1 FRONT F S1 SIDE 1 Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel SIDE 1 Adjust it with the LEVEL control left side on the side panel FRONT Adjust it with th
89. now able to perform file operations when a disc is inserted into this unit You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into the state described in step 1 after connecting the cable To log in disconnect the cable put the unit into the state described in step 1 and connect it again Operation limitations during FAM connections e With the exception of the EJECT button recording buttons and playback control buttons are disabled e VDR of this unit cannot be controlled from devices connected to the REMOTE connector 8 pin and S400 i LINK connector e There is no signal output from this unit while video is being input to this unit from external equipment 6 2 2 Operating on files Proceed as follows Start Explorer Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit The drive letter will differ depending on the number of other peripherals connected to the remote computer 2 Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc loaded in this unit You can operate in the same way that you operate on local drives and files on network computers e If you power this unit off during an FAM connection the data transferred thus far is discarded e All file operations are not possible for some types of files For details see 6 1 2 File Operation Restrictions page 101 To eject discs from a remote computer Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer and select Eject from the me
90. of priority Title gt User defined clip name gt Standard format clip name Therefore the display of this item changes as following depending on whether there is a title When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit for clips recorded on this unit the title is displayed The user defined name or standard format name is displayed for clips without a title If the firmware of your XDCAM device is version 1 4x or lower clips with user defined names appear as C5000 to C9999 in order of recording To check clip information name title etc in the CLIP STATUS menu 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to select DIAGNOSIS and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the DIAGNOSIS menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to CLIP STATUS and press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob to scroll the screen to CLIP STATUS and then press the MENU knob The CLIP STATUS page appears The current settings of the items on the page appear to the right of the items D08 CLIP STATUS CLIP NO 001 010 NAME c0001 TITLE no name RECORD DEVICE PDW 530 SERIAL 10001 DATE 08 01 06 TIME
91. on the GENLOCK page of the OPERATION menu This connector also inputs an external analog composite video signal When the CBK SCO1 extension board is installed you can record the external analog composite video signal input to this connector TEST OUT connector BNC type This connector outputs the video signal for a video monitor The output signal can be selected from composite or RGB The factory setting is composite and the setting returns to composite whenever the unit is powered on Depending on internal board and menu settings menus time code and shot data can be superimposed on the image on the monitor Like the VIDEO OUT connector this connector can also be used to synchronize the time code of an external VTR with the time code of the camcorder For details on how to select the test output signal refer to the Maintenance Manual i LINK DV IN OUT 400 connector 6 pin IEEE1394 compliant Connect to a device supporting the DV format or a computer using a i LINK cable If video and audio signals are not output to an external device connected to the i LINK DV IN OUT S400 connector try disconnecting the i LINK cable and then reconnecting it making sure that it is firmly seated When you connect this unit to an external device with a 6 pin i LINK connector always power this unit off and disconnect the DC cable from the DC IN connector or remove the battery pack before connecting or disconnecting the i LINK
92. on the color bars and press the MENU knob The mark on changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark 5 To continue setting other items repeat steps 3 and 4 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section To carry out superimposed recording To actually record the items selected for superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page set the OUTPUT DCC switch to BARS DCC OFF The items selected for superimposed recording appear on the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color bars 7 2 7 Setting the Shot ID On the SHOT ID page of the USER menu you can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters spaces and symbols When the OUTPUT DCC switch is set to BARS DCC OFF this shot ID is output with the color bar signal The shot ID comprises ID1 to ID4 and the setting can be changed using the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu You can select the SHOT ID to be recorded superimposed on the color bars on the SHOT DISP page When the menu is displayed the shot ID is not displayed even if the color bar signal is output To set the shot ID proceed as follows CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch Setting the shot ID T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT ID page appears and press the MENU knob to select
93. or storing the Memory Stick in a location subject to extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a car or the outdoors exposed to a burning sun or a place near a heater direct sunlight high humidity excessive dust If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 3 For details on setting the file ID see Setting the file ID on page 146 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to USER FILE SAVE and press the MENU knob The POO USER SAVE page appears P00 USER SAVE DISPLAY e001 When a appears on the left of POO at the top left of the page you can change the page Up to 20 pages 8 1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a Memory Stick 145 geq Bunjes 1 sn Bulpeo7 pue Bunes g uajdeyo i eyeq Bum s sn Bulpeo7 pue Bulnes g Jaydeup from POO to P19 can be used to save user files in the Memory Stick Each page can hold up to 5 files 4 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears and press the MENU knob POO USER SAVE DISPLAY 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message SAVE OK YES NO appears POO USER SAVE SAVE OK DISPLAY MODE 001 NEW When a file number is shown as NEW FILE this means that the file is empty When data is stored in a file number the file na
94. or the remote computer wait for at least 10 seconds and then reconnect the disconnected cable The unit is powered off and an i LINK cable is connected Power the unit on To disable FAM connections Execute one of the procedures described in the previous section Reconnecting to make a FAM connection between this unit and the remote computer To disable FAM connections set the menu item PC REMOTE to DSABL For more information about how to make this setting see To enable FAM connections over the i LINK connector page 103 6 2 File Access Mode File Operations 105 suoiesedo aji4 9 Jejdeyup HHI II suoneiado ally 9 Jaydeyo HII 6 3 FTP File Operations File operations between this unit and a remote computer can be carried out by the File Transfer Protocol called FTP below A CBK NCO1 Network Adaptor option is required to enable file operations by FTP For installation and use see the Installation Manual supplied with the CBK NCO1 Preparations T Connect the network connectors of this unit and a remote computer with a network cable Or connect this unit to the network to which the remote computer is connected File data ZN Transfer of files PDW 510 510P lt gt Laptop computer etc 530 530P Network cable Cross cable not supplied 1 1 To make connections to the LAN through a hub use straight type network cables not supplied 2 Set the IP addr
95. position to the ON position The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to USER MENU CUSTOMIZE then press the MENU knob If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the menu appears UOOOCONTENTS PAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 Z 8 9 moommmmmmm oo0o000000 JAMM If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to one of USER 1 EDIT to 7 1 Menu Organization and Operation sBulyjas p e q pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sBues pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WN USER 19 EDIT and ASSIGN SEL EDIT then press the MENU knob to display the page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page Example When you select the USER 2 EDIT page UOSOUSER 2 EDIT gt 4 Move the mark to the item to be added this operation is unnecessary if no item exists on the page as shown in the figure for step 3 then press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears EDIT FUNCTION ESC INSERT MOVE DELETE BLANK 5 Move the mark to INSERT and press the MENU knob The page for the last added item appears P2SOBLACK FLARE MASTER BLACK R GLACK B BLACK MASTER FLARE R FLARE 0 0 0 0 0
96. pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sBunes pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WN Returning to the TOP menu from other menus There are two methods e Align the mark with TOP at the top right of the menu page and press the MENU knob e Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position repeatedly until the TOP menu appears Menu operations in the USER menu This section explains operations on the USER menu But the operations are the same as those on menus other than the USER menu Also if the optional extension boards are not installed in your camcorder some items on the USER menu pages are not displayed But the operations are the same as those on the menus other than the USER menu To carry out menu operations in the USER menu proceed as follows 1 Switch the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The USER menu normally appears If it does not in the TOP menu select USER and press the MENU knob UO3SOFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL REC For the PDW 530P 510P the DF NDF item is not included If the USER menu has been used before the last accessed page appears In this case go to step 2 If this is the first time the USER menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the USER menu appears In this case follow the procedure below Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the
97. suone1ado aij 9 Jajdeyo HII clips on that disc The only possible operations are playback and disc formatting Writing of files with a user defined names Deletion of arbitrary clips except the last recorded clip Locking of clips Edit directory e If you attempt to write a C MXF file which does not meet the conditions specified as remark c on this table via a FAM connection a Windows error message appears to the effect that the file or directory is corrupt and cannot be read File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial read Partial write E E01 SMI Clip list file Yes Yes P No Yes 9 Yes 0001 to 0099 E M01 XML Metadata file generated Yes Yes P No No 9 No automatically when E E01 SMI file is created 0001 to 0099 Other files Files other than the above No No a With firmware version 1 5 and higher the E part can be changed to a user defined name b Only files which can be written by XDCAM Partial writing is not possible c Possible with firmware version 1 5 and higher d Only files which can be written by XDCAM e Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording f With firmware version 1 5 and higher when the E part of an E E01 SMI file name is changed an E M01 XML file with the same name in the E part is generated automatically Sub directory g When an E E01
98. switch is set to SAVE the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder lights STBY Standby mode Recording starts as soon as you press the REC START button EJECT button and indicator Press this button to eject or load a disc The indicator flashes while the disc is being ejected F REV fast reverse button and indicator Plays back at high speed in the reverse direction The indicator lights during high speed playback in the reverse direction 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions PLAY PAUSE button and indicator Press this to view a playback image using the viewfinder screen or a color video monitor The indicator lights during playback During playback pressing this button pauses the playback showing a still image At this time the indicator flashes This camcorder is capable of color image search at approximately four times normal playback speed making it easy to check recorded material To use the color image search press the F REV button or F FWD button during playback When the buttons are pressed the PLAY indicator and the F REV or F FWD indicator light F FWD fast forward button and indicator Plays back at high speed in the forward direction The indicator lights during high speed playback in the forward direction NEXT button This jumps to the beginning of the next clip and pauses During the jump the F FWD indicator flashes Pressing this button together with the FFWD button jumps to the last f
99. the MENU knob This ends the input and returns to the original SHOT ID page To insert a space Proceed as follows 1 In step 4 above move the W mark over INS and press the MENU knob 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 127 sBulyjas paylejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sues pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nu y z 1 4deyo iii U11OSHOT ID 1 CMW15 2 00000000000 3 QOOOO0000000 4 Qo0000000000 2 amp k 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQR STUUWXYZI I_ Wits DEL RET ESC END ID ID ID I D Move the W mark over INS 2 Move the ill mark over RET then press the MENU knob U11OSHOT ID gt CM 015 gt DOMOOOOU00000 UUUOOOOO0000 gt OO0000000000 xkt 0123456789 Space inserted 2 amp lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQR STUUWXYZI I_ INS DEL RET ESC END To delete a character In step 4 of the procedure for setting the shot ID see page 127 move the Ml mark over DEL and press the MENU knob This deletes the character under the W mark in the shot ID row To cancel deleting the character move the i mark over RET and press the MENU knob To cancel entering or changing shot ID Before executing step 6 of the procedure for setting the shot ID see page 127 move the mark to ESC at the top right of the screen then press the MENU knob or push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch
100. the i LINK IEEE1394 connector on the remote computer using an i LINK cable see page 103 FTP connection Connect the network connectors on this unit and the remote computer using a network cable see page 106 6 1 1 Directory Structure The following figure shows the directory structure of discs visible to a remote computer This structure is not the same as the actual structure recorded on the disc 6 1 Overview roota INDEX XML ALIAS XML DISCMETA XML id mg in iy MEDIAPRO XML Clip C0001 MXF C0001M01 XML C0002 MXF C0002M01 XML C0003 MXF C0003M01 XML mJ m3 m3 mg mg mg Edit Y E0001E01 SMI E0001M01 XML E0002E01 SMI E0002M01 XML fii fli ind no C ion C0001S01 MXF C0002S01 MXF fi fii ind C0003S01 MXF General a Root directory b Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE 6 1 2 File Operation Restrictions This section explains which operations are possible on files stored in each directory When required the following operation tables distinguish reading and writing from partial reading and writing Read Read data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Root directory Partial read Read only a part of the data in the file Write Write
101. the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to UMID SET and press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the UMID SET page appears then press the MENU knob The UMID SET page appears The current settings appear on the right side of each item 22 UMID SET TOP COUNTRY CODE 0000 ORGANIZATION CODE 0000 USER CODE 0000 00 00 00 TIME ZONE Proceed as follows Item Contents COUNTRY CODE Sets the country code ORGANIZATION Sets the organization code USER CODE Sets the user code TIME ZONE Sets the time difference from UTC 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and press the MENU knob The mark to the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark to the left of the setting changes to a mark 5 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting of the selected item or to display the desired value and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Additional information related to the UMID COUNTRY CODE When you select this item the COUNTRY CODE window appears 22 UMID SET TOP COUNTRY CODE O00 a ORGANI ZATION Oo0000 USER CODE O0000 TIME ZONE 1B 07 30 0
102. the page U11OSHOT ID 1 OOO000000000 2 OOOOO00 3 30 4 000000000000 gt ID ID ID ID 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the ID one of ID 1 to ID 4 you want to set and press the MENU knob A W mark appears over the first character position in the string and characters can now be input U11OSHOT ID TOP 1 78 a OOOOOOOOO00O OOOOOOOO000O gt QOOO00000000 2 amp k 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPGR STUUYWXYZEI I_ INS DEL RET ESC END 4 Enter or change the shot ID When you are entering the whole shot ID go to step Turn the MENU knob to move the W mark to the character which you want to change then press the MENU knob A character table appears 12 a QOOOOOQOO0000 OOOOOUOO000O OoOoOo00000000o E k 0123456789 gt lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQR STUVYWXYZEI I_ INS DEL RET ESC END Turn the MENU knob until the Il mark moves to the character position that you want to select then press the MENU knob Example To input U11OSHOT ID ID 1 H a OOOOOOOO0000 QOOOOOQOO0000 OOO000000000o E xi 0123456789 gt lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQR STUVWXYZEN INS DEL RET ESC END 5 Repeat step 4 for each of the remaining characters 6 When the input is complete turn the MENU knob to move the W mark over END then press
103. time code value and actual time by dropping two frames from the time code value at the beginning of each minute except every tenth minute E E mode Electric to Electric mode When you operate a VDR in E E mode input video and or audio signals pass through electric circuits only and then come out from the output connectors without passing through electromagnetic conversion circuits such as recording heads EFP Electronic Field Production The use of electronic equipment such as portable video cameras VTRs and sound equipment for television production outside studios ENG Electronic News Gathering The use of electronic equipment such as portable video cameras VTRs and sound equipment for the production of daily news stories and short documentaries Essence mark A type of metadata that may be set for a specified frame Flare Dark or colored flashes caused by signal overload through extreme light reflections of polished objects or very bright lights Flange focal length The distance from the plane of lens mounting flange to the image focal plane Abbreviated to Ff Flicker Repeated change of brightness on the screen caused by light sources such as fluorescent light flashing at the frequency of alternating current Genlock Generator lock To synchronize the pulse generator built into video equipment to an external reference master sync signal HAD Hole Accumulated Diode A CCD sensor structure de
104. unit to the remote computer This command allows you to specify a segment in the body of the MXF file composed of video and audio data for transfer of the required segment only e A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified This command cannot be used when the path names contains a space Use the SITE REPFL command instead SITE REPFL lt SP gt lt path name gt lt SP gt lt start frame gt lt SP gt lt transfer size gt lt CRLF gt lt path name gt specifies the path name of the file to transfer Enclose the path name in double quotation marks lt start frame gt specifies an offset from the start of the file Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset the first frame is 0 lt transfer size gt specifies the number of video frames to transfer specify O to transfer to the end of the file Input example SITE REPFL Clip sakura 0001 MXF 5 150 Transfer sakura 0001 MXF Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 155 SITE FSTS Acquires the system status of this unit One of the following status codes is sent 0 Initial state or no disc is loaded 1 File system mount is OK 3 File system mount is not OK SITE FSTS lt CRLF gt 6 3 FTP File Operations 111 suoiesedo aij 9 Jejdeup HHI II suone1ado al4 9 Jaydeyo HII 112 Command name SITE MEID Description Acquires the media ID of the disc loaded in this unit Command s
105. value DCC D RANGE 400 450 500 550 600 Sets the timing range when the DCC switch 600 is set to the ON position DCC POINT 99 to 99 0 DCC minimum knee point adjustment DCC GAIN 99 to 99 0 Gain adjustment to DCC detected value DCC DELAY TIME 99 to 99 0 DCC reaction speed adjustment Menu List 199 sexipueddy WA 200 No Page Item Settings Default Description 14 AUTO IRIS 2 IRIS WINDOW 1 2 3 4 5 6 VAR 1 Selects the auto iris detection window VAR is variable IRIS WINDOW IND OFF ON OFF Turns on and off the function which displays a frame marker for the auto iris detection window IRIS LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Level adjustment of the auto iris target value IRIS APL RATIO 99 to 99 0 Mix ratio of auto iris detection peak value and average value IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 465 245 Width and height of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 172 85 72 Height of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR H POS 447 to 446 0 Horizontal position of detection frame when PDW 510 530 the auto iris detection window is set to VAR 447 to 446 0 PDW 510P 530P IRIS VAR V POS 104 to 104 0 Vertical position of detection frame when the PDW 51 0 530 auto iris detection window is set to VAR 124 to 123 0 PDW 510P 530P IRIS SPEED 99 to 99 0 Auto iris speed adjustment
106. with Intel Pentium 4 CPU at least 2 GHz installed memory at least 512 MB When not using the live logging function PC with Intel Pentium III CPU at least 1 GHz installed memory at least 512 MB e Operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or higher or Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1 or higher e Web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 Service Pack 1 or higher e DirectX DirectX 8 1b or higher To install the PDZ 1 Insert the supplied CD ROM in the CD ROM drive of the computer and execute the Setup exe file then follow the installation instructions For details refer to the ReadMe file in the CD ROM Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work folder to store the material transferred from this unit has adequate free space The amount of proxy AV data transferred is about 1 4 GB per disc when recording in the DVCAM format To transfer files between the computer and this unit requires this unit s IP address and other network related settings to be made For details see 7 3 11 Making Network Settings page 141 4 4 Using the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software 81 uogoaj g eUueds Je deyoD HHI Adjustments and Settings for Recording chapter 5 1 Setting the Recording Format PDW 530 530P Only Before recording with the PDW 530 530P it is necessary to set the recording format for each of video and audio Video recording format MPEG IMX 50 Mbps 40 M
107. 0 to 99 appears in the viewfinder and color LCD No DV stream is output from the camcorder s i LINK DV IN OUT S400 connector while proxy data is being copied from a disc to a memory card The message MEMORY CARD ERROR appears if a copy is attempted while the unusable memory symbol lt M see page 60 is visible in the viewfinder When there is not enough free memory The message M shortage appears when the amount to data to copy is greater than the amount of remaining memory and the message MEMORY CARD FULL appears when there is no remaining memory The copy cannot be executed if either of these messages appears Insert another memory card To cancel a copy to a memory card Proceed as follows 1 On the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu see page 59 select ABORT COPY The message EXECUTE OK appears 2 Select YES to cancel the copy The copy is cancelled To delete all proxy data in a memory card Proceed as follows 3 2 Recording 59 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g sajdeup MIMI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Ja deyo HAIN 1 On the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu see page 59 select DEL ALL MEM CLP The message EXECUTE OK appears 2 Select YES to execute the deletion All proxy data in the memory card is deleted To format a memory card Proceed as follows 1 On the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu see page 59 select FORMAT MEMORY The message
108. 002 USERS JAN 0O1 04 JAN 15 04 FEB 05 04 FEB 20 04 6 To carry out the load move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving the mark pointing to NO The access indicator lights When the load is completed the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off The USER FILE page appears again 7 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section If data cannot be loaded If one of the following error messages appears during or after the load operation then the data was not loaded Data load error messages Error message Cause Action NO MEMORY No Memory Insert or reinsert the STICK flashing Stick is inserted Memory Stick MEMORY STICK Circuit or Recheck and ERROR Memory Stick consult your Sony flashing fault representative FILE ERROR The Memory Do not try to load flashing Stick contains data saved from data that cannot another camcorder be loaded into this camcorder 8 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files 8 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files You can save various settings for shooting a particular scene as a scene file Loading the scene file you can quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files in a Mem
109. 1 stop Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera Two bars OO appear in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To stop down the iris by 0 5 stop Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera One bar L appears in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To stop down the iris by 1 stop Turn the MENU knob further clockwise as seen from the front of the camera Two bars OO appear in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication 5 4 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment OOF 6 Opening the lens iris Iris opened by 1 stop two bars a Iris opened by 0 5 stop one bar Stopping down the lens iris Iris stopped down by 1 stop L two bars F5 m 6 2 Iris stopped down by 0 5 stop one bar Adjusting the reference value for automatic iris adjustment When the RM B150 Remote Control Unit is connected The IRIS control knob of the RM B150 can be used for lens iris setting In this case the bar display L does not appear Selecting the automatic iris window Proceed as follows 1 Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2 described in the previous item Changing the reference value to display the AUTO IRIS page Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to IRIS WINDOW IND then press the MENU knob The mark on the l
110. 1 to 5 of the procedure To make settings before shooting page 46 to select CACHE INTVAL REC on the FUNCTION 1 page 2 Tur the MENU knob until M INT appears O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL REC M INT NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL 1 1SEC PRE LIGHT ING OFF As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes in the following sequence OFF gt CACHE lt gt A INT gt M INT When M INT appears the camcorder is in Manual Interval Rec mode and the TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes NUMBER OF FRAME and TRIGGER INTERVAL appear When TRIGGER INTERVAL is set to other than M PRE LIGHTING also appears 3 Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE INTVAL REC changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to NUMBER OF FRAME O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL REC NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL PRE LIGHT ING 5 Press the MENU knob 3 2 Recording 49 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey g 13 deyo MIMI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Ja deyo HAIN The mark on the left of NUMBER OF FRAME changes to a mark and the mark on the
111. 100 0 to 109 5 109 0 Adjusts the white clipping level 07 DETAIL 1 DETAIL OFF ON ON Sets the detail correction function on or off APERTURE OFF ON ON tite the aperture correction function on or off DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the general level of the detail signal APERTURE LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the aperture level DTL H V RATIO 99 to 99 0 Sets the level of the V detail signal CRISPENING 99 to 99 0 Sets the crispening level LEVEL DEPEND OFF ON ON Turns the level depend function on or off LEVEL DEPEND LVL _ 99 to 99 0 Sets the level of the level depend DETAIL FREQUENCY 99 to 99 Sets the frequency of the H detail signal Menu List 189 sexipueddy Ml 190 No Page Item Settings Default Description 08 DETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE OFF ON OFF Turns the knee aperture function on or off KNEE APT LVL 99 to 99 0 Sets the knee aperture level DETAIL COMB 99 to 0 0 Sets the level at which the comb filter becomes effective CROSS COLOR ON OFF OFF Turns the cross color component on or off CROSS COLOR LVL 0 to 99 43 Sets the suppression level of the cross color DETAIL LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the both detail black and white limiters DTL WHT LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the detail white limiter DTL BLK LMT 99 to 99 Sets the detail black limiter DTL V BLK LMT 99 to 99 Sets the V detail black limiter 09 DETAIL 3 FINE DTL OFF ON OF
112. 12 V DC power output connector 4 pin female This connector supplies power for a WRR 862 UHF Portable Tuner option Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF portable tuner 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Tally indicator BRIGHT control CONTRAST control PEAKING control ZEBRA switch TALLY switch DB Viewfinder Diopter adjustment ring Viewfinder left right positioning ring Camera operator tally indicator Viewfinder stopper Shooting and recording playback functions 1 Tally indicator Setting the TALLY switch to HIGH or LOW enables this indicator The indicator lights during recording on the VDR video disc recorder Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder it flashes to indicate a problem You can set the indicator brightness with the TALLY switch BRIGHT brightness control This control adjusts the picture brightness on the viewfinder screen It has no effect on the camera output signal CONTRAST control This control adjusts the picture contrast on the viewfinder screen It has no effect on the camera output signal PEAKING control This control adjusts the sharpness of the picture on the viewfinder screen to make focusing easier It has no effect on the camera output signal ZEBRA switch This switch controls the zebra pattern on the viewfinder screen ON The zebra pattern is displayed and stays OFF No
113. 123456789ABCDEFGHI JKL MNOP RSTUVWXYZabcdefghi 5 ee eee INS DEL ESC END Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string 4 byte alphanumeric strings according to the values defined in ISO 3166 1 There are about 240 country codes Find your own country code on the following home page Refer to ISO 3166 1 http www din de gremien nas nabd iso3 166ma codlstp1 en_listp1 html When the country code is less than 4 bytes the active part of the code will occupy the first part of the 4 bytes and the remainder must be filled with the space character 20h Example In the case of Japan For Japan if the country code is JP it is 2 bytes if JPN it is 3 bytes Thus enter the following JP_ or JPN _ where _ represents a space ORGANIZATION organization code When you select this item the ORGANIZATION window appears Refer to the COUNTRY CODE window above Enter an abbreviated 4 byte alphanumeric string for the organization code There are no problems in recording or playing back audio video signals if ORGANIZATION is not set Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the SMPTE registration office When no organization code has been acquired it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary string As arule the code 00 must be entered Freelance operators who do not belong to an origination should enter ee 99 USER CODE When you select this item the USER CODE window appears Refer to the COUNTRY CODE w
114. 19 54 38 3 2 10 Recording in Live Logging Mode 1 This is supported from firmware version 1 4 and PDZ 1 version 1 4 Live logging is a function that allows you to simultaneously transfer logging data as you record live material You can install the optional CBK NCO1 Network Adaptor in the camcorder and connect to the adaptor s network connector from the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software to do the following e View proxy AV data e Add and modify metadata titles comments essence marks etc e Create clip lists After adding or modifying metadata and clip lists you can transfer them from the computer back to the camcorder for recording on the original disc Refer to the PDZ 1 help for more information about PDZ 1 functions and operations To record in live logging mode With the optional CBK NCO1 network adaptor installed on the camcorder proceed as follows 1 Use an Ethernet cable to connect the camcorder to a computer with PDZ 1 installed 2 In the TOP menu select OPERATION 3 2 Recording yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Jajdeup I yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Ja deyo HAIN 3 Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the OUTPUT page Alternatively in the CONTENTS page select OUTPUT The OUTPUT page appears 4 Turn the MENU knob to select LIVE LOGGING and then press the MENU knob U0 100UTPUT LCD BRIGHT lt L gt LCD BRIGHT lt H gt LCD COLOR L i LINK MODE 3 PB WIDE ID
115. 1SOGENLOCK GENLOCK RETURN VIDEO GL H PHASE GL SC PHASE GL SC 0 180 SEL 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 129 sBulyjeas pajlejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sBunes pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WA 4 Carry out setting operations as follows Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to GENLOCK and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of GENLOCK changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the GENLOCK setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until OFF appears then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark and the setting is executed Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to RETURN VIDEO and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark and the setting is executed 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section To see the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder screen Hold down the RET switch on the lens The image of the return video signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector is displayed on the viewfinder screen while you are holding down the RET switch When the return video function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 3
116. 3 FUNCTION 1 delete or rearrange pages 04 VF DISP 1 USER menu customization 05 VF DISP 2 In this case the number for 06 LED example 01 also changes 07 MARKER 1 08 GAIN SW 09 VF SETTING 10 AUTO IRIS 11 SHOT ID 12 SHOT DISP 13 SET STATUS 14 LENS FILE 15 USER FILE USER MENU CUSTOMIZE This menu used to add or delete pages in the USER group ALL L OPERATION e Each menu consists of pages 00 L PAINT CONTENTS 01 xxx 02 xxx and so on e MANTENANCES Ti You can select the desired items j FILE from these menus to create new e DIAGNOSIS pages which you can add to the USER menu 1 In this manual the USER menu consisting of items and pages registered at the factory is used 7 1 Menu Organization and Operation For details of customizing the USER menu see 7 1 4 Editing the USER Menu on page 117 TOP menu The TOP menu consists of the following submenus lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS When you select an item in the TOP menu this displays the most recently shown page of the corresponding submenu When the submenu is selected for the first time the 00 CONTENTS page appears Submenus selected in the TOP menu These are the following menus e USER menu This menu includes monitor output settings viewfinder settings and commonly used functions This menu is normally displayed when the MENU ON OF
117. 4 switch you can see the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder screen while you are holding down the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu When no signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector the image is not changed even if you hold down the RET switch on the lens However the image is switched while you are holding down the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch to which the return video function is assigned even if no signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus The camcorder provides menus for adjustments and settings 7 3 1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Selector Positions Before using the camcorder use the GAIN SW page of the USER menu to set the gains corresponding to the L M and H positions of the GAIN selector which switches the gain of the video amplifier To set the gain values proceed as follows 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Tum the MENU knob until the GAIN SW page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page UO80GAIN SW GAIN LOW GAIN MID GAIN HIGH GAIN TURBO TURBO SW IND Item Description GAIN LOW Sets the gain value corresponding to the L position of the GAIN selector GAIN MID Sets the gain value corresponding to the M position of the GAIN
118. 550 550CE AC Adaptor with the DC output cable supplied with the adaptor POWER switch This switch turns the main power supply on and off POWER switch Battery attachment DC IN connector LIGHT switch This determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT connector is turned on and off AUTO When the switch on the video light is in the on position putting the camcorder in recording mode turns the video light on automatically When using the auto interval recording mode the video light is automatically turned on immediately before recording starts MANUAL You can turn the video light on or off manually using its own switch e When AUTO is selected unevenly lit video is recorded between the start of recording and the time when the light comes on We recommend that you select MANUAL when the start of a recording is important 2 1 Power Supply 13 S 01 U09 pue Sued JO SUOROUNJ pue sUOI e907 Z Je deyD o 14 However the light can be turned on before the start of recording in auto interval recording mode e To ensure proper operation of the video light with the unit Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs BP GL65 BP GL95 BP L60S and BP L80S 2 1 Power Supply 2 2 Accessory Attachments Shoulder strap posts Light shoe Shoulder pad ogy Tripod mount LIGHT connector Lens mount Lens locking lever Lens mount cap
119. 7 pue Bunes g sajdeyo A eyeq Bunjes sn Bulpeo7 pue Bulnes g Jaydeyup 152 T After displaying the SCENE FILE page see page 150 turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SCENE RECALL and press the MENU knob A SCENE RECALL page appears 2 Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL page which contains the desired scene files appears then press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SFILE LOAD MEM 1 5 and press the MENU knob The message RECALL OK YES NO appears PO1 SCENE RECALL RECALL OK DISPLAY MODE SCENE 1 SCENE2 NO FILE SCENE4 SCENES SFILE LOAD MEM1I 5S ESC YES NO ALL 4 To carry out the recall move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving the mark pointing to NO When loading is complete the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section The scene files loaded from the Memory Stick overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory when the Memory Stick is inserted return to the POO SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in the camcorder memory When there is no file to be loaded shown as NO FILE an existing file of the same number is unaffected In t
120. 9 to 99 0 Adjusts the saturation level affected by the multi matrix correction function in every sixteen axis mode 13 V V MOD OFF ON ON Turns the V modulation function on or off MODULATION MASTER VMOD 99 to 99 0 Turns the master V modulation function on or off R VMOD 99 to 99 Turns the R V modulation function on or off G VMOD 99 to 99 Turns the G V modulation function on or off B VMOD 99 to 99 Turns the B V modulation function on or off TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the output signal of TEST OUT Menu List 191 sexipueddy WA 192 No Page Item Settings Default Description 14 LOW KEY SAT LOW KEY SAT OFF ON OFF Turns the low key saturation function on or off L KEY SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the saturation level of the low luminance part L KEY SAT RANGE LOW L MID HIGH Sets the luminance level at which the low key H MID HIGH saturation function becomes effective Y BLACK GAMMA OFF ON OFF Turns the Y black gamma function on or off Y BLK GAM LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the gamma curve in the low luminance part Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW L MID HIGH Sets the luminance level at which the Y black H MID HIGH gamma becomes effective 15 SCENE FILE 1 Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of 2 the camcorder 3 4 uae 5 STANDARD Clears all current detail adjusted settings and switch se
121. AA ALTISTAA KAYTTAJAN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTAVALLE NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE VARNING OM APPARATEN ANVANDS PA ANNAT SATT AN DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS KAN ANVANDAREN UTSATTAS FOR OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING SOM OVERSKRIDER GRANSEN FOR LASERKLASS 1 For the customers in the USA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in t
122. B GAIN lt A gt 99 to 99 0 Only the value of B GAIN is changed D5600K lt A gt OFF ON OFF Turns the WHITE A electronic 5600K filter on or off COLOR TEMP lt B gt Display color 3200 Sets the color temperature of WHITE B temperature COLOR FINE lt B gt 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN lt B gt 99 to 99 0 Only the value of R GAIN is changed B GAIN lt B gt 99 to 99 0 Only the value of B GAIN is changed D5600K lt B gt OFF ON OFF Turns the WHITE B electronic 5600K filter on or off 03 BLACK FLARE MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the master black level R BLACK 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the R black level B BLACK 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the B black level MASTER FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the flare level of the master R FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the R flare level G FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the G flare level B FLARE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the B flare level FLARE OFF ON ON Turns the flare correction circuit on or off TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector 1 88 Menu List No Page Item Settings Default Description 04 GAMMA GAMMA OFF ON ON oe the gamma correction function on or off STEP GAMMA 0 35 to 0 90 0 45 Sets t
123. BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket 157 Viewfinder front rear positioning lever 20 Viewfinder screen display modes 124 layout of the status display 121 marker display 124 return video signal 129 selecting the display items 123 Shot data superimposed on the color bars 126 shotID 127 Status confirmation windows 128 status display 121 W WARNING indicator 32 Warnings 174 Warnings and indications 31 Warnings and indications on the LCDs 32 WHITE BAL switch 22 White balance adjusting 85 basic procedure for shooting 40 specifying an offset for the auto white balance 133 WHITE page 188 WHT SHADING page 193 Write protecting discs 36 Z ZEBRA switch 19 Index The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation PDW 510 510P 530 530P Sony Corporation SYL 3 805 941 09 1 hitp www sony net 2004
124. C NUMBER OF FRAME and TRIGGER INTERVAL on the FUNCTION 1 page To change these settings stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens When the camcorder power is switched off during recording in Manual Interval Rec mode When you set the POWER switch to OFF the camcorder will switch off by itself after disc access has continued for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory If you remove the battery unplug the DC cable or cut the power to the AC adaptor during manual interval recording picture data stored before recording stops a maximum of ten seconds may be lost Take care when changing the battery 3 2 6 Retaking the Most Recent Clip A retake function is available making it easy to erase and retake the most recently recorded clip To use the retake function you need use the FUNCTION 1 menu to assign it to one of the assignable switches ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 3 ASSIGN 4 or TURBO GAIN For details about operation see section 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 Switches page 133 Example After recording clip 3 you want to delete it and record a new clip 3 after clip 2 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 New clip To retake the most recent clip With recording paused or after the end of a preview see page 62 proceed as follows 1 Press the switch or button to which the retake function has been assigned While the button is pre
125. CHARA You can set the following items on the SHOT DISP page Item Description SHOT DATE Selects whether or not the shot data is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT TIME Selects whether or not shot time is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT MODEL Selects whether or not the model name NAME is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT SERIAL Selects whether or not the serial NO number is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT ID SEL Selects whether or not the shot ID set on the SHOT ID page is superimposed 1 to 4 or OFF SHOT 16 9 ID Selects whether or not the 16 9 mode indicator is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT BLINK Selects whether or not the blinking is CHARA superimposed ON or OFF Selecting the shot data for superimposed recording 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT DISP page appears and press the MENU knob to select the page 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 1 To carry out superimposed recording select the SHOT ID number 1 to 4 Not to carry out superimposed recording select OFF 3 Turm the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and press MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Tum the MENU knob to select whether or not to record the selected item superimposed
126. CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF ON OFF Turns on and off the function which during auto iris adjustment ignores very bright areas by dulling the reaction to high luminescence 15 FUNCTION 3 WHT FILTER INH OFF ON OFF Turns on and off the function which inhibits independent white memory for each filter position COLOR BAR SEL SMPTE EBU SNG SMPTE Color bar type PDW 510 530 EBU PDW 510P 530P REC TALLY UPPER BOTH UPPER Selects whether to light the upper tally indicator only or both upper and lower tally indicators COLOR VF INPUT COMP VBS BOTH COMP Video input selection when a color viewfinder is used USER amp ALL ONLY OFF ON OFF Show only USER menu in the top menu RM COMMON OFF ON OFF Selects whether or not to share settings for MEMORY when an RM remote control unit is connected and when the unit is used alone RM REC START RM CAM PARA RM When an RM remote control unit is connected selects which REC START STOP buttons are enabled RM camera both SHT DISP MODE SEC DEG SEC Selects shutter speed display in standard mode AWB FIXED AREA OFF ON OFF Turns on and off the function which fixes the 3 on screen detection area for AWB Menu List No Page Item Settings Default Description 16 GENLOCK GENLOCK OFF ON ON Turns genlock on and off RETURN VIDEO OFF ON OFF Turns return video on and off GL H PHASE 60 to 139 0 Genlock H phase setting PDW 510 530
127. D USER FILE SAVE F ID H 2 amp k 0123456789 gt lt gt CABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQR STUUWXYZE I_ INS DEL RET ESC END 2 Tum the MENU knob to move the mark until the desired type of the display contents see the following table appears then press the MENU knob POO USER LOAD DISPLAY MODE USER1 USER2 NO FILE ESC F ID USER4 USERS Display type Description ALL File ID 10 characters and date month day year for PDW 510 530 and day month year for PDW 510P 530P FID File ID 16 characters DATE Saved date year month day hours minutes seconds MODEL Information on the model 3 Follow the procedure of steps 4 and 5 described in 7 2 7 Setting the Shot ID on page 127 to enter the file ID 4 When you finish entering the file ID turn the MENU knob to move the i mark to END then press the MENU knob The entered file ID is now displayed 130USER FILE TOP USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SAVE D EXEC QOOUUOOUUU0000000 USER PRESET File ID set in step 3 After setting the file ID carry out the procedure from step 3 in 7 1 2 Saving User Menu Data to the Memory Stick on page 145 The set file ID is saved in the Memory Stick with the data Selecting the display contents You can select the contents of the file to be displayed on the USER SAVE page and USER LOAD page Pr
128. D lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Extended commands The following table shows the extended FTP commands supported by this unit In the command syntax column lt SP gt means a space entered by pressing the space bar and lt CRLF gt means a new line entered by pressing the Enter key Command name Description SITE REPF Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer This command allows you to specify a segment in the body of the MXF file composed of video and audio data for transfer of the required segment only e A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified e This command cannot be used when the path names contains a space Use the SITE REPFL command instead Command syntax SITE REPF lt SP gt lt path name gt lt SP gt lt start frame gt lt SP gt lt transfer size gt lt CRLF gt lt path name gt specifies the path name of the file to transfer Enclose the path name in double quotation marks lt start frame gt specifies an offset from the start of the file Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset the first frame is 0 lt transfer size gt specifies the number of video frames to transfer specify O to transfer to the end of the file Input example SITE REPF Clip C0001 MXF 5 150 Transfer C0001 MXF Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 155 SITE REPFL Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this
129. DATA PREFIX TITLE 1 2 amp 0123456789 G ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUU WXYZ _abcdefghiJklmnop arstuyvwxyz INS DEL RET ESC END 2 Move the Ml mark to the character you want to change and then press the MENU knob 3 Rotate the MENU knob to move the W mark to the desired character in the list of selectable characters and then press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the remaining characters 5 When you have finished entering the prefix rotate the MENU knob to move the W mark to END and then press the MENU knob The camcorder exits prefix input mode and the original CLIP TITLE page appears To set the initial value of the clip title serial number You can set the initial value of the clip title serial number to 00001 default or to any 5 digit value To return the initial value to 00001 Proceed as follows 1 On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu see page 54 select CLEAR NUMERIC and then press the MENU knob The message CLEAR OK YES NO appears 2 Select YES and then press the MENU knob The value in the NUMERIC field returns to 00001 To set the initial value to any number Proceed as follows 1 On the CLIP TITLE age of the OPERATION menu P see page 54 select CLEAR NUMERIC and then press the MENU knob An initial value appears 23 CLIP TITLE 0123456789 IN ESC END EXEC EXEC REFIX TIT NUMERIC 00001
130. E INTVAL REC CACHE CACHE REC TIME 0 2s 7 Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 8 Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to CACHE REC TIME O30FUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF DF CACHE INTVAL REC CACHE CACHE REC TIME 0 2s 9 Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE REC TIME changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 1 OTurn the MENU knob until the desired Picture Cache time appears As you turn the MENU knob the Picture Cache time changes in the following sequence 0 2s gt 2 4s gt 4 6s gt 6 8s gt 8 10s gt 10 12s 1 1 Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 12 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen Settings made in Picture Cache mode are maintained until changed You can turn Picture Cache mode on and off by assigning the Picture Cache ON OFF function to one of the assignable switches ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 and TURBO GAIN buttons and pressing the switch For detailed information on the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches see 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 Sw
131. E page of the OPERATION menu see page 54 select LOAD PREFIX DATA and then press the MENU knob MEMORY STICK ACCESS appears and the file on the Memory Stick TITLES TXT is transferred to the internal memory of the unit The message COMPLETE appears when the transfer finishes 3 2 Recording The message FILE NOT FOUND appears if no list of title prefixes is found Check the location where the file is stored on the Memory Stick To select a prefix from the title prefix list Proceed as follows On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu see page 54 select SELECT PREFIX and then press the MENU knob A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears P00 TITLE PREFIX ESC Tennis Basketball Skiing_1 Skiing_2 Athletics gt Aquatics Cycling gt Softball Fencing Sailing When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to the internal memory of this unit only the initial value TITLE appears 2 Select the desired title prefix from the list and then press the MENU knob The CLIP TITLE page appears again and the selected prefix appears in the PREFIX field To enter a title prefix directly Proceed as follows On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu see page 54 select PREFIX and then press the MENU knob A prefix string appears 23 CLIP TITLE TITLE SELECT PREFIX g CLEAR NUMERIC i LOAD PREFIX
132. EADPHONE OUT item in the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to STREO You can also connect a monaural earphone to the front jack and a monaural stereo earphone set to the rear jack simultaneously 2 3 Audio Functions 1 E E Abbreviation of Electric to Electric In E E mode video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only This can be used to check input signals MONITOR switch and CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch These switches together determine the channel selection for audio monitor output MONITOR CH 1 CH 3 MIX MIX CH 2 CH 4 CH 1 2 CH 3 4 MONITOR switch CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch MONITOR switch and CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch This determines the pair of audio channels selected with the MONITOR switch CH 1 2 position channels 1 and 2 CH 3 4 position channels 3 and 4 The signals output from the AUDIO OUT connector and EARPHONE jacks also depend on the setting of this switch MONITOR switch This selects the audio monitor channels output to the monaural earphone or speaker depending on the setting of the CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch MONITOR volume control This control adjusts the speaker or earphone volume for sounds other than the alarm sound At the minimum position no sound can be heard ALARM volume control This control adjusts the speaker or earphone alarm vo
133. ENU ON OFF switch T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Tum the MENU knob until the VF SETTING page appears and press the MENU knob to select the page UOSOVF SETTING ZEBRA ZEBRA SELECT ZEBRA1 DET LEVEL ZEBRA1 APT LEVEL ZEBRA2 DET LEVEL UF DETAIL LEVEL UF ASPECT Item Description ZEBRA Turns the zebra display on or off 1 ZEBRA SELECT Selects ZEBRA 1 ZEBRA 2 or BOTH ZEBRA 1 DET LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 1 70 display ZEBRA 1 APT LVL Adjusts the aperture level of the zebra 1 display 1 to 10 to 20 ZEBRA 2 DET LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 2 100 display VF DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the sharpness of the viewfinder 99 to 0 to 99 2 Turns the VF detail function on or off and adjusts the level VF ASPECT Selects the viewfinder aspect ratio AUTO 16 9 1 When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with the ZEBRA switch turns the display on or off using this item When you use the viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch the most recent operation of the ZEBRA switch and this menu operation is effective 2 The sharpness setting at the viewfinder does not affect the recorded image 3 When the VF ASPECT item is set to AUTO this is linked to the 16 9 4 3 selection on the FORMAT page When the VF ASPECT item is set to 16 9 but 4 3 is selected o
134. F Append to directory names The following data is transferred depending on whether lt path name gt specifies a directory or file e Directory specified A list of the files in the specified directory e File specified Information about the specified file e No specification A list of the files in the current directory The wildcard characters any string and any character may be used in lt path name gt Input example 1 LIST a Clip Input example 2 LIST Clip MXF Command name NLST NLST lt SP gt lt options or path name gt lt CRLF gt Description Sends a list of file names from this unit to the remote computer with no other information Command syntax The following options may be specified when no path name is specified e a Also display file names that begin with e l Display information other than file name gives the same result as the LIST command e F Append to directory names The following data is transferred depending on whether lt path name gt specifies a directory or file e Directory specified A list of the file names only in the specified directory e No specification A list of the file names only in the current directory The wildcard characters any string and any character may be used in lt path name gt Input example 1 NLST Input example 2 NLST Clip MXF RETR Begins transfer of a copy
135. F Turns the fine detail function on or off FINE DTL LVL 99 to 99 0 Sets the level at which the fine detail function becomes effective V DTL CREATION NAM G R G Y_ R G Selects the source signal of the V DTL signal H V CONTROL MODE H V V V Select the operation mode of DETAIL H V RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page H V H and V both enabled V V DTL only enabled 10 SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL OFF ON OFF Turns on all of 1 2 and 3 of the color detail function SKIN DETECT Moves to color EXEC_ Executes the color detail function detection page SKIN AREA IND OFF ON OFF Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area of the currently selected type of the color detail function SKIN DTL SELECT 1 2 3 1 Selects the type of the color detail function The following items depend on the selected type of the color detail function SKIN DETAIL OFF ON ON Turns the color detail function on or off for the type selected in the above item SKIN DETAIL LVL 99 to 99 Sets the level of the color detail signal SKIN DTL SAT 99 to 99 Adjusts the saturation level of the hue possessed by the color detail function SKIN DTL HUE 0 to 359 0 Adjusts the center phase of the hue possessed by the color detail function SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 359 40 Adjusts the width of the hue possessed by the color detail function Menu List No Page Item Settings Default Description 11 MTX LINEAR MATRI
136. F switch is changed to ON e USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from the USER menu to suit your needs e ALL menu This menu contains all items of the OPERATION menu PAINT menu MAINTENANCE menu FILE menu and DIAGNOSIS menu e OPERATION menu This menu contains items for changing settings according to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is being operated e PAINT menu This menu contains items for making detailed image adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the camera Support of a video engineer is usually required to use this menu Although you can also use an external remote control panel or master setup unit to set the items on this menu this menu is effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors e MAINTENANCE menu This menu contains items for performing camera maintenance operations such as changing the VDR system or using infrequently used paint items FILE menu This menu is for performing file operations such as writing the reference file e DIAGNOSIS menu This menu enables you to confirm the VDR status or identify a failed circuit board 7 1 2 Displaying Menus The camcorder can display menus both on the viewfinder screen and on the color LCD Viewfinder ColorLCD DISP SEL switch The MENU ON OFF switch is inside the cover POWER switch Displaying menus on the vie
137. FT button and press the SUB CLIP button CLIP menu operations end 4 3 3 Clearing the Current Clip List From the Unit Memory Proceed as follows to clear the current clip list leaving it with no clip list loaded 1 Display the CLIP menu See Displaying the CLIP menu page 78 2 Select CLEAR in the CLIP menu and press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob The following screen display appears CLEAR CLIP LIST ESC CLEAR CLIP LIST EXEC 3 Press the SEL SET dial or the Menu knob The message EXECUTE OK YES NO appears 4 Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to move the mark to YES and press the dial knob The current clip list is cleared leaving it with no clip list loaded 5 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP button CLIP menu operations end 4 3 4 Setting the Start Time Code of the Current Clip List The start time code LTC of the current clip list is set to 00 00 00 00 when the camcorder is powered on and when a disc is inserted You can set the start time code to any value Proceed as follows T Loadan existing clip list for which you want to set the initial time code into to the unit memory as the current clip list For details see 4 3 1 Loading a Clip List From Disc Into Unit Memory page 78 2 Display the CLIP menu See Displaying the CLIP menu page 78 3 Select TC PRESET in the CLIP menu and press the SEL SET dia
138. FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set REC START STOP to RM If the same function as that of the REC START button is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch or the TURBO GAIN button this setting also disables these controls To enable the camcorder REC START button and the lens VTR button On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set REC START STOP to CAM If the same function as that of the REC START button is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch or the TURBO GAIN button this setting also enables these controls To enable all of the camcorder REC START button the lens VTR button and the remote control unit VTR button On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set REC START STOP to PARA If the same function as that of the REC START button is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch or the TURBO GAIN button this setting also enables these controls When the monitor is connected to the MONITOR OUT connector of the remote control unit The MONITOR connector BNC type of the RM B150 B750 outputs the same signal as that from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder Use the black cable supplied with the RM B 150 B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the RM B150 B750 When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect before the remote control unit was connected By making a menu setting the setting of the paint
139. Files If files have been saved in the page selected in step 2 those files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder memory For example files from 001 to 005 are replaced Setting the file ID Before the data is saved as a scene file it is useful to set a file ID to identify it The set file ID is saved together with the data To set the file ID proceed as follows On the SCENE FILE page turn the MENU knob to move the mark to F ID FO4OSCENE FILE STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD oS STANDARD OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE F 1D 2 Press the MENU knob A character table appears allowing you to select characters you want to enter U16OUSER FILE 48 k 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQR STUVWXYZI INS DEL RET ESC END TOP OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE eF ID E EXEC EXEC a 3 Carry out the operations for steps 4 and 5 described in 7 2 7 Setting the Shot ID on page 127 to enter the file ID Set the file ID before saving the scene file in the Memory Stick or the camcorder memory Otherwise the file ID is not saved with the other data 4 When you finish entering the file ID turn the MENU knob to move the W mark to END then press the MENU knob The SCENE FILE page appears again O40SCENE FILE a1 STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD OSTANDARD SCENE
140. G TEST is selected the setting is the same as the setting of TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT connector R G B BLK H SAW _ 99 to 99 0 H Saw black shading compensation R G B BLK H PARA 99 to 99 0 H Parabola black shading compensation R G B BLK V SAW _ 99 to 99 0 V Saw black shading compensation R G B BLK V PARA 99 to 99 0 V Parabola black shading compensation BLACK SAW PARA OFF ON ON Turns black shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 0 Master black level adjustment MASTER 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 0 db Temporarily adjusts the master gain value GAIN TMP 24 30 36 42 48 dB 03 LEVEL ADJ ENC VIDEO LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Encoder video level adjustment RGB LEVEL 99 to 99 0 R G B video level adjustment TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT connector H BLANKING 99 to 99 0 H blanking width adjustment WIDTH Menu List 193 sexipueddy Ml 194 No Page 04 BATTERY 1 Item Settings Default Description Info BEFORE END 5 10 15 to 95 100 5 Used when a BP GL65 GL95 M100 Battery Pack is used Sets the remaining power value of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Info END 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 Used when a BP GL65 GL95 M100 Battery Pack is used Sets the remaining power value of the battery at which the END warning shou
141. ID Unique Material Identifier is internationally standardized The UMID may be used either as the 32 byte Basic UMID or as the extended UMID which includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes For details refer to SMPTE 330M Extended UMID 64 bytes Basic UMID 32 bytes Source Pack 32 bytes Spatial Universal label L Inst No Material Number Time Date Co ordinates Country Org User 12 bytes 1 3 bytes 16 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus sum s p e q pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sBunes pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WA 140 Globally unique ID is automatically recorded every shooting The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional information such as location time date company and so on The UMID is applied as follows Material No Instance No ID generated when shooting Same as the above Source Pack Shooting information when where and who Same as the above Original material 00 00 00 Copied material generation number 1 byte random number 2 byte Distinguishing between the original material and copied material material Material source D detecting Metadata pack that identifies the source of material unit by defining the when where and who of the material unit with which it is a
142. K NCO1 Network Adaptor option 1 i LINK is a trademark of Sony Corporation Picture cache recording Video and audio for a maximum of 10 seconds is always held in memory so that when you start recording it is possible to record from just before the REC START button was pressed Time lapse video intermittent recording function You can record video intermittently capturing any number of frames at any desired time interval Proxy AV data Proxy AV data is low resolution data with a video bandwidth of 1 5 Mbps and an audio bandwidth of 64 Kbps per channel This unit records proxy AV data on the Professional Disc whenever MPEG IMX or DVCAM format data is recorded on the main channel Proxy AV data is much smaller in size than the full resolution IMX or DVCAM data It can be transferred quickly over computer networks easily edited in the field with laptop computers and readily used in a wide variety of applications such as content management on small scale servers Wide range of metadata recording In addition to video and audio various types of additional information can be recorded on the Professional Disc as metadata e Essence marks can be added to mark important locations in the video and audio data Essence marks can be added manually at any frame by pressing the lens RET button or an assignable button They can also be added automatically at locations where there is a sudden change in luminance or audio input a
143. L CH 1 control REAE1 SIDE1 recording on the left WRR level MIC LEVEL control EVEL FRONT LEVEL CH 1 control F S1 is linked with MIC LEVEL control Channel 2 LEVEL CH 2 control REAE2 SIDE2 recording on the right WRR level MIC LEVEL control LEVEL FRONT LEVEL CH 2 control F S2 is linked with MIC LEVEL control When you have operation of the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together if the MIC LEVEL control is set to 0 the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls 5 5 Adjusting the Audio Level 5 5 2 Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the Front Microphone You can adjust the audio level input from the front microphone connected to the MIC IN connector which is to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors the camcorder detects the connection to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors Thus the AUDIO IN switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors are automatically selected Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors Alternatively set the REAR XLR AUTO item to OFF on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE m
144. LCDs and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level the function of the XLR connection automatic detection is working correctly If it does not reflect the changing sound level the function of the XLR connection automatic detection function is off Set REAR XLR AUTO to ON on the VDR MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu If it does not reflect even after making this setting the XLR connection automatic detection function does not work correctly 7 Checking the user bit and time code functions 1 Set the user bits as required For the operation see 5 6 3 Setting the User Bits on page 96 Set the time code For the operation see 5 6 1 Setting the Time Code on page 96 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN Press the REC START button and check that recording starts and that the time code indication in the counter display changes Press the REC START button again and check that recording stops and that the time code indication stops changing 10 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting 6 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN and check that the time code indication starts changing again and continues to change even when you restart recording and stop recording again Set the DISPLAY switch to U BIT and check that the user bit data that was set is displayed 10 2 Maintenance 10 2 1 Cleaning the Viewfinder Use a dust blower to clean the CRT scree
145. LEAR USR PRESET EXEC Clears the standard setting of pages registered in the USER menu CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC Returns the pages registered in the USER menu to the factory default state LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF ON OFF Selects whether to include pages registered by the user in user files to be loaded by USER FILE LOAD LOAD OUT OF USER OFF ON OFF Selects whether to include pages not registered by the user in user files loaded by USER FILE LOAD BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF ON OFF Selects whether to include data after USER FILE pages in user files to be loaded by USER FILE LOAD USER LOAD WHITE OFF ON OFF Selects whether to include white balance data in user files to be loaded by USER FILE LOAD 03 ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD EXEC Load ALL file ALL FILE SAVE EXEC Save ALL file F ID 16 characters Name ALL file ALL PRESET EXEC Return items in ALL file to preset values STORE ALL PRESET EXEC Set preset values of items in ALL file CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC Clear preset values of items in ALL file 38SEC CLR PRESET OFF ON OFF Turns on and off the function which returns menu items to the preset values when the MENU knob is kept pressed for 3 seconds NETWORK DATA OFF ON OFF Selects whether or not to read in the network related data 04 SCENE FILE 1 See 8 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files on 2 page 148 3 4 5 as me STANDARD SCENE RECALL EXEC SCENE STORE EXEC
146. LEVEL CH 2 control F S1 is linked with MIC LEVEL control Audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 5 5 Adjusting the Audio Level 95 BulpsooeyY 104 sues pue syu wysnfpy S 3 deyo HII Bulpsooey 104 sues pue sjuewisnipy g se deyo WA 96 5 6 Setting the Time Data 5 6 1 Setting the Time Code The time code setting range is from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 29 hours minutes seconds frames for the PDW 510 530 and from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 24 for the PDW 510P 530P When the scan mode is 24P with the CBK FCO1 expansion board installed and the frame mode is NDF non drop frame mode the value of the least significant digit is limited to 0 or 5 To set the time code proceed as follows THUMBNAIL SELISET F R w 10 AUDIO SELECT J E cm AUDIO IN onr F REAR R WIRELESS w uP MENU SHFT PRESET Setting the time code T Set the DISPLAY switch to TC 2 Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET 3 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit of time code flashes 4 Use the SEL SET dial to set the time code value To change the value of the flashing digit turn the dial and to shift to the next digit press the dial Repeat this until all desired digits are set 5 6 Setting the Time Data To reset the time code value to 00 00 00 00 Press the RE
147. MASK then press the MENU knob SUBNET MASK setting window appears 8 Carry out steps 3 to 6 to set the subnet mask 9 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to DEF GATEWAY then press the MENU knob The DEF GATEWAY setting window appears 1 ORepeat steps 3 to 6 to set the default gateway 11 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Setting the communications speed Set the communications speed by choosing AUTO 10Mbps or 100Mbps from the menu The factory default setting is AUTO Proceed as follows 1 Carry out steps 1 to 3in Enabling automatic acquisition of the IP address page 142 to display the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to LINK SPEED then press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired value then press the MENU knob 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Setting the communications mode full duplex or half duplex Set the communications speed by choosing AUTO FULL full duplex or HALF half duplex from the menu The factory default setting is AUTO Proceed as follows 1 Carry out steps 1 to 3in Enabling automatic acquisition of the IP address page 142 to display the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to DUPLEX then press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark t
148. MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS Unloading a disc manually when the power supply is off You need not return the screw to its original position after taking out the disc Turning on the power makes the disc compartment mechanism operable again 3 1 5 Formatting a Disc Using a new disc An unused disc requires no formatting operation The disc is automatically formatted so that it is ready to use when loaded into this unit Using a disc on which material is recorded To format a recorded disc load the disc into the unit then do as follows When a recorded disc is formatted all the data on the disc is erased Locked clips see page 65 are also erased 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 3 1 Handling Discs 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the MAINTENANCE menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to DISC and press the MENU knob to display the DISC page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the DISC page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page TOP EXEC EXEC EXEC M19 DISC DELETE LAS
149. MENU knob the setting changes in the following sequence M gt ISEC gt 2SEC 12H gt 24H 11 Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 121 you selected the consecutive mode in step 10 anything other than M turn the MENU knob to move the mark to PRE LIGHTING 50 3 2 Recording 1 3 Press the MENU knob The mark to the left of PRE LIGHTING changes to a mark and the mark to the left of the setting changes to a mark 14 Tum the MENU knob to display the length of time to light before recording The setting changes in the following sequence OFF gt 2SEC gt 5SEC gt 10SEC Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording The light switch must also be set to ON With these settings the light turns on and off automatically However the light remains on continuously if the off time is less than 5 seconds When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON the light remains on continuously 1 5 Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 16 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the following message appears along the bottom of the screen indicating the current Manual Interval Rec mode In single shot mode MANU INTERVAL FRAME
150. N connector 23 29 GENLOCK page 201 H HOLD button 30 HOURS METER page 204 i LINK DV IN OUT S400 connector 23 Indicators in the viewfinder 34 Interval Rec function 46 auto 46 manual 49 IP address 142 K KNEE page 189 L LCD switch 32 PLED page 184 LENS connector 15 LENS FILE 1 page 203 LENS FILE 2 page 203 LENS FILE 3 page 203 LENS FILE page 185 Lens locking lever 15 Lens mount 15 Index Lens mount cap 15 Lens mounting 159 LEVEL ADJ page 193 LEVEL controls 17 LIGHT connector 15 Light shoe 15 LIGHT switch 13 Live logging mode 57 Loading scene files 151 user files from a Memory Stick 144 Loading and unloading a disc 37 Locations and functions of parts and controls 13 LOCK knob 20 LOW KEY SAT page 192 M Maintenance 169 173 Manual Interval Rec mode 49 MARKER 1 page 184 MARKER 2 page 184 Memory card 58 Memory Stick jumping to a file related menu page 153 about a Memory Stick 206 compartment 28 handling 144 loading saved data 147 saving and loading user files 144 saving user menu data 145 MEMORY STICK page 203 Memory symbol 60 Menu 114 assigning functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches 133 basic operations 115 displaying 115 operating section 27 organization 114 resetting USER menu settings 143 selecting the aspect ratio 136 selecting the output signals 131 setting gain values 130 setting the CCD scan mode 138 setting the color temperature manually 132 specifying an offse
151. NC01 option and thumbnail high color temperature Slater disable them in power COLOR FINE lt A gt Adjusts the value more precisely when g i the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not 4 Move the mark to i LINK OUT then press the aO MENU knob R GAIN lt A gt Only the value of R GAIN is changed The mark changes to a mark and the mark B GAIN lt A gt Only the value of B GAIN is changed changes to a mark D5600K Sets the color temperature to sBunes pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WA 132 5 Turn the MENU knob to select ENABL then press the MENU knob The setting is confirmed The mark changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF approximately 5600 K 7 3 3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually You can adjust the value of the white balance manually by setting the color temperature Proceed as follows 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus The above table shows the adjustment of the white balance of channel A Items followed by lt B gt are used to adjust the white balance of channel B Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and press MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob
152. NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE and STOP To use these buttons stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens Menu operation While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode you cannot change the settings of CACHE INTVAL REC TAKE TOTAL TIME and REC TIME To change the settings stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens When the camcorder power is switched off during recording in Auto Interval Rec mode e When you set the POWER switch to OFF the camcorder will switch off by itself after disc access has continued for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory If you remove the battery unplug the DC cable or cut power to the AC adaptor during auto interval recording picture data stored before recording stops a maximum of ten seconds may be lost Take care when changing the battery Manual Interval Rec mode settings and shooting Manual Interval Rec has the following two modes Single shot mode Each time the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed the camcorder captures to memory a single shot consisting of the specified number of video frames Consecutive mode Once the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed the camcorder captures consecutive shots to memory at the specified interval with each shot consisting of the specified number of video frames To make settings before shooting Proceed as follows 1 Carry out steps
153. NU knob to move the mark to the item to be replaced then press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears 2 Select MOVE then press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again 3 Tum the MENU knob to move the mark to the position where you want to move the item then press the MENU knob EO2OUSER 1 EDIT WHITE lt B gt CH TEST OUT MENU OFFSET WHITE lt A gt MASTER BLACK The item selected in step 1 moves to the position that you selected in step 3 In the above example MASTER BLACK is moved to the top and the other items are moved down one line Inserting a blank line You can insert a blank line above the selected item Proceed as follows T Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item above which you want to insert a blank line The EDIT FUNCTION page appears 2 Select BLANK and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and a blank line is inserted above the specified item You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items have already been registered Adding deleting replacing pages You can add a new page to the USER menu delete a page from the USER menu or replace pages using the EDIT PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu To add a page Proceed as follows T while holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from the OFF position to the ON position The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to mo
154. OUT Menu List 181 sexipueddy Ml 182 USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu O 03 FUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt OFF CACHE ATW See 7 3 5 Assigning CHARA MARKR Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 RTAKE ATW RET V Switches on page 133 RET REC TURBO D5600 ZEBRA FREZE M FRZ etc ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt OFF CACHE OFF CHARA MARKR V SRC ZEBRA FREZE 5600 etc ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt OFF CACHE OFF CHARA MARKR ASSIGN SW sts RTAKE ATW RET V _ OFF RET REC TURBO ZEBRA ZOOMW ZOOMT FREZE M FRZ etc TURBO SW OFF CACHE TURBO CHARA MARKR RTAKE ATW RET V RET REC TURBO D5600 ZEBRA FREZE M FRZ etc DF NDF DF NDF DF Switches between drop frame PDW 510 530 only DF mode and non drop frame NDF mode CACHE INTVAL REC OFF CACHE A INT OFF See 3 2 4 Starting a Shoot M INT With a Few Seconds of Pre Stored Picture Data Picture CACHE 0 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 10 0 2s ee CACHE REC TIME 10 125 Cache Function on page 44 A INT 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 5MIN See 3 2 5 Time Lapse Video TAKE TOTAL TIME MIN Interval Rec Function on 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 15 20 page 46 30 40 50 70 100 H A INT 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 5SEC REC TIME SEC 1 to 85 MIN A INT or M INT except OFF 2SEC 5SEC OFF TRIGGER MODE M 10SEC PRE LIGHTING M INT 1 2 4 8 1 NUMBER OF FRAME M INT M 1 to 10 15 20 30 M TRIGGER INTERVAL 40 50 SEC 1 to 10 15 20 30 40 50 MIN 1 2 3 4 6 12
155. RE LIGHTING changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 18 Tum the MENU knob until the desired time to turn on the light before starting to record appears As you turn the MENU knob the PRE LIGHTING time changes in the following sequence OFF gt 2SEC gt 5SEC gt 10SEC Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording The light switch must also be set to ON With these settings the light turns on and off automatically However the light remains on continuously if the off time is less than 5 seconds When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON the light remains on continuously 1 O Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 20 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears from the screen and the message AUTO INTERVAL M S indicating Auto Interval Rec mode appears along the bottom of the screen xM S indicates the shooting interval For example the message AUTO INTERVAL 00M04S indicates that the shooting interval is four seconds The camcorder exits Auto Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off However the TAKE TOTAL TIME and REC TIME settings are maintained You do not need to set them again the next time you use Auto Interval Rec mode To shoot and record in Auto Interval Rec mode Proceed
156. RECALL SCENE STORE F ID SCENE21 Carry out the procedure from step 3 in 8 2 1 Saving a Scene File on page 148 The set file ID is saved together with the data Selecting the display contents You can select the items of file information to be displayed on the SCENE STORE pages P01 to P20 or the SCENE RECALL pages PO1 to P20 used for saving data to or loading data from a Memory Stick For details Selecting the display contents on page 147 8 2 2 Loading Scene Files Proceed as follows 1 In the TOP menu select the FILE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page Alternatively on the CONTENTS page select SCENE FILE and press the MENU knob to display the SCENE FILE page 3 Load the scene file To load the scene file stored in the camcorder Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired file number and press the MENU knob The UI which is displayed on the left of the file number changes to W The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file O4OSCENE FILE o1 SCENE 25 E2 SCENE 26 03 o4 05 OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE F 1D SCENE21 To cancel the selected scene file Move the mark to W and press the MENU knob E changes to O The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting this scene file To load a scene file saved in the Memory Stick Proc
157. SET button 5 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN F RUN Free run The time code generator keeps running R RUN Recording run The time code generator runs only while recording To set the drop frame mode non drop frame mode only for the PDW 510 530 You can select the drop frame DF mode or non drop frame NDF mode on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu or OPERATION menu or on the TMECODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu To make the time code consecutive When the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set to R RUN recording a number of scenes on the disc normally produces consecutive time code However once you remove the disc and record on another disc the time code will no longer be consecutive when you use the original disc again for recording In this case to make the time code consecutive proceed as follows Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN 2 Press the RET button on the lens This reads the previous recording and synchronizes the internal time code generator thus allowing the new time code recorded to follow on consecutively 5 6 2 Saving the Actual Time in the Time Code Setting the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the actual time in the time code When it is necessary to set the actual time use the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu For details see 7 3 6 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock on page 135 5 6 3 Setting the User Bits By setting the user
158. SHUTTER OFF ON ON DISP AUDIO OFF ON ON DISP DISC OFF ON ON DISP IRIS OFF ON ON O 07 VF DISP 2 DISP ZOOM OFF ON ON See 7 2 2 Selecting the DISP COLOR TEMP OFF ON OFF Display Items on page 123 DISP BATT REMAIN INT VOLT AUTO INT DISP DC IN OFF ON OFF DISP 16 9 4 3 ID OFF ON OFF DISP WRR RF LVL OFF ON OFF DISP TIME CODE OFF ON OFF DISP REC FORMAT OFF ON OFF Menu List 183 sexipueddy Ml USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu O 08 PLED GAIN lt gt OFF ON ON See 2 10 Indicators in the SHUTTER lt gt OFF ON ON Viewtiniger on page 34 WHT PRESET lt gt OFF ON ON ATW RUN lt l gt OFF ON ON EXTENDER lt gt OFF ON ON FILTER lt l gt OFF ON OFF OVERRIDE lt gt OFF ON ON O 09 MARKER 1 MARKER OFF ON OFF See 7 2 4 Setting the Marker CENTER OFF ON OFF P splay on page 124 SAFETY ZONE OFF ON OFF SAFETY AREA 80 90 92 95 90 ASPECT OFF ON OFF ASPECT SELECT 16 9 13 9 4 3 4 3 ASPECT MASK OFF ON OFF ASPECT MASK LVL 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 4 100 MARKER OFF ON OFF 10 MARKER 2 USER BOX OFF ON OFF Turns the box cursor on or off USER BOX WIDTH 1 to 465 245 Width from the center to right or left side USER BOX HEIGHT 1 to 120 72 Height from the center to top or bottom USER BOX H POS 461 to 461 H position of the center USER BOX V POS 118 to 118 V position of the center
159. SMI file is created an E MO1 XML file with the same name in the E part is created automatically h When an E E01 SMI file is deleted the E M01 XML file with the same name in the E part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial read Partial write C S01 MXF 2 Proxy AV data MXF file generated Yes No No No No automatically when a C MXF file is created 0001 to 0300 Other files Files other than the above No No a With firmware version 1 5 and higher the C part can be changed to a user defined name b With firmware version 1 5 and higher when the C part of a C MXF file name is changed a C SO1 MXF file with the same name in the C part is generated automatically c When a C MXF file is created a C SO1 XML file with the same name in the C part is created automatically General directory d When a C MXF file is deleted the C SO1 XML file with the same name in the C part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial read Partial write Any file Yes Yes Yes a Yes Yes b a UTF 8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length Depending on the character type file nam
160. SONY PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER PDW 510 510P PDW 530 530P Professional Disc SEX Professional Disc System i i mPEG EF DVCAM B stnorsix OPERATION MANUAL 1st Edition Revised 8 2 To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT This Professional Disc Camcorder is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Laser diode properties Wavelength 403 to 410 nm Emission duration Continuous Laser output power 65 mW max of pulse peak 35 mW max of CW Tekniska data for laserdiod Vaglangd 403 till 410 nm Emissionslangd Kontinuerlig Laseruteffekt 65 mW max f r pulstopp 35 mW max f r kontinuerlig vag Spesifikasjoner laserdiode B lgelengde 403 til 410 nm Stralingens varighet Kontinuerlig Laserens effekt 65 mW maks straletoppunkt 35 mW maks ved kontinuerlig straling Laserdiodin ominaisuudet Aallon pituus 403 410 nm Valityksen kesto Jatkuva Laserlahd6 n teho 65 mW sykehuipun maks 35 mW jatkuvan aallon maks This label is located inside For U S A the outside panel of the unit CAUTION Laser radiation when open and interlock defeated DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM Denna etikett finns pa For EUROPE apparatens ovansida
161. Scene Files 148 8 2 1 Saving a Scene File eee 148 8 2 2 Loading Scene Files eee 151 8 2 3 Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder to the Standard Settings Saved in the Reference File ssi stn cerns pete its 152 8 3 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick 153 Chapter 9 Setting Up the Camcorder 9 1 Power Supply sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 154 9 1 1 Using a Battery Pack ue 154 9 1 2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to an Exhausted Battery 0 00 0 essere 155 9 1 3 Using an AC Adaptor ee 155 9 1 4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight SYSE eiin ia 155 9 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder 156 9 2 1 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position 156 9 2 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Scree ionnann aeara T aal 156 9 2 3 Detaching the Viewfinder 157 9 2 4 Moving the Viewfinder Shoe Up 157 9 2 5 Using the BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket c cceseeeeeeeees 157 9 2 6 Detaching the Eyepiece 158 9 3 Mounting the Lens cceeeeeseeeeees 159 9 4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length160 9 5 Audio Input System ssee 160 9 5 1 Using the Supplied Microphone 160 9 5 2 Using an External Microphone 161 Table of Contents 9 5 3 Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner for a UHF Wireless Microphone System 162 9 5 4 Connecting Line Input Audio FSQUIDITICNE asaros 164 9 6 Tripod Mountiing sseeeeeeeeeee
162. T CLIP DELETE ALL CLIPS QUICK FORMAT 4 Press the MENU knob then turn it to move the mark to QUICK FORMAT and press the MENU knob again The message EXECUTE OK YES NO appears 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob again Formatting is completed and the message COMPLETE appears 3 1 6 Handling of Discs When Recording Does Not End Normally Salvage Function Recording processing does not end normally if for example the battery pack is removed during recording or if the power cord is disconnected during recording Because the file system is not updated video and audio data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip contents recorded up to that point are lost However this unit has a salvage function which can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such discs Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the POWER switch is turned off and when battery exhaustion is detected because the unit does not enter power saving mode until after the end of recording processing Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until recording processing has finished and the ACCESS indicator has gone out This function salvages as much recorded material as possible after an unforeseen accident but 100 restoration cannot be guaranteed Even when this function is used it is not possible to recover data from im
163. TC display is to be turned off after power off when the SUB LCD MODE SEL item above is set to TIMER H hours REC FORMAT IMX50 IMX40 IMX50 Selects the type of video codec Multiple PDW 530 530P IMX30 DVCAM codecs cannot be mixed on one disc only No Page Item Settings Default Description 11 ESSENCE SHOT MARK 1 OFF ON OFF See 3 2 3 Recording Essence Marks on MARK SHOT MARK2 OFF ON OFF page 42 OVER AUDIO LIMIT OFF ON OFF GAIN CHG MARK OFF ON OFF FILTER CHG OFF ON OFF MARK SHUTTER CHG OFF ON OFF MARK WHITE CHG OFF ON OFF MARK FLASH MARK OFF ON OFF FLASH MARK 1 to 20 10 LEVEL INDEX PIC POS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SEC See 5 7 Setting the Thumbnail Image on 10 SEC page 99 12 PRESET WHT COLOR TEMP lt P gt Display color 3200 White balance preset value temperature COLOR FINE lt P gt 99 to 99 0 R GAIN lt P gt 99 to 99 0 R gain preset value G GAIN lt P gt 99 to 99 0 G gain preset value D5600K lt P gt OFF ON OFF Selects whether to electrically apply 5600K filter to white balance preset value AWB ENABLE lt P gt OFF ON OFF Turns on and off the function which automatically acquires the preset value for automatic white balance adjustment 13 DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION DCC ADP K FIX DCC Selects the function assigned to the DCC SEL switch ADP is Adaptive Knee and FIX is fixed
164. TTERY 2 Item TYPE DETECTION Settings AUTO OTHER Default AUTO Description battery OTHER Always judges the battery to be of the Others 4 type regardless of the actual battery type SEGMENT NO 7 11 0 to 17 0 V in 0 1 V steps 17 0 V When the battery type judgment is Others sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 7 should turn off SEGMENT NO 6 SEGMENT NO 5 11 0 to 17 0 V in 0 1 V steps 11 0 to 17 0 V in 0 1 V steps 16 0 V 15 0 V When the battery type judgment is Others sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 6 should turn off When the battery type judgment is Others sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 5 should turn off SEGMENT NO 4 SEGMENT NO 3 11 0 to 17 0 V in 0 1 V steps 11 0 to 17 0 V in 0 1 V steps 14 0 V 13 0 V When the battery type judgment is Others sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 4 should turn off When the battery type judgment is Others sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 3 should turn off SEGMENT NO 2 SEGMENT NO 1 11 0 to 17 0 V in 0 1 V steps 11 0 to 17 0 V in 0 1 V steps 12 0 V 11 0 V When the battery type judgment is Others sets the voltage
165. The audio signal of the wireless microphone f P is recorded F Same as with the CH3 switch F R The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH2 gt 6 connector is recorded w W Same as with the CH3 switch i When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls linked together if the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls are set to 0 the audio signals on channels and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls before adjusting the MIC LEVEL control 5 5 3 Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4 Selecting the recorded audio You can select the audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches or you can have the selection made automatically as follows To automatically select the same audio as on channels 1 and 2 In the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set the AUDIO CH3 4 MODE item to CH 1 2 Adjusting the audio recording levels In the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set the AU CH34 AGC MODE item as follows For automatic adjustment select STREO or MONO Level to be Control Menu item Setting adjusted Channel 1 MIC LEVEL control MIC CH1 FRONT recording LEVEL CH 1 control EVEL SIDE on the left LEVEL CH 1 control F S1 is linked with MIC LEVEL control Channel 2 MIC LEVEL control MIC CH2 FRONT recording LEVEL CH 2 control EVEL SIDE2 on the right
166. VCAM referring to 5 1 1 Setting the Video Recording Format on page 82 If i LINK MODE is set to FAM on the OUTPUT page page 180 or SOURCE SEL page page 186 of the OPERATION menu it is not possible to record DV streams To record DV streams set i LINK MODE to AVIC Proceed as follows 3 4 Recording Video Signals From External Equipment 67 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E 13 deyo MMIII yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Ja deyo HAIN 68 MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch 21 SOURCE SEL TOP REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM REC CONTROL OFF i LINK MODE AU C 1 Holding down the MENU knob set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The TOP menu appears lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OPERATION 3 Press the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 4 ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SOURCE SEL and press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the SOURCE SEL page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page Item Description CAM Records the pictures being shot by the camcorder EXT Records video signals from
167. X OFF ON ON Turns the linear matrix correction and user set matrix correction functions on or off MATRIX USER OFF ON OFF Turns the user set matrix correction function on or off MATRIX PRESET OFF ON ON Turns the preset matrix correction function on or off MATRIX R G 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary G R user set matrix coefficients MATRIX R B 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary B R user set matrix coefficients MATRIX G R 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary R G user set matrix coefficients MATRIX G B 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary B G user set matrix coefficients MATRIX B R 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary R B user set matrix coefficients MATRIX B G 99 to 99 0 Sets the arbitrary G B user set matrix coefficients 12 MTX MULTI MATRIX OFF ON ON Turns the linear matrix correction and multi matrix correction functions on or off MATRIX MULTI OFF ON OFF Turns the multi matrix correction function on or off MATRIX AREA IND OFF ON OFF Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area corresponding to the currently selected setting MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color EXEC Detects color detection page MTX MULTI AXIS B B MG MG B Sets the region in which the multi matrix MG R R YL correction function can be changed sixteen YL YL G G axis mode G CY CY B MTX MULTI HUE 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the color phase affected by the multi matrix correction function in every sixteen axis mode MTX MULTI SAT 9
168. X total of 143 liga Thumbnail of currently selected clip first frame or specified frame 23 AUG 14 30 DUR 00 03 10 00 Recording date and time of selected clip Duration of selected clip or time code of first frame a When a title has been assigned to a clip see page 52 the title is enclosed in double quotation marks for example TITLE00001 b The thumbnail frame can be specified by a menu selection when the clip is recorded see page 99 Cuing up a frame including an essence mark Proceed as follows To switch between duration and timecode display in the thumbnail display Press the HOLD button Each press of the HOLD button switches the display between duration ant time code To escape from the thumbnail display to the full screen display Press the THUMBNAIL button turning off the indicator Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the desired clip You can also select clips with the following operations Press the PREV or NEXT button Select the previous or next clip Press the PREV or NEXT button with the F REV or F FWD button held down Select the first or last clip To cue up the selected clip press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob To start playback from the selected clip press the PLAY PAUSE button 1 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the THUMBNAIL button The essence mark selection screen appe
169. adjustment made with the remote control unit can be retained even after the remote control unit is removed from the camcorder For details see Structure of the paint adjustment data on the next page 9 9 Connecting the Remote Control Unit 167 Japioowey y dN Bumes 6 Ja deyo III Jepiooweg y dN Bumes 6 se deyo WA 168 Structure of the paint adjustment data Non volatile memory Independent data region MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA KNEE POINT DETAIL LEVEL the R B GAIN cam a R B BLACK Hardware corder Fa of the Pi camera RM S B150 Setup menu of Remote control data o region MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA KNEE POINT DETAIL LEVEL R B GAIN R B BLACK RM B150 connected or not connected As the illustration above shows the non volatile memory of the camcorder consists of two regions one is the independent data region that becomes effective when the remote control unit is not connected and the other is the remote control data region that becomes effective when the remote control unit is connected Paint adjustment data is automatically selected depending on whether or not the remote control unit is connected to the camcorder Thus when the remote control unit is connected to the camcorder the effective data region is switched to the remote control data region and the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time t
170. age MOSOVDR MODE REC TALLY BLINK REC START STOP MODE SELECT TIMER SET REC FORMAT 6 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to REC FORMAT and press the MENU knob again For the operation see the descriptions of steps 1 to 5 of the procedure Setting the Video Recording Format on page 82 Press the MENU knob then turn it to move the mark to AU DATA LEN IMX and press the MENU knob MOSOVDR MODE REC TALLY BLINK REC START STOP MODE SELECT TIMER SET IH REC FORMAT gt IMX50 The mark at the side of REC FORMAT changes to a mark and the mark by IMX50 changes to a mark T Turn the MENU knob to display the desired recording format MO6OAUD 10 2 TOP DATA LEN IMX 16bit U REF LEVEL 20db REF OUT CH12 AGC MODE CH34 AGC MODE AGC SPEC A LIMITER MODE AU LIMITER I LINK AUDIO OUT MOSOVDR MODE REC TALLY BLINK REC START STOP MODE SELECT TIMER SET REC FORMAT IH gt IMX40 8 Press the MENU knob This confirms the selection 9 Align the mark with TOP at the top right of the menu page and press the MENU knob This returns to the TOP menu 5 1 2 Setting the Audio Recording Format On the PDW 530 530P when the video recording format is IMX50 40 30 you can select the audio recording format in a menu from 16 bit 48 kHz and 24 bit 48 kHz The
171. alue locks to an INT or an EXT source when the time code is locked to an external source INT Internal lock EXT External lock LTC UBIT FIX TIME FIX Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of LTC FIX Records the data that is set by the user TIME Records the present time VITC UBIT FIX TIME FIX Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of VITC FIX Records the data that is set by the user TIME Records the present time WATCH AUTO ADJ OFF ON ON Matches the time of the built in clock with the time data of the user bits of an external time code Turns the automatic time correction function of the built in clock on or off UBIT GROUP ID 000 101 000 Selects the UBIT GROUP ID VITC INS LINE 1 9 to 22 H PDW 16H Selects the line into which VITC is to be 510P 530P inserted 12 to 19H PDW 19H 510 530 VITC INS LINE 2 12to19H PDW 18H Selects the line into which VITC is to be 510 530 inserted 9 to 22 H PDW 21H 510P 530P REC TALLY BLINK OFF ON ON Turns the tally illumination control on or off in the event of BATTERY BEFORE END DISC BEFORE END REC START BEEP OFF ON OFF Turns on or off the alarm sound at REC START STOP SUB LCD MODE TIMER OFF CONT TIMER Sets the time code TC display after power SEL off as follows TIMER The TC display turns off after the elapse of the time set by the SUB LCD TIMER below OFF Not displayed CONT Displayed SUB LCD TIMER 1H 3H 8H 1H Sets the duration of time after which the
172. anagement numbers Clip 1 Clip 2 C0001 C0002 Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 Example Clip list E0001 Clip list editing current clip list Clip lists cannot be edited on disc To edit clip lists you need to load them one at a time into the unit memory The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory is called the current clip list The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation and editing Clip list playback also uses the current clip list After creating and editing a clip list you need to save it to disc Unit memory Current clip list Can be edited adding deleting Clip list playback and thumbnail and reordering sub clips display SAVE f LOAD E0001 Clip list 1 E0002 Clip list 2 E0003 Clip list 3 C0001 Clip 1 C0002 Clip 2 C0003 Clip 3 E0099 Clip list 99 Clip list playback Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc Clips are played back according to clip list data 4 2 Creating Clip Lists 4 2 1 Selecting Clips You can create a clip list by selecting a desired clip from the thumbnail display and including it in the clip list as a sub clip Up to 99 clip lists can be handled in the CLIP menu Including a clip selected from the thumbnail display in the clip list Proceed as follows 2 4 i Thumbnail Taupe indicator Sub clip indicator
173. ance electronic shutter allows you to select extended clear scan mode ECS D and high vertical resolution mode EVS 2 to obtain clear high quality video 1 ECS Extended Clear Scan 2 EVS Super Enhanced Vertical Definition System Shooting functions to cope with different shooting conditions e A slow shutter function up to 1 second is provided as a standard feature This allows noiseless shooting under very poor lighting conditions and a variety of expressive possibilities such as shots of flowing streams which are smoothed out by afterimages You can easily recall sets of adjustment values from memory to match the particular lighting conditions The ATW function provides automatic white balance adjustment in response to changing lighting conditions The TruEye 2 process yields distortion free video even with high intensity colors The TURBO GAIN button enables an instantaneous boost of the video gain to the maximum 48 dB 1 ATW Auto Tracing White balance 2 TruEye TruEye is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation Freeze mix function This allows a still image from the previously captured video to be aligned with the video output from the camera Thus you can adjust the camera position to get exactly the same framing for new shooting Wide range of menu settings The menus provide the following operations among others e Status display message and marker display settings e Camera adjustment sett
174. and audible alarms SMPTE PDW 510 530 EBU PDW 510P 530P color bars and 1 kHz reference signal output Adjustment of a color monitor or external audio device is easy Color bars for an SNG D uplink are also provided 1 SNG Satellite News Gathering Viewfinder height adjustable In addition to the front to rear and left to right directions the viewfinder can be adjusted vertically in two steps Supports SNMP for maintenance and service option The SNMP compliant Sony Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Software can be used when the optional CBK NCO1 Network Adaptor is installed on this unit Via a TCP IP network connection this software can monitor the hardware status of this unit in real time and record monitoring logs This allows you to analyze the problem immediately and take the necessary steps whenever a hardware failure is detected 1 2 Example of System Configuration The diagram below shows a typical configuration of the camcorder for ENG and EFP For more information about the fittings connections or use of additional equipment and accessories see Chapter 9 as well as the operation manuals for the connected equipment Viewfinder related equipment Name Purpose Magnification Part No Fog proot filter 1 547 341 11 Lens assembly 2 8 D to 2 0 D A 8262 537 A Lens assembly 3 6 D to 0 8 D A 8262 538 A Lens assembly 3 6 D to 0 4 D A 8267 737 A Lens assembly
175. appropriate mode and speed For details see 5 3 Setting the Electronic Shutter on page 88 To start recording press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens If the recording start stop function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch this switch functions as REC START button For details see 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 Switches on page 133 During recording the REC indicator lights in the viewfinder Perform zooming and focus control if necessary During recording while the ACCESS indicator is lit do not remove the battery pack If you do the internal processing for recording may not finish properly which may cause the last few seconds of recording to be lost For details see 3 1 6 Handling of Discs When Recording Does Not End Normally Salvage Function page 38 6 To stop recording press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens again The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is saved as a single clip To play back the recorded clip Press the PREV button then press the PLAY PAUSE button to play from the beginning of the clip 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for shooting Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6 successive clips are recorded on the disc Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 REC REC REC REC REC REC START STOP START STOP START STOP It is not possible to record a cli
176. are not to be saved in the Memory Stick For details refer to the Maintenance Manual If data cannot be saved If one of the following error messages appears during or after the save operation then the data was not saved Data save error messages Error message Cause Action NO MEMORY No Memory Insert or reinsert the STICK flashing Stick is inserted Memory Stick MEMORY STICK The LOCK Set the LOCK switch LOCKED switch on the to the write enable Memory Stick position is set to the write protect position MEMORY STICK Circuit or Check the circuitry or ERROR Memory Stick replace the Memory flashing fault Stick Setting the file ID Before data is saved to a Memory Stick itis useful to set a file ID for the Memory Stick to identify it When data is saved to a Memory Stick the file ID is saved to the Memory Stick together with the data Set the file ID before saving data in the Memory Stick Otherwise the file ID is not saved with the other data Proceed as follows Onthe USER FILE page turn the MENU knob to move the mark to F ID UI6OUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE TOP EXEC EXEC ooooooooo00o00000o USER PRESET EXEC F ID 2 Press the MENU knob A character table appears allowing you to select characters you want to enter UIG6OUSER FILE USER FILE LOA
177. ars If the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON set it to OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button e If you set the MENU ON OFF to ON during thumbnail display thumbnail display is cancelled and replaced with menu display To escape from the essence mark selection screen to the previous screen Press the RESET button 2 Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the desired essence mark 3 3 Checking Recording and Playback yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup MMIII yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E sa deyo WM 3 Press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob Thumbnails of the frames including the selected essence mark appear The example shows the case where SHOTMARKT1 is selected as the essence mark This indicates that the thumbnail images are the frames including the essence mark SHOTMARK1 Sixth frame is selected from a total of 31 SHOTMARK1 frames SHOTMARK1 Currently selected SHOTMARK1 frame Recording date and time of selected frame 4 Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the desired frame You can also select frames with the following operations Press the PREV or NEXT button Select the previous or next frame Press the PREV or NEXT button with the F REV or F FWD button held down Select the first or last frame 5 Press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to cue up the selected clip To start playback from the selected frame press the PLAY PAUSE button 3 3 5 Clip List Pla
178. ated or recorded by XDCAM devices Clips CO001 MXF to C0300 MXF Clip lists EO001E01 SMI to EOO99E01 SMI When you record or create clips and clip lists you can assigned user defined names instead of the standard format names Assigning meaningful names to clips and clip lists can facilitate file management 1 This is supported from firmware version 1 5 Limitations e Letters numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2 0 character set can be used However the following control characters and symbols cannot be used Control characters U 0000 to U 001F U 007F Symbols lt gt Depending on the character type names may be limited to 14 characters in length The limit for ASCII characters is 56 characters All file name extensions are converted automatically to uppercase 3 2 Recording 55 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup MMII yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Ja deyo HAIN 56 Titles are used as user defined clip names on this unit Therefore the available characters are limited to those supported by the title function Files generated along with clips and clip lists use the same names the C or E part of the following file names Clips Metadata files C M0O1 XML proxy AV files C S01 MXF Clip lists Metadata files E M01 XML The following names cannot be assigned Clips CO000 MXF Clip lists EOOOOEO1 SMI EO100E01 SMI to E9999E01 SMI E0000 SMI E0100
179. atic detection function is off set the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch for the channel to which the audio output cable is connected to REAR If the XLR connection automatic detection function is on the input signal for audio recording is selected automatically and therefore this setting is not required 9 5 Audio Input System 163 Japioowey ou dq Bumes 6 Ja deyo III Jepiooweg y dn Bumes 6 se deyo WA LINE AES EBU MIC switch AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUDIO IN CH1 or to DC OUT connector CH2 connector LINE AES EBU MIC switch Dy oes id Audio equipment C a to AUDIO IN AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 A AJ switches 9 5 4 Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector Switch settings Set the LINE AES EBU MIC switch for the channel to which the audio signal source is connected to LINE Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded With the XLR connection automatic detection function being off the factory default setting A signal must be selected for audio recording by setting the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch to REAR depending on which of the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors is used for connecting the external audio equipment With the XLR connection detection function being on When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector the
180. ating 73 current clip list 72 deleting 79 editing 74 loading 78 operation 78 playback 64 previewing 77 sorting 80 CLIP menu 78 Color LCD 32 Command List 107 CONTRAST control 19 Current clip list clearing 79 saving to disc 77 start timecode 79 D DC IN connector 13 DC OUT 12 Vconnector 18 DCC ADJUST page 199 Deleting clips 42 all clips 42 the last clip 42 DETAIL 1 page 189 DETAIL 2 page 190 DETAIL 3 page 190 DEV STATUS 1 page 204 DIAGNOSIS menu list 204 Diopter adjustment ring 20 Directory structure 100 Disc formatting 38 handling 36 Loading and unloading 37 notes on handling 36 used for recording and playback 36 write protecting 36 DISC page 201 Disc status display on the color LCD 33 display on the monochrome LCD 32 DISP SEL switch 32 DISPLAY switch 30 31 E EARPHONE jack 16 EJECT button and indicator 24 Essence mark 42 thumbnail 63 ESSENCE MARK page 199 Example of system configuration 11 F F FWD button and indicator 24 211 Index x pul MN 212 F REV button and indicator 24 FAM 103 Features 7 File access mode 103 File ID scene file 150 user file 146 FILE menu list 202 File operation 100 restriction 101 FILTER selector 20 Flange focal length adjusting 160 FORMAT page 186 Formatting a disc 38 F RUN SET R RUN switch 30 FTP 106 Full salvage 39 FUNCTION 1 page 182 FUNCTION 2 page 183 FUNCTION 3 page 200 G GAIN selector 21 GAIN SW page 184 GAMMA page 189 GENLOCK I
181. automatically before starting to record set the LIGHT switch to AUTO To turn on Auto Interval Rec mode proceed as follows MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Tum the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears O3SOFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL REC 3 Press the MENU knob A mark appears on the left of the currently selected item and a mark appears on the left of the setting O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF i CACHE INTVAL REC 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to CACHE INTVAL REC 5 Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE INTVAL REC changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark O30FUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF DF CACHE INTVAL REC OFF 6 Turn the MENU knob until A INT appears As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes in the following sequence OFF gt CACHE gt A INT lt gt M INT When A INT appears the camcorder is in Auto Interval Rec mode The TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes one
182. bove a specified threshold The supplied logging software can be used to add titles comments and other text data to clips Computer readable text files can be recorded on the Professional Disc to enable systematic content management The ability to search metadata for the required audio and video scenes brings greater efficiency to various stages of the video production process such as editing and archiving 1 Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation Thumbnail search Thumbnail images of the clips on the disc can be displayed on the LCD panel and in the viewfinder by pressing the THUMBNAIL button They can also be shown in external video output You can check the content of a clip simply by moving the cursor to its thumbnail and pressing the play button Scene selection You can create and play back clip lists of selected clips from the disc arranged in any order One disc can store up to 99 clip lists Clip lists make it simple to perform offline editing in the field for later use with full scale nonlinear editing systems XPRI etc 1 XPRI is a trademark of Sony Corporation High reliability under tough operating conditions With resistance to vibration and dust comparable to tape based camcorders this unit can be relied on just like a conventional unit 1 1 4 Inputs and Outputs Range of audio inputs and outputs e A super cardioid directional monaural microphone with external power supply
183. bps 30 Mbps or DVCAM Audio recording format 16 bit 48 kHz or 24 bit 48 kHz Itis not possible to combine different recording formats on a single disc lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT gt MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS 5 1 1 Setting the Video Recording Format You can select the video recording format in a menu from MPEG IMX 50 Mbps MPEG IMX 40 Mbps MPEG IMX 30 Mbps and DVCAM The factory default selection is IMX50 Proceed as follows For menu operations see 7 1 3 Basic Menu Operations on page 115 1 Turn on the POWER switch 2 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 5 1 Setting the Recording Format PDW 530 530P Only 4 Press the MENU knob If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the MAINTENANCE menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 5 If the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to VDR MODE and press the MENU knob to display the VDR MODE page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the VDR MODE page appears then press the MENU knob to select the p
184. by date of creation 1 Display the CLIP menu See Displaying the CLIP menu page 78 4 3 Managing Clip Lists CLIP Menu 2 Turn the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to move the cursor to SORT BY in the CLIP menu and then press the dial or knob A screen like the following appears SORT CLIP LISTS BY ESC gt NAME A Z DATE MOST RECENT 1ST Turn the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to select NAME or DATE and then press the dial or knob NAME Sort the clip lists in ascending order by clip list name DATE Sort the clip lists by date of creation with the newest clip list first The message SORT OK appears Select YES and then press the SEL SET dial or MENU knob The clip lists are sorted by the method you chose in step 3 Unused clip lists are excluded from the sort 4 4 Using the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software When a computer with the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software installed is connected to this unit you can transfer the proxy AV data and metadata files recorded on a disc to the computer On the computer side PDZ 1 enables you to browse the proxy AV data add or modify metadata titles comments essence marks etc or create a clip list The modified metadata and the created clip list can then be written back to the disc loaded in this unit System requirements The following are required to use PDZ 1 e Computer When using the live logging function PC
185. cable If you connect or disconnect the i LINK cable while power is being supplied to this unit high voltage 8 to 40 V can flow into this unit from the i LINK connector of the connected equipment possibly damaging this unit When you connect this unit to an external device with a 6 pin i LINK connector always connect the 6 pin i LINK connector on the external device first 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions 23 04JUOD puke Sey JO suonouny pue suoneoogq Zz JeldeyD MMII S 01 U09 pue Sed JO SUOROUNJ pue sUOI e007 Z Je deyD HAIN REC START button VDR SAVE STBY connector EJECT button and indicator F REV button and indicator PLAY PAUSE button and indicator F FWD button and indicator NEXT button STOP button PREV button Shooting and recording playback functions 4 REC START button Press this button to start recording Press it again to stop recording The effect is exactly the same as that of the VTR button on the lens When the REC SWITCH function is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 3 or 4 switch push button you can use the switch as the REC START button VDR SAVE STBY standby switch This switch controls the VDR power mode during pauses in recording SAVE Power saving mode Although an internal operating sound is recorded as noise when you start recording power consumption in this mode is less than in standby mode so that battery life is extended When the
186. cal discs can age and cause deteriorating playback conditions You can use this function to check archival discs and other discs which have been stored for extended periods so that you can take action before the deterioration progresses further Deteriorating laser diodes performance The performance of the laser diodes used in optical heads can worsen with age leading to deteriorating playback conditions You can use the digital clock to check the total optical output time of optical heads Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate guide to when it is time to replace optical heads To prevent playback conditions from deteriorating Pay attention to the following points when handling discs e Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with your hands e Do not store for long periods in locations which are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans e Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or in locations exposed to direct sunlight If playback conditions have deteriorated Read errors occur when playback conditions continue to deteriorate When a read error occurs the message DISC DEFECT appears the video freezes and audio is muted If this happens check the following points Whether the disc displays the same playback condition on other XDCAM devices If so the surface of the disc may be dirty or scratched or the performance of the recording layers on the disc may have worsene
187. connecting line input audio equipment 164 using an external microphone 161 using the supplied microphone 160 Audio level meters 33 AUDIO OUT connector 18 Audio recording level 93 adjustment for input from the front microphone 94 adjustment for inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors 93 AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches 18 AUDIO 1 page 196 AUDIO 2 page 196 AUDIO 3 page 197 Auto clip list recoding 52 Auto Interval Rec mode 46 AUTO IRIS 2 page 200 AUTO IRIS page 185 AUTO SHADING page 201 AUTO W B BAL switch 21 Automatic title generation 52 Back tally indicator 31 Back tally ON OFF switch 32 Basic procedures for recording 40 for shooting 40 BATTERY 1 page 194 BATTERY 2 page 195 Battery attachment 13 Battery pack 154 attaching 154 BP GL95 154 BP IL75 154 detaching 154 Battery status on the color LCD 33 on the monochrome LCD 32 BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket 157 Black balance adjusting 84 basic procedure for shooting 40 BLACK FLARE page 188 BLK GAMMA page 189 BLK SHADING page 193 BP GL95 154 BP IL75 154 BRIGHT control 19 Built in speaker 17 C CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch 27 CBK FC01 8 CBK NC01 Network Adaptor 8 CBK SC01 10 68 CBK SD01 10 CCD scan mode 138 CH 1 2 CH 3 4 switch 16 Checking the last two seconds of the recording 62 the recording 61 the recording on the color video monitor 62 Clip assigning user difined names 55 lock 65 Clip list 72 assigning user difined names 55 cre
188. cording a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark Press the RET button once ShotMark1 appears on the viewfinder screen for about one second near the time code display If SHOT MARK 1 recording has been assigned to one of the assignable switches you can also use that switch to record a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark See section 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 Switches page 133 for more information about how to make assignments 3 2 Recording 43 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup MIMI yoeghe q pue Bulpio0ey Ja deyo HANK Recording a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark Press the RET button twice in quick succession during recording or playback ShotMark2 appears in the viewfinder screen for about one second near the time code display If SHOT MARK 2 recording has been assigned to one of the assignable switches you can also use that switch to record a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark 3 2 4 Starting a Shoot With a Few Seconds of Pre Stored Picture Data Picture Cache Function The camcorder has a large capacity internal memory in which you can cache the last few seconds maximum 12 seconds of captured video and audio so that recording starts from a point just before you press the REC START button or VTR button on the lens Setting the Picture Cache time Picture Cache mode To record in Picture Cache mode you need to turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time Picture Cache time using the USER menu
189. ctor 21 Shutter speed selecting 88 SKIN DETAIL page 190 SNMP 10 SOURCE SEL page 186 Specifications 177 Status display on the viewfinder screen 121 Status indicators 34 STATUS ON SEL OFF switch 27 STOP button 24 Sub clip 72 deleting 76 trimming 75 SUB CLIP button 26 Sub clip indicator 26 SW STATUS page 188 T TAKE TOTAL TIME 49 Tally indicator 19 31 TALLY switch 19 31 TC IN connector 29 TC OUT connector 29 TEST OUT connector 23 TEST OUT page 181 Testing Camera 169 preparations 169 VDR 170 THUMBNAIL button 26 Thumbnail indicator 26 Thumbnail search 62 Time code saving the actual time 96 setting 96 setting the user bits 96 synchronizing 97 system 29 Time code display on the color LCD 34 on the monochrome LCD 33 TIME DATE page 204 TIMECODE page 198 Time lapse video 46 Tripod mount 15 Tripod mounting 165 TURBO GAIN button 22 24P mode 138 U UMID data 139 User bits setting 96 USER FILE page 202 USER FILE2 page 202 USER menu editing 117 resetting 143 V V MODULATION page 191 VDR MODE page 198 VDR operation status 34 VDR SAVE STBY switch 24 VF DISP 1 page 183 VF DISP 2 page 183 VF SETTING page 184 Video camera section specifications 177 VIDEO OUT connector 23 Viewfinder 20 adjusting the focus and screen 156 adjusting the position 156 cleaning 173 detaching 157 detaching the eyepiece 158 moving the viewfinder shoe up 157 213 Index x pul MNI 214 setting 125 using the
190. d Adjusting the position backward or forward Proceed as follows Adjusting the position backward or forward 9 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder 9 2 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen Adjusting the viewfinder focus Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest Diopter adjustment ring Adjusting the viewfinder focus Adjusting the viewfinder screen Adjust the brightness contrast and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below BRIGHT control CONTRAST control PEAKING control Adjusting the viewfinder screen 9 2 3 Detaching the Viewfinder Viewfinder stopper Detaching the viewfinder Point the viewfinder barrel up or down 2 Loosen the viewfinder left right positioning ring 3 Holding the viewfinder stopper up slide the viewfinder in the direction indicated by the arrow and detach it 4 Remove the viewfinder cable and microphone cable from the clamps and disconnect them 9 2 4 Moving the Viewfinder Shoe Up 1 Using a hexagonal wrench 2 5 mm across flats remove the bolts M3 x 25 and spring washers to detach the viewfinder shoe from the camcorder body Viewfinder shoe assembly A 8278 412 G 2 Fit two of the four holes in the back of the viewfinder shoe over the upper two pins on the fixing plate Make sure that the triangu
191. d due to age Do not use discs with these symptoms Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device displays the same playback conditions If so the performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated Check the total optical output time 3 3 Checking Recording and Playback 61 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey uejdeup MMII yoeghe q pue Bulpio0ey Ja deyo nA 3 3 2 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording Recording Review If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is paused the last two seconds of the recording is played back on the viewfinder screen and the color LCD Use this function to check whether recording went smoothly If you hold down the RET button a low speed reverse search begins at a position two seconds before the recording end position When you release the RET button the reverse search stops and playback in the forward direction begins After playback the camcorder is ready to start recording again By assigning the the same function as that of the RET button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch you can use the switch in the same way as the lens RET button For details see 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN I 2 3 4 Switches on page 133 3 3 3 Checking the Recording on the Color Video Monitor Playback in Color Connect a color video monitor to the VIDEO OUT connector of the camcorder By pressing the PLAY PAUSE button you can view the recorded picture When t
192. d display mode appears and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section 7 2 4 Setting the Marker Display Use the MARKER 1 page of the USER menu to switch the display of the center and safety zone markers on or off and to select whether the area indicated by the safety zone marker is 80 90 or 100 of the screen area CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Tum the MENU knob until the MARKER 1 page appears and press the MENU knob to select the page UO7OMARKER 1 MARKER CENTER SAFETY ZONE SAFETY AREA ASPECT ASPECT SELECT ASPECT MASK ASPECT MASK LUL 100 MARKER You can set the following items on the MARKER 1 page Item Description MARKER Not to display all markers set to OFF CENTER To display the center marker set to ON SAFETY ZONE To display the safety zone set to ON SAFETY AREA To select the safety zone range 80 90 92 5 or 95 when SAFETY ZONE is set to ON ASPECT To display the aspect marker set to ON ASPECT To select the type of the aspect marker SELECT ASPECT MASK To make the areas out of the selected 4 3 aspect marker dimmer set to ON ASPECT MASK To se
193. desired page number This indicates that the menu screen can be scrolled 9 UF_ SETTING 10 AUTO IRIS Press the MENU knob The selected page is displayed Go to step 4 7 1 Menu Organization and Operation 2 Tum the MENU knob until the desired page appears 3 Press the MENU knob A mark appears on the left of the item currently selected on the page UO80GAIN SW GAIN LOW GAIN MID GAIN HIGH GAIN TURBO TURBO SW IND 4 Turn the move MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item e Turning the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera moves the mark up continuously e Turning the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera moves the mark down continuously 5 Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark UO80GAIN SW GAIN LOW GAIN MID GAIN HIGH GAIN TURBO TURBO SW IND 6 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting Before going to the next step you can cancel a change or return to the standard settings For this operation see the next item To cancel a change or return to the standard settings on page 117 To interrupt changing the settings By setting the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF the menu disappears from the screen By setting the MENU ON OFF switch to ON again the values that were displayed wh
194. dio channels 1 to 4 e Input level of audio channels 1 to 4 You can use the SET STATUS page of the USER menu to set whether or not the status confirmation windows are displayed To display the status confirmation windows You can use the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch as the STATUS ON SEL OFF switch when the MENU ON OFF switch is set to OFF when the cover of the menu operating section is closed OFF is automatically selected By pushing the STATUS ON SEL OFF switch up to ON SEL the confirmation window appears Each time you push this switch up to ON SEL the window switches After 10 seconds the window disappears automatically To make the window disappear promptly after displaying the window push this switch down to OFF To disable display of the status confirmation windows Proceed as follows T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the SET STATUS page appears and press the MENU knob to select the page U130SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL STATUS FUNCTION STATUS AUDIO Item Description ABNORMAL Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL window is displayed ON or OFF FUNCTION Selects whether or not the FUNCTION window is displayed ON or OFF STATUS AUDIO Selects whether or not the STATUS AUDIO window is displayed ON or OFF 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you wan
195. dio input the effective bit length is maximum 20 bits The following characteristics are common to the PDW 510 510P and PDW 530 530P filters Recording DVCAM Video 25 Mbps format compatible DVCAM format recording Audio 16 bits 48 kHz 4 channels Recording 85 minutes time Optical Single integrated filter system for CC color filters correction and ND neutral density 1 1 2 Camera Features 2 inch Power HAD EX CCDs The three high sensitivity low smear 2 3 inch Power HAD EX CCDs provide high image quality which is at the top of its class for a standard definition camcorder e The unit is switchable between a 16 9 aspect ratio wide image and 4 3 standard aspect ratio 1 1 Features 7 M JM AO J9 deUD Ml 8 e You can select an interlaced scan mode or progressive scan mode 30 fps frames per second for the PDW 510 530 25 fps for the PDW 510P 530P e With the optional CBK FCO1 Pull Down Board installed a 24 fps progressive scan video can be recorded subjected to pull down providing imaging quality close to that of film PDW 510 530 only 1 Abbreviation of Power Hole Accumulated Diode Power HAD is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation 2 More precisely 29 97 fps 3 More precisely 23 98 fps Camera signal processing for high quality video The 12 bit A D converter provides high image quality stability and reliability The high perform
196. disc DI read err The disc was not recognized Try ejecting Read err the disc and inserting it again Or DRV ADJ err exchange the disc Run Salvage Salvage processing needs to be done on the disc To record on the disc eject the disc insert it again and execute salvage processing Salvage NG Salvage processing failed For details see 3 1 6 Handling of Discs When Recording Does Not End Normally Salvage Function page 38 REC INHI The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is in the recording disabled position or salvage processing needs to be done on the loaded disc Set the tab to the recording enabled position Or eject the disc insert it again and perform salvage processing IMX Clip The loaded disc has a different recording DVCAM Clip format Exchange the disc or change the 4CH 24 Clip recording format 8CH 16 Clip Index File There is an unsupported index file on the disc to which you are trying to record Exchange or format the disc File System There is an unsupported file system on the disc to which you are trying to record Exchange or format the disc 10 3 Operation Warnings 175 vueugueN 0L Ja deyD iii soueuajule OL Ja deyD WA 176 Message Meaning and action to take KEY INHI 2 Disc operations are not possible when the DC IN connector is not connected and the CA 755 is being used ILL PLAY An A V phase error occurred during p
197. disc REWRITE Displays the number of times the disc has been rewritten SALVAGE Displays required when salvage is required FILE SYSTEM Displays unknown when the file system cannot be identified or when there is an error 08 CLIP STATUS CLIP LIST MODE NORMAL MODE or CLIP LIST MODE CLIP NO NORMAL MODE Number of current clip total number of clips CLIP LIST MODE Nothing particular displayed NAME NORMAL MODE Name of current clip CLIP LIST MODE Name of clip list TITLE NORMAL MODE Title of current clip CLIP LIST MODE Title of clip list RECORD DEVICE NORMAL MODE Name of device which recorded current clip CLIP LIST MODE Displays SERIAL NORMAL MODE Serial number of device which recorded current clip CLIP LIST MODE Displays DATE NORMAL MODE Date when current clip was recorded CLIP LIST MODE Date when clip list was created TIME NORMAL MODE Time when current clip was recorded CLIP LIST MODE Time when clip list was created 09 OPTION BOARD SDI OUTPUT Displays installed options Menu List 205 sexipueddy WA About a Memory Stick What is Memory Stick Memory Stick is a new compact portable and versatile IC Integrated Circuit recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds a floppy disk Memory Stick is specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data among Memory Stick compatible products Because it is removable Memory Stick can also
198. djusts itself to the stored value corresponding to the current settings of this switch and the FILTER selector You can use the AUTO W B BAL switch even when ATW P is in use B ATW When this switch is set to B and on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu WHITE B CH is set to ATW ATW is activated 1 ATW Auto Tracing White Balance The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds You can assign the ATW ON OFF function to the ASSIGN 1 switch push button on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu For details see 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 Switches on page 133 TURBO GAIN button When shooting under extremely poor lighting conditions press the button once to boost the video gain to the value preset on the GAIN SW page of the USER menu up to 48 dB To stop boosting the gain press the button once more ASSIGN 3 4 switches You can assign the desired functions to each of the ASSIGN 3 switch and ASSIGN 4 switch on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu For details see 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 Switches on page 133 REMOTE connector VIDEO OUT connector Shooting and recording playback functions 3 2 4 Shoo
199. down to ESCAPE This cancels all changes and returns to the SHOT ID page 7 2 8 Displaying the Status Confirmation Windows You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on the screen by displaying the following three windows e ABNORMAL lt gt window e FUNCTION window e AUDIO STATUS window ABNORMAL lt gt window ABNORMAL lt gt PITT TT IGAIN ON 3dB SHUTTER WHT PRESET ATW RUN EXTENDER IFILTER OVERRIDE 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen This window allows you to confirm why the warning indicator lights You can use the LED page of the USER menu to set whether or not the warning indicator lights FUNCTION window FUNCTION LTT FORMAT I ASSIGN lt 1 gt ATW lt 2 gt OFF lt 3 gt _OFF lt 4 gt OFF lt T gt TURBO ZEBRA OFF SELECT 1 DET 70 APT 10 DET2 100 P CACHE REAR BNC OFF This window allows you to confirm the assigned function of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches ON OFF of the Loop Rec function and ON OFF of the output of the VIDEO OUT connector AUDIO STATUS window AUDIO STATUS TT 16bit DF F MIC MONO CH2 FRONT CH3 FRONT CH2 FRONT CH4 FRONT 40 30 20 10 0 1 2 3 4 This window allows you to confirm the following items related to audio e Audio bit rate e Setting condition of DF NDF only for the PDW 510 530 e Type of front microphone e Type of input signal to au
200. e REMAIN remaining capacity of an internal battery pack or an external battery connected to the DC IN connector DISP DC IN Displayed when the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the DC IN connector DISP 16 9 4 3 ID Displays the 16 9 4 3 mode indicator DISP WRR RF LVL _ Displays the reception level of the wireless microphone DISP TIME CODE _ Displays the time code UO40VUF DISP 1 UVF DISP VF DISP 1 page You can select the following items to be displayed on the screen on the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page VF DISP 1 page DISP REC FORMAT Displays the recording format Item Description VF DISP Turning on or off the viewfinder display 1 VF DISPLAY MODE Selecting the display mode 2 DISP EXTENDER Extender indicator DISP FILTER Types of the ND filter DISP WHITE White balance memory indicator DISP GAIN Gain indicator 1 When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BP GL65 GL95 battery pack is installed the remaining battery power is shown as a percentage value according to the setting of this item INT When one of the above batteries is installed the remaining power is shown as a percentage value when there is a change in the value or when the power is low AUTO The remaining power is shown as a percentage value when one of the above batteries is installed Otherwise the voltage VOLT is displayed continuously VOLT Th
201. e clips You can press the THUMBNAIL button to return to full screen sub clip display without trimming a sub clip 4 2 Creating Clip Lists 5 When the new IN and or OUT points are set hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET dial or MENU knob This carries out the trimming and the screen returns to the sub clip thumbnail display To cancel the trim operation Reset the IN point and the OUT point to return to the state before the sub clip trimming screen was displayed then hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET dial This cancels the trim and the screen returns to the sub clip thumbnail display Save the current clip list to disc See 4 2 6 Saving the Current Clip List to Disc page 77 4 2 4 Deleting a Sub Clip Proceed as follows Carry out steps 1 to 4 in the procedure 4 2 2 Reordering Sub Clips page 74 Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select DELETE and press the dial knob The sub clip deletion screen appears To cancel the deletion and return to the sub clip deletion screen Do either of the following e Select CANCEL and press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob e Press the RESET button The screen returns to the sub clip thumbnail display 3 Tur the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select OK and press the dial knob This deletes the sub clip and the screen returns to the sub clip thumbnail display 4 Save the current clip list to disc
202. e EN55103 2 Electromagnetic Susceptibility Immunity This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic Environment s E1 residential E2 commercial and light industrial E3 urban outdoors and E4 controlled EMC environment ex TV studio For the customers in Europe The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo Japan The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Germany For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents For the customers in Taiwan only SEHA ON 3 4 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 Features is siisccdaniaastacnssttvantnaleaininbanenconnas 7 1 1 1 Principal Differences Between the PDW 510 510P and PDW 530 530P 7 1 1 2 Camera Features cccceceesseceeeees 7 1 1 3 Features of the Optical Disc Drive 0A BI O EAN meron feet arenes 8 1 1 4 Inputs and Outputs eee 9 1 1 5 Other Functions cceeesseeeeeees 10 1 2 Example of System Configuration 11 1 3 Precautions siiseisscisecvascccticwonssercecetennes 12 1 4 MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License P E E E 12 Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 1 Power Supply cecccccseseeeeeeeees 13 2 2 Accessory Attachments 15 2 3 Audio FUNCTIONS cccceeeee
203. e MIC LEVEL control on the front panel F S1 It can be adjusted using either the LEVEL control left side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other REAR2 WRR LEVEL SIDE2 FRONT F S2 SIDE 2 Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel SIDE 2 Adjust it with the LEVEL control right side on the side panel FRONT Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel F S2 It can be adjusted using either the LEVEL control right side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other Menu List 197 sexipueddy Ml 198 No Page 09 TIMECODE 10 VDR MODE Menu List Item Settings Default Description TC OUT AUTO GENE AUTO Selects the time code signal output AUTO Outputs the time code generator output during recording and outputs the time code reader output during playback GENE Outputs the time code generator output during recording and playback DF NDF DF NDF DF Sets DF or NDF mode PDW 510 530 only DF Drop frame mode NDF Non drop frame mode EXT LK DF NDF INT EXT INT Selects either internal setting or external PDW 510 530 only setting for DF NDF INT Internal EXT External EXT LK UBIT INT EXT INT Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup v
204. e from the THUMBNAIL menu and return to the thumbnail screen Press the RESET button 4 With LOCK UNLOCK CLIP selected press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob You return to the thumbnail screen and a lock icon appears on the thumbnail of the selected clip to show that it is locked 3 3 Checking Recording and Playback 65 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey saejdeup MIMI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey E sa deyo WA 66 Lock icon DUR 00 03 10 00 23 AUG 14 30 Locked clips cannot be deleted or renamed Unlock the clip if you want to perform any of these operations To unlock clips Carry out step 2 of Locking Clips to select a locked clip one with the lock icon displayed on its thumbnail then carry out steps 3 and 4 of Locking Clips To lock or unlock clips without displaying the THUMBNAIL menu After carrying out step 2 in the procedure press the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down shortcut operation To lock all clips 1 Carry out steps 1 and 3 of Locking Clips to display the THUMBNAIL menu 2 Turn the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to select LOCK ALL CLIPS and then press the dial or knob A confirmation screen appears To cancel the lock operation and return to the thumbnail screen Do one of the following e With CANCEL selected press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob e Press the RESET button 3 Turn the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to select OK
205. e highlight clip function on reduces the luminance range avoiding problems from the automatic iris correction In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu set the CLIP HIGH LIGHT item to ON Item Setting IRIS VAR WIDTH The width of the window IRIS VAR The height of the window HEIGHT IRIS VAR H POS The position of the window in the horizontal direction IRIS VAR V POS The position of the window in the vertical direction 5 5 Adjusting the Audio Level Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2 You can also adjust the audio level manually For the audio level of the signal to be recorded in audio channels 3 and 4 The input levels for audio channels 3 and 4 are either automatically adjusted or are fixed 5 5 1 Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs From the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 Connectors Proceed as follows to adjust the audio levels of the audio inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors which are to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2 With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector the input from these connectors is automatically selected for audio recording In this case start the operation from step 2 You can turn on and off the XLR connection automatic detection function on the AUDIO 1 page o
206. e holder Tighten the screw 3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector then set the AUDIO IN switch for the desired recording channel to FRONT or F lt S Connect to the MIC IN connector 4 Secure the microphone cable with the cable clamp 9 5 2 Using an External Microphone You can connect up to two external monaural microphones using the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors Switch settings when using an external microphone When using an external microphone make the following switch settings e Set the LINE AES EBU MIC selector to MIC Make the following setting depending on the type of microphone used Using a microphone with an internal power supply set the 48V OFF switch to OFF Using a microphone with an external power supply set the 48V OFF switch to 48V If the XLR connection automatic detection function see next item is off the factory default setting set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switch for the channel to which the microphone is connected to REAR aN 48V OFF switch T 3 m oS J Marg Monaural microphone AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches Using an external microphone not attached to the camcorder XLR connection automatic detection function With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector the input from that connect
207. e or speed return to step 5 Note that only the shutter speeds set to ON can be selected with the SHUTTER selector 7 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen 5 4 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back lit subjects or to prevent blown out highlights The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value e 0 5 about 0 5 stop further open e 1 about 1 stop further open e 0 5 about 0 5 stop further closed e 1 about 1 stop further closed Also you can set the area where light detection occurs Changing the reference value Proceed as follows 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON If this is the first time the USER menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the USER menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 2 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to AUTO IRIS then press the MENU knob to display the AUTO IRIS page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the AUTO IRIS page appears then press the MENU knob to sel
208. e subject When this selector is used with the display mode set to 3 the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds e g FILTER 3 The PDW 510 510P has one switchable filter and the PDW 530 530P has two switchable filters The relationships between the selector settings and filter selections as well as examples of filters for different shooting conditions are as follows 20 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions For the PDW 510 510P FILTER selector setting and filter selection FILTER selector setting Filter selection 1 3200 K 2 5600 K 1 8 ND 3 5600 K 4 5600 K g4 ND Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters Shooting condition Filter Sunrise and sunset inside studio 1 3200 K Clear skies 2 5600 K g ND Cloudy or raining 3 5600 K Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters Filter 4 5600 K g4 ND Shooting condition Very bright conditions such as snow at high altitudes or at the seashore For the PDW 530 530P FILTER selector outer knob setting and CC filter selection FILTER selector outer knob setting CC filter selection A Cross filter 1 B 3200 K C 4300 K D 6300 K 1 A type of special effect filter Generates a cross of light on a highlighted portion FILTER selector inner knob setting and ND filter selection FILTER selector inner knob sett
209. e voltage VOLT is displayed continuously 3 Turm the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to select whether the selected item should appear in the viewfinder display the ON setting or not appear the OFF setting and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark Note that pressing the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST on this page has no effect 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen sBulyjas paylejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sBunes pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WA 5 To set another item to ON or OFF repeat steps 3 and 4 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section 7 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of setting changes and adjustment progress and results by setting a display mode The conditions under which messages are displayed and their correspondence with the display mode are as follows Setting change confirmation adjustment progress messages and display modes Y Message is displayed N Message is not displayed
210. e white video level is too low Either open the lens iris or increase the gain Error message Meaning WHITE NG The color temperature is too high COLOR TEMP HIGH _ Select a suitable filter setting WHITE NG The color temperature is too low COLOR TEMP LOW Select a suitable filter setting WHITE NG Adjustment could not be completed TIME LIMIT within the standard number of attempts WHITE NG The white area could not be POOR WHITE AREA checked WHITE NG The white video level is too high OVER LEVEL Either stop down the lens iris or change the ND filter If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the white balance adjustment If the error message occurs again an internal check is necessary For information about this internal check refer to the Maintenance Manual If you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST The white balance is automatically set as follows depending on the FILTER selector setting e PDW 530 530P B 3200K C 4300 K D 6300K e PDW 510 510P 1 3200 K 3 5600 K For details about setting the white balance manually see To automatically adjust the white balance on page 85 White balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next adjusted There are two sets of white balance memories A and B and adjustments for each of the filters can be automatically stored in the memor
211. eck to be sure that this unit is connected to a network with a network cable 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus The acquired IP address is displayed in the IP ADDRESS line of the NETWORK page If an IP address could not be acquired 0 0 0 0 is displayed In this case contact your network administrator Setting the IP address subnet mask and default gateway The unit is shipped from the factory with the following settings IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 10 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 DEF GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 Proceed as follows to change the settings 1 Carry out steps 1 to 3 in Enabling automatic acquisition of the IP address page 142 to display the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to IP ADDRESS then press the MENU knob The IP ADDRESS setting window appears 3 Move the mark to the value that you want to change then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark 4 Tum the MENU knob to display the desired value then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark To cancel the change and restore the standard setting Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST side For details see 7 1 3 Basic Menu Operations page 115 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set the remaining values 6 When you are finished move the mark to SET then press the MENU knob 7 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SUBNET
212. ect the page OOAUTO IRIS OVERRIDE HIGH LIGHT WINDOW WINDOW IND VAR WIDTH UAR HEIGHT UAR H POS UAR U POS 01 IRIS IRIS S CLIP IRIS IRIS IRIS IRIS IRIS IRIS 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to IRIS OVERRIDE then press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Tum the MENU knob until ON appears then press the MENU knob 5 4 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 91 BulpsooeyY 104 sBules pue s ueujsnipy gJeldeyD HII Bulpsooey 104 sues pue sjuewysnipy g se deyo WA 92 The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a gt mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to ON Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the screen Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not ECS The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off Even if the reference value is changed it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on To open the iris by 0 5 stop Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera One bar L appears in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication To open the iris by
213. eed as follows Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SCENE RECALL and press the MENU knob The POO SCENE RECALL page appears P00 SCENE RECALL DISPLAY MODE MEM lt 1 gt STANDARD MEM lt 2 gt STANDARD MEM lt 3 gt STANDARD MEM lt 4 gt STANDARD MEM lt 5 gt NO FILE Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message RECALL OK YES NO appears ESC ALL P01 SCENE RECALL RECALL OK YES NO DISPLAY MODE 0 SCENE 1 SCENE2 SCENES SFILE LOAD gt MEMI 5 4 To carry out the recall move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving the mark pointing to NO When the loading is completed the message COMPLETE appears The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file If no file is present with a particular file number this is shown as NO FILE 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section Loading scene files from a Memory Stick into the camcorder memory You can load up to five scene files stored in the Memory Stick into the camcorder memory in a single operation 8 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files 151 geq Bunjes 1 sn Bulpeo
214. eeeeeeeeeeee 16 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback PUNCTIONS iiss sesssiccciasiecccstccescnets eens 19 2 5 Output Video Operating Section 26 2 6 Menu Operating Section 27 2 7 Time Code System eeeesseseeees 29 2 8 Warnings and Indications 31 2 9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs peade aaa aada aaa Na aaee iaaiiai aat 32 2 9 1 Monochrome LCD ccceeee 32 2 9 2 Color LDE Dsessirii nsira 33 2 10 Indicators in the Viewfinder 34 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 3 1 Handling DISCS cccceeeeeeeeees 36 3 1 1 Discs Used for Recording and Playback E EE Mentunaiats 36 3 1 2 Notes on Handling eee 36 3 1 3 Write Protecting Discs 0 00 36 3 1 4 Loading and Unloading a Disc 37 3 1 5 Formatting a Disc seeen 38 3 1 6 Handling of Discs When Recording Does Not End Normally Salvage Function h nE 38 3 2 Recording ssssssnnnnneenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 40 Table of Contents 3 2 1 Basic Procedures 40 3 2 2 Deleting Clips casi eas 42 3 2 3 Recording Essence Marks 42 3 2 4 Starting a Shoot With a Few Seconds of Pre Stored Picture Data Picture Cache FUNCTION 0 cccceeessesscceceseeecssesseenees 44 3 2 5 Time Lapse Video Interval Rec FUNCTION snn aena 46 3 2 6 Retaking the Most Recent Clip 51 3 2 7 Auto Clip List Recoding for Automatic Inclusion of Recorded Clips in Clip Lists 3 2 8 Assig
215. eft of IRIS WINDOW IND changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark The currently selected auto iris window appears on the screen If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on the screen set to OFF Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to IRIS WINDOW then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark 5 Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears then press the MENU knob 1 2 3 4 5 6 a The shaded parts indicate the area where light detection occurs Auto iris window The mark on changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark If you select VARIABLE the following items become effective and you can set the window of the desired size Set each item to the desired size 6 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen To counter problems with very bright highlights If the subject is too bright the iris may close too much leaving the overall image dark or the highlights may be blown out In such cases setting th
216. elected connect the VIDEO OUT connector to the SDI IN connector of the video monitor VBS Outputs the analog composite video signal When VBS is selected connector the VIDEO OUT connector to the VIDEO IN connector of the video monitor This setting allows you to save the power 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to REAR BNC OUT SEL and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of REAR BNC OUT SEL changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section To enable DV stream output Proceed as follows 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The TOP menu appears 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus 131 s6um pellejeq pue sAedsiq nuaw J 194dey9 iiil 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OPERATION then press the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to POWER SAVE then press the MENU knob
217. en you interrupted the setting operations will reappear so you can continue making settings 7 Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark The setting is confirmed 8 To continue setting other items in the same page repeat steps from 4 to 7 To cancel a change or return to the standard settings Proceed as follows 1 Before pressing the MENU button in step 7 of the above procedure push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL PRST position Under the page name a message CANCEL DATA OK appears 2 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL PRST position once more A message CANCEL DATA appears to indicate that the change has been cancelled 3 To return to the standard settings push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL PRST position A message PRESET DATA OK appears on the screen 4 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL PRST position once more This returns to the standard settings Depending on the setting item in some cases only the function to return to the standard setting is valid Check this for each individual item To move to another page Proceed as follows T Turn the MENU knob to move the arrow to the page number then press the MENU knob If the mark is placed at a position other than the page number push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE A mark appears in f
218. enu 1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch es to FRONT as follows When using the front microphone input for both channels 1 and 2 Set both AUDIO IN switches to FRONT When using the front microphone input for either channel 1 or 2 Set the AUDIO IN switch for the desired channel to FRONT 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch es for the desired channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 Tur the MIC LEVEL control and adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume e The 10 bars from the bottom among 20 bars go on with the normal input volume e The second top bar may turn on occasionally but do not allow the top bar to go on If it goes on the audio level is too high Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls In the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the front microphone input The correspondence between the controls and the menu items and settings is as follows For fixed settings select OFF The type of audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 does not depend on the XLR connection automatic detection function It is determined only by the switch settings CH 3 F The audio signal from the front microphone is recorded R The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 Fe connector is recorded gt R3 W
219. erent colors on a color video monitor This signal is used to check chrominance functions of color television and video systems such as cameras and monitors Color subcarrier In a composite video signal a signal superimposed upon the picture luminance information for the purpose of conveying the associated color information Color and saturation information is conveyed by the phase and amplitude of the color subcarrier Also called subcarrier Color temperature The temperature in Kelvins K to represent the color of a light source determined by heating a perfectly black body until its color matches that of the light source Color temperature is higher when the color is bluish and lower when reddish Composite video signal A video signal in which luminance and chrominance are combined along with timing reference sync information to make composite video CRT Cathode Ray Tube Video camera viewfinders are equipped with a CRT image display so you can monitor what you are shooting DCC Dynamic Contrast Control A DCC circuit automatically adjusts the knee point according to the amount of incident light A video camera containing a DCC circuit can handle a wide dynamic range of luminance Drop frame mode SMPTE time code runs at 30 frames second while the NTSC color television system runs at about 29 97 frames second Drop frame mode adjusts the running of time code to eliminate the discrepancy between
220. error occurs If the error message STORED DATA NG flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on the black balance and white balance memory contents have been lost Adjust the black balance and white balance again Contact your Sony representative if this message continues to appear even after the black balance and white balance have been adjusted again For details refer to the Maintenance Manual FILTER selector OUTPUT DCC switch CAM WHITE BAL switch A or B 1 GAIN selector Set as low as possible 1 White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH lt B gt item is set to MEM on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu 5 2 2 Adjusting the White Balance To automatically adjust the white balance When you make automatic white balance adjustment the adjustment value obtained is saved in memory Proceed as follows Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure below If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL switch is changed a message reporting the new setting position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen 2 Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions as follows For the PDW 530 530P FILTER selector outer knob setting and CC filter selection FILTER selector outer knob CC filter setting A Cr
221. es including extension may be limited to 21 characters b Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording 6 1 Overview The following directory operations are possible in the General directory e Directory creation up to 64 levels including the General directory e Deletion and renaming of directories e File names and directory names can use letters numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2 0 character set However the following control characters and symbols 1 cannot be used Control characters U 0000 to U 001F U 007F Symbols lt gt 1 This is supported from firmware version 1 4 However the following character codes cannot be used by FAM connections U 010000 U 020000 U 030000 U 040000 U 050000 U 060000 U 070000 U 080000 U 090000 U 0A0000 U 0B0000 U 0C0000 U 0D0000 U 0E0000 U 0F0000 U 100000 There are no limits to characters which can be used by FTP connections 6 2 File Access Mode File Operations File access mode operating environment Operating system requirements for file operations by file access mode called FAM below are as follows e Computer operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or higher or Microsoft Windows XP Preparations Do the following on the remote computer and this unit e Install the FAM driver on the remote computer e Enable FAM connections over the i LINK connector To install the FAM d
222. esentative MEM Full seve 2 seve 2 o o o 2 Shockproo Recording Protect the unit from i l f memory continuous but shocks and vibration overflow may be substandard ILL REC w 2 sere 2 o o 2 Input sync Recording Turn off the power error continuous but and contact your may be Sony service substandard representative This indication may be given momentarily when a GENLOCK signal is connected or disconnected but this does not indicate a problem Disc Error sey 2 w 2 ej o o 2 A disc Recording If defects are defect was continues detected repeatedly detected avoidingthe exchange the disc defect but may be substandard HUMID Continuous xy 2 sexe 2 oj ey 2 Condensa Recording Stop recording tion on the playback playback turn off the eyo optical continues but power then turn it on pickup stops when an again and wait until error occurs the HUMID indicator on the drive disappears Before DISC Flashing 2 se DD 2 Disc Operation Be prepared to Full 8 almost full continues change the disc DISC DISC and Flashing 5 xt 6 Sex 6 ey 6 Disc full Recording Change the disc FULL E stops LOW BATT Flashing w se 7 w ey 7 Battery Operation Change the battery BATT almost continues 5 exhausted BATT BATT and Flashing 3 Set x ADD Battery Operation Change the battery EMPTY JE exhausted stops
223. ess and other network setting items for this unit For details see 7 3 11 Making Network Settings page 141 If network settings have already been made Check the IP address of this unit 3 Set the remote control switch to NETWORK 6 3 1 Making FTP connections FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer can be made with either of the following e The command prompt e FTP client software This section explains how to use the command prompt For more information about using FTP client software refer to 6 3 FTP File Operations the documentation of the FTP client software on your system To log in If this unit is connected to a remote computer with a FAM connection first exit file operations on the FAM connection see page 105 T Load a disc into this unit and put the unit into the following state Recording playback serch and other disc operations Stopped Thumbnail indicator see page 26 Off Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function Off MENU ON OFF switch OFF LIVE LOGGING see page 57 OFF Unsaved current clip list Save or clear Login is not possible unless the unit is in the state described above 2 Start the command prompt 3 Enter ftp lt SP gt lt IP address gt and press the Enter key lt SP gt refers to a space For example if the IP address of this unit is set to 192 168 001 010 enter ftp 192 168 1 10 Refer to the Windows help
224. ess the MENU knob If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the MAINTENANCE menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 5 if the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to ESSENCE MARK then press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the ESSENCE MARK page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page 6 Press the MENU knob then turn it to move the mark to INDEX PIC POS and press the MENU knob again The mark changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark M1QOESSENCE MARK SHOT MARK 1 SHOT MARK 2 A pea AUDIO LIMIT AIN CHG MARK FILTER CHG MARK SHUTTER CHG MARK WHITE CHG MARK FLASH MARK FLASH MARK LEVEL INDEX PIC POS Turn the MENU knob to select the desired time Press the MENU knob The selection is confirmed Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF to end the menu operation 5 7 Setting the Thumbnail Image 99 BulpsooeyY 104 sues pue s ueujsnipy gs JeldeyD HII 100 File Operations chapter 6 1 Overview A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data files such as video and audio data files There are two way to connect a remote computer e FAM connection Connect the S400 i LINK connector on this unit to
225. essed equals the Picture Cache time However if you start recording within the Picture Cache time immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback or recording review the picture data for the duration of the Picture Cache time will not be stored in memory Thus the time disc access stops after the STOP button is pressed becomes shorter than the Picture Cache time In Picture Cache mode you cannot set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET to make time code settings To make time code settings first exit Picture Cache mode 3 2 Recording 45 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup MMIII yoeghe q pue Bulpiovey Ja deyo HANK 46 When power is lost during recording e When the power is turned off during recording the camcorder will switch itself off after disc access has continued for a few seconds to record the picture in the instant of power off If you remove the battery pull out the DC cable or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording video and audio stored in memory will be lost without being recorded to the disc For this reason make sure you do not change the battery while recording 3 2 5 Time Lapse Video Interval Rec Function Using the memory in the camcorder you can capture time lapse video There are two modes for this function which is known as Interval Rec Auto Interval Rec mode In Auto Interval Rec mode pictures are automatically shot a frame
226. ever up and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount 2 Align the center slot in the lens mount with the center pin on the lens and insert the lens into the mount 3 Holding the lens in place push the lens locking lever down to mount the lens If the lens is not firmly locked it may come off while the camcorder is being used This could cause a serious accident Make sure the lens is firmly locked It is recommended that the lens mount securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as illustrated above 4 Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector 5 Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps 9 3 Mounting the Lens 159 Japioowey ou dN Bumes 6 Ja deyo III Jepiooweg y dn Humes 6 se deyo WA 160 9 4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle adjust the flange focal length the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane Make this adjustment after mounting or changing the lens Adjusting the flange focal length The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens Check the identification of the various controls in the lens manual ee About 3 m 10 ft Adjusting the flange focal length 1 Set the iris to manual 2 Open the iris Place the flange focal length adjustment chart about 3 m 10 ft away from the camera lit well enough
227. f the MAINTENANCE menu MIC LEVEL control Manual adjustment of the audio levels of channels 1 and 2 5 5 Adjusting the Audio Level 93 BulpsooeyY 104 sues pue s ueusnipy gJeldeyD HII Bulpsooey 104 sues pue sjuewisnipy S se deyo WA 94 1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2 connector set the AUDIO IN CH 1 or AUDIO IN CH 2 switch to REAR To adjust both input signals set both switches to REAR 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch es corresponding to the channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 With the LEVEL control for the channel selected in step 1 adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume The second bar from the top may turn on occasionally but do not allow the top bar 0 dB to go on If it goes on the audio level is too high All bars go on m E3 These bars go on 23 4 Normal input level Excessive input level TEE EEE QOOO0o00dd Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls In the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the input to each of the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors The correspondence between the controls and the menu items and settings is as follows Level to be Control Menu item Setting adjusted Channel 1 LEVE
228. factory default selection is 16bit Proceed as follows 1 Display the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Turn the MENU knob to display the desired format and press the MENU knob Move the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF This ends the menu operation The above procedure completes the setting of the recording format 5 1 Setting the Recording Format PDW 530 530P Only 83 BulpsooeyY 104 sues pue s ueujsnipy gs JeldeyD HII Bulpsooey 104 sBumes pue sjuewisnipy g se deyo WA 84 5 2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted Black balance adjustment The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases e When the camcorder is used for the first time e When the camcorder has not been used for a long time e When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly e When the GAIN selector L M H values have been changed by using the USER menu Itis not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off White balance adjustment Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change Viewfinder screen displays If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started messages that report on the progress and results are displayed on t
229. flash second while the camcorder is in this mode Also TAKE TOTAL TIME REC TIME and PRE LIGHTING appear O30FUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt REC TIME PRE LIGHTING Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to TAKE TOTAL TIME see Time required for shooting and time required for recording on the disc page 48 O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of TAKE TOTAL TIME changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 10 Turn the MENU knob until the desired setting of TAKE TOTAL TIME appears As you turn the MENU knob the setting of TAKE TOTAL TIME changes in the following sequence 5MIN gt 10MIN gt 15MIN gt 20MIN gt 30MIN gt 40MIN lt gt 50MIN gt 1H gt 2H gt 3H gt 4H gt 5H gt 7H gt 10H gt 15H gt 20H gt 30H gt 40H lt gt 50H gt 70H lt gt 100H Here MIN means minutes 5MIN is 5 minutes and H means hours 1H is one hour 1 1 Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 1 2Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to REC TIME OSOFUNCTIONI
230. for selecting the shutter speed and shutter Shutter Shutter speed Application mode EVS Shutter speed currently Improved Enhanced selected in the Standard or vertical Vertical ECS mode resolution definition However the System sensitivity and dynamic range are reduced mode 5 3 1 Shutter Modes The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below Selectable shutter modes and shutter speeds Shutter mode Standard Shutter speed PDW 510 530 PDW 510P 530P Scan Mode 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec Scan Mode PsF 1 40 1 60 1 120 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec Scan Mode 24P 1 32 1 48 1 96 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec Scan Mode 1 60 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec Scan Mode PsF 1 33 1 50 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec Application For shooting fast moving subjects with little blurring ECS Extended Clear Scan PDW 510 530 Scan Mode 60 0 to 6000 Hz Scan Mode PsF 30 0 to 7000 Hz Scan Mode 24P 1 24 0 Hz to 5000 Hz PDW 510P 530P Scan Mode 50 0 to 6000 Hz Scan Mode PsF 25 0 to 6000 Hz For obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor screens SLS slow speed shutter 1 1 30 sec for PDW 510 530
231. g the User Bits ee 96 5 6 4 Synchronizing the Time Code 97 5 7 Setting the Thumbnail Image 99 Chapter 6 File Operations 6 1 Overview ssssssssssssennsennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 100 6 1 1 Directory Structure oo eee 100 6 1 2 File Operation Restrictions 101 6 2 File Access Mode File Operations 103 6 2 1 Making FAM connections 104 6 2 2 Operating on files eese 104 6 2 3 Exiting file operations 105 6 2 4 Reconnecting eeeeeeeseeesteeeeeeeees 105 6 3 FTP File Operations 00 106 6 3 1 Making FTP connections 106 6 3 2 Command List sses 107 6 4 Recording Continuous Time Code With FAM and FTP Connectione 113 Chapter 7 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 7 1 Menu Organization and Operation 114 7 1 1 Menu Organization eee 114 7 1 2 Displaying Menus 115 7 1 3 Basic Menu Operations 115 7 1 4 Editing the USER Menu 117 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder SCLOGSIN ditucscdeavicavieacsedindsiverstnsivescute 121 7 2 1 Layout of the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen eccere 121 7 2 2 Selecting the Display Items 123 7 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress MSS ABS Siceccs n hrn nnn 124 7 2 4 Setting the Marker Display 124 7 2 5 Setting the Viewfinder 125 7 2 6 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the
232. ge is set to OTHER 2 The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of END 3 when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER 3 This is supported from firmware version 1 4 4 When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to AUTO any batteries other than Sony BP series batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent battery systems are classified as Others 5 Flashes once per second when the battery status is BEFORE END and flashes 4 times per second when the battery status is END 6 This is supported from firmware version 1 5 Menu List 201 sexipueddy WA 202 FILE Menu List The following table lists and describes the items in the FILE menu When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses _ the setup value is a relative value The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual Menu List F ID 16 characters No Page Item Settings Default Description 01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD EXEC See 8 1 Saving and Loading User Files to and USER FILE SAVE EXEC from a Memory Stick on page 144 F ID 16 characters USER PRESET EXEC See 7 4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings on page 143 02 USER FILE2 STORE USR PRESET EXEC Sets the pages registered in the USER menu to the standard setting C
233. ght is reproduced as a truly white image See also Color temperature White shading When shooting a white object the upper and lower portions of the screen may appear magenta or green while the central portion appears white depending on the performance Glossary of the camera lens This is called white shading Zebra pattern In a video camera striped patterns which appear in the viewfinder screen to indicate areas of the image where the video level is higher than a certain value If a zebra pattern appears on the skin when the object is a human being that is a correct exposure Zoom To gradually change the field of view of a camera lens from wide to narrow angle zoom in or narrow to wide angle zoom out Index A AC adaptor 155 ACCESS indicator 32 Access indicator for Memory Stick 28 Accessory attachments 15 Adjusting audio level 93 black balance 84 flange focal length 160 shoulder pad position 166 viewfinder 156 white balance 85 Adjustments and settings for recording 82 from menus 130 ALARM volume control 17 ALL FILE page 202 Anton Bauer Ultralight system 155 Aspect ratio selecting 136 ASSIGN 1 2 switches 21 ASSIGN 3 4 switches 22 Assigning functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches 133 Attaching the shoulder strap 166 Audio functions 16 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors 18 AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches 18 AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches 18 Audio input system 160 attaching a UHF portable tuner 162
234. he CBK SDO1 SDI Output Board is installed you can connect a color video monitor provided with an SDI input connector PDW 510 510P 530 530P Color video monitor VIDEO IN connector SDI IN connector 2 1 When VBS is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO OUT connector 2 When SDI is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO OUT connector only when the CBK SD01 is installed Color playback You can select either VBS or SDI as the output signal of the VIDEO OUT connector when the CBK SDOI1 is installed For details see 7 3 2 Selecting the Output Signals on page 131 3 3 Checking Recording and Playback 3 3 4 Thumbnail Search Cuing up a desired clip To display the thumbnail images of all clips on the disc and cue up a desired clip proceed as follows 2 3 Thumbnail Je indicator SUBCLIP Sub clip o indicator cu MENU PRESET FRUN REGEN SET Moe R RUN With the sub clip indicator off press the THUMBNAIL button turning on the thumbnail indicator The thumbnails of all clips on the disc appear If the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON set it to OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button If you set the MENU ON OFF to ON during thumbnail display thumbnail display is cancelled and replaced with menu display Sixth clip is selected from Name of currently selected clip
235. he MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark confirming the setting 6 To continue with other settings repeat steps 3 and 4 To return to the previous page Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to ESC at the right top of the window and press the MENU knob Alternatively push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side To end the menu operation Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section Operation of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches when UA01 to UA10 are assigned When an on off switchable function or menu item is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches each time the switch is pressed toggles the function on or off When another type of menu item is assigned pressing the switch displays the item and its setting value on the viewfinder screen You can then change the setting by pressing and turning the MENU knob The viewfinder screen display disappears approximately three seconds after the last operation 7 3 6 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock You can set or change the date and time of the internal clock The date and time set are reflected in the time code Proceed as follows 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to DIAGNOSIS and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the DIAGNOSIS menu has
236. he black balance and white balance to stopping recording Switch settings After turning on the power and loading a disc set the switches and selectors as shown below and begin operation DISPLAY ON AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 AUTO Iris Automatic Zoom Automatic OUTPUT DCC CAM DCC ON F RUN SET R RUN F RUN or R RUN set as needed Switch and selector settings before shooting Shooting Proceed as follows Basic procedure for shooting from adjusting the black balance and white balance to stopping recording T Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the black balance For details of black balance adjustment see 5 2 1 Adjusting the Black Balance on page 84 Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting conditions and adjust the white balance When the white balance settings are already in memory Set the WHITE BAL switch to A or B When the white balance setting is not in memory and you do not have enough time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST This automatically adjusts the white balance as follows depending on the setting of the FILTER knob e For the PDW 530 530P B 3200 K C 4300 K D 6300 K e For the PDW 510 510P 1 3200 K 3 5600 K For details see 5 2 2 Adjusting the White Balance on page 85 Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and zoom If necessary set the electronic shutter for an
237. he camcorder is operated in this state recording and playback may not be performed properly Do the following to prevent this from happening e When you move or operate the camcorder in an environment where condensation may form be sure to load a disc in advance and close the disc compartment lid Whenever you turn on the power check that the HUMID indicator does not appear on the color LCD If it appears wait until it disappears before loading a disc For details see 3 1 4 Loading and Unloading a Disc on page 37 and 10 3 Operation Warnings on page 174 10 1 2 Testing the Camera Set the switches and selectors as follows Zoom SERVO MAN VDR SAVE STBY SAVE WHITE BAL A or B GAIN Set as low as possible OUTPUT DCC BARS 10 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting 1 69 eoueualule OL Ja deyo HA Testing the viewfinder Proceed as follows 1 Adjust the position of the viewfinder 2 Check that the color bars are displayed on the viewfinder screen and adjust the BRIGHT CONTRAST and PEAKING controls to give the best color bar display 3 Check each of the following operations The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page changes to the next page Press the MENU knob and check that settings of each item of the selected page are displayed Turn the MENU knob and check that the mark moves within the page Press the MENU knob and chec
238. he example shown in step 3 MEM 3 is not overwritten 8 2 3 Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder to the Standard Settings Saved in the Reference File You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the settings saved in the reference file standard settings 8 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files For details about the items in the reference file refer to the Maintenance Manual On the SCENE FILE page see page 151 turn the MENU knob to move the mark to STANDARD and press the MENU knob FO40OSCENE FILE SCENE 25 SCENE oS ESTANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE F ID SCENE21 D EXEC EXEC The O displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to W When W changes to D the settings of the camcorder are reset to the settings saved in the reference file If you press the MENU knob again while W is displayed the operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD was selected 8 3 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick A Memory Stick enables you to save user files scene files lens files reference files and ALL files The camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so that when a Memory Stick holding these files is inserted while in menu operating mode a menu page relating to the desired file is automatically displayed on the screen Thus you can proceed to file operation quickly This is very c
239. he master gamma correction curve in steps MASTER GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the master gamma correction curve R GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the R gamma correction curve G GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the G gamma correction curve B GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the B gamma correction curve TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector GAMMA SELECT STD FILM STD Selects the gamma table GAMMA SEL STD 1to6 3 Selects the gamma table of STD GAMMA SEL FILM 1to5 1 Selects the gamma table of FILM 05 BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA OFF ON OFF Turns the black gamma correction on or off BLACK GAM RANGE LOW L MID HIGH Sets the range affected by black gamma H MID HIGH MASTER BLK 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the master black gamma GAMMA R BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the correction curve of the R black gamma G BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the correction curve of the G black gamma B BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the correction curve of the B black gamma TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector 06 KNEE KNEE OFF ON ON Turns the knee correction circuit on or off KNEE POINT 50 to 109 85 0 Sets the knee point level KNEE SLOPE 99 to 99 0 Set the knee slope level KNEE SATURATION OFF ON ON Turns the knee saturation function on or off KNEE SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the knee saturation level WHITE CLIP OFF ON ON Turns the white clipping function on or off WHITE CLIP LEVEL
240. he one on the camcorder the switch position on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote control unit Also it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect before you connect the remote control unit In this case you should set the control knob to the relative value mode on the remote control unit For details refer to the operation manual supplied with the remote control unit Maintenance chapter 10 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting session preferably by operating the camcorder together with a color video monitor 10 1 1 Preparations for Testing Attacha fully charged battery pack 2 Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the HUMID indicator does not appear and that the BATT indicator shows at least five segments e If the HUMID indicator appears wait until it disappears If the BATT indicator does not show at least five segments replace the battery pack with a fully charged one 3 Check that there are no obstructions near the disc compartment and then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid 4 After confirming that the disc is not write protected load the disc and close the disc compartment lid Condensation If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a warm place or use it ina damp location condensation may form on the optical pickup Then if t
241. he remote control unit was used are recalled Settings of the absolute value control knobs D and absolute value switches are overwritten by those on the remote control unit after the remote control unit is connected 1 Absolute value control knob The data corresponding to the rotation degree position of the control knobs is output The data corresponding to the rotation amount is called the relative value control knob 2 Absolute value switch Like the toggle switches or slide switches except the momentary switches the switches or controls whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches When the remote control unit is removed from the camcorder the independent data region becomes effective Thus the camcorder will return to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected When RM COMMON MEMORY is set to ON on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can use settings of the paint adjustment data stored in the independent data region even if you connect the remote control unit In this case the settings stored in the 9 9 Connecting the Remote Control Unit independent data region will be renewed when you change the settings on the remote control unit Thus the settings of the paint data made with the remote control unit can be retained even if the remote control unit is removed However if the switch position on the remote control unit differs from t
242. he viewfinder screen when the VF DISP MODE item is set to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off OUTPUT DCC switch AUTO W B BAL switch 5 2 1 Adjusting the Black Balance In automatic black balance mode adjustments are performed in the following order clamp level black set and black balance Manual black balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu For details of manual black balance adjustment refer to the Maintenance Manual 5 2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance To adjust the black balance proceed as follows Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM 2 Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK and release the switch The switch returns to the center position and the adjustment is executed During adjustment the following message is displayed on the viewfinder screen The messages change in the following sequence BLACK SET BLACK BALANCE ABB EXECUTING BLACK SET The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds with the message ABB OK and the adjustment value is automatically stored in memory During the black balance adjustment the iris is automatically closed e During the black balance adjustment the gain selecti
243. his manual could void your authority to operate this equipment All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules For the customers in the USA Lamp in this product contains mercury Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal or recycling information please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance www eiae org For the customers in the USA and Canada RECYCLING LITHIUM ION BATTERIES Lithium lon batteries are recyclable You can help preserve our environment by returning your used rechargeable batteries to the collection and recycling location nearest you For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable batteries call toll free 1 800 822 8837 or visit http Awww rbrc org Caution Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium ion batteries For the State of California USA only Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Perchlorate Material Lithium battery contains perchlorate For the customers in Europe This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC Directive issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the following European standards e EN55103 1 Electromagnetic Interference Emission
244. hronize the user bits with external user bit data For details refer to the Maintenance Manual To release the time code synchronization First disconnect the external time code then set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN To change the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during time code synchronization To maintain a continuous power supply connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack You may lose time code synchronization if you remove the battery pack first Camera synchronization during time code synchronization During time code synchronization the camera is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector 5 7 Setting the Thumbnail Image When the unit is shipped from the factory it is set up to display the first frame of a clip as the clip s thumbnail image see page 62 As required you can select another frame to display as a clip s thumbnail image For example if all clips have the same image in their first frames you can specify a frame a few seconds after the start of the clip so that all thumbnails will not show the same image To select the frame to display as a clip s thumbnail image Proceed as follows 1 Turn the POWER switch on 2 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The TOP menu appears 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE 4 Pr
245. ights when the HOLD button is pressed 1 When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the time code value the time code is displayed in the format shown below When the HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold the time code is displayed in the normal format De ee a a ri LALLA LNLS LILA LI 2 9 2 Color LCD Disc status battery status and audio level Time code display on the monochrome LCD Disc status indicator Full capacity is available Em DISC Close to full state DISC flashes Full disc must be replaced DISC and E flash Formats of video and audio signals to be redorded PB NDF EXT LK HOLD H j MIN SEC FRM WARNING HUMID 1B BATT EL mmememm F Battery status indicator Fully charged po p mmm 1 F Nearly dead BATT flashes Dead battery battery must be charged BATT and E flash Display of remaining disc capacity remaining battery capacity and audio levels on the color LCD 2 9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs 33 S 01 UO0Q pUe SEd JO suonouny pue suoneoogq zg 3 deyg HII S 01 U09 pue Sued JO SUOROUNJ pue suoyeooq Z Je deyD HAIN 34 VDR operation status and status indicators IMX50 24P 24bit PB NDF EXT LK HOLD 01 23 45 19 MIN SEC FRM WARNING HUMID DISC EL m 8 BATT E Sm8m8 F 30 m 40 m m on 2reK TEE EEERERERRRRR REE ST TTT Warning display a
246. ignals from external equipment 67 Recording and playback 36 Recording format setting the audio recording format 83 setting the video recording format 82 Recording review 62 REFERENCE page 203 Remaining memory 60 REMOTE connector 23 Remote control unit connecting 167 RESET button 30 Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings 143 Retaking 51 Return video signal 129 RM B150 B750 167 ROM VERSION 1 page 204 ROM VERSION 2 page 204 S Salvage function 38 Saving and loading scene files 148 user files to and from a Memory Stick 144 user setting data 144 Scene file loading 151 resetting the settings to the standard settings 152 saving and loading 148 SCENE FILE page 192 202 Scene selection 70 SEL SET dial 26 Selecting aspect ratio 136 shutter mode 88 shutter speed 88 SET STATUS page 185 Setting CCD scan mode 138 date time of the internal clock 135 recording format 82 time data 96 Setting up the camcorder 154 SHIFT button 26 Shooting basic procedure from adjusting the black balance and white balance to stopping recording 40 basic procedure from turning on the camcorder to loading a disc 40 testing the camcorder before shooting 169 Shooting and recording playback functions 19 SHOT DISP page 185 Shot ID 127 SHOT ID page 185 Shoulder pad 15 Shoulder pad adjusting the position 166 Shoulder strap posts 15 Shoulder strap attaching 166 SHT ENABLE page 185 Shutter mode selecting 88 SHUTTER sele
247. inder Screen All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown below PDW 530 30001 04 02 25 12 10 LEVEL TOO HIGH O and appear only when color bars are displayed Status display on the viewfinder Extender EX is displayed when a lens extender is used Zoom position This indicator appears only when you use a lens that has a zoom position display function It indicates the approximate position of the variator of the zoom lens between wide angle and telephoto 1 Variator A group of lenses that are moved to adjust the focal length Color temperature This indicates the currently selected color temperature UHF wireless microphone reception level This indicates reception level of the wireless microphone when the UHF wireless microphone is attached using four Mi which appear at the right of W When four W are lit the receiving condition is good DC IN battery voltage or remaining capacity This shows the battery voltage or remaining capacity of an internal battery pack When the power is supplied from an AC adaptor connected to the DC IN connector DC IN appears When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to INT on the VF DISP 2 page of the USER menu the battery voltage is not indicated However when the Anton Bauer intelligent battery system or the BP GL65 GL95 battery pack is used the remaining bat
248. indow above Enter the 4 byte alphanumeric strings for user identification The user code is registered with each organization locally It is usually not centrally registered When the user code is less than 4 bytes enter the user code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space character 20h in the remaining strings This user code is determined by the organization The methods used depend on the organization User bits cannot be entered when no organization code has been entered TIME ZONE When you select this item the TIME ZONE window appears The UTC is calculated based on the local time using the time zone If the time zone is not set the UTC is not recorded correctly TIME ZONE ESC GREENWICH AZORES M ATRANTIC ARZENTINE DENVER LOSANGELES ALASKA Set the time difference from UTC When setting the summer time or daylight savings time change the code to one which will advance the time by 1 hour When you change the time zone adjust the built in clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and then the power on again 7 3 11 Making Network Settings The NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu allows you to make settings for connections to other DV devices via a network 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus 141 sBulyjeas paylejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sBunjes pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WN Enabling automatic acquisition of the IP add
249. ineering Society and EBU European Broadcasting Union for serial transmission of digital audio Two channels of audio can be transmitted via a single connector Aliasing Distortion which occurs during sampling to convert analog signals to digital ATW Auto Tracing White balance The white balance is automatically adjusted for the lighting conditions during shooting Bayonet mount A type of lens mount The lens can be inserted into the lens mount and quickly locked in place by simply rotating the lens locking ring Black balance adjustment To balance the black levels of the R G and B channels of a video camera so that black has no color Black set A reference level for black balance adjustment CCD Charge Coupled Device A solid state imager used in most video cameras in place of a pickup tube The device converts input light levels into electrical charges that are first stored and then output in the form of voltage variations Center marker A cross which indicates the center of the image on the viewfinder screen Clip A recording unit Clips are created every time recording starts and stops Clip list A list of locations in the material recorded on the disc arranged in any order Clip lists can be created with Glossary the scene selection function of this unit and with the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software Color bar signal A test signal which can be displayed as vertical bars of diff
250. ing ND filter selection 1 Clear 2 1 4 ND 3 116 ND 4 1 64 ND Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters Shooting condition CC filter ND filter Sunrise and sunset inside B 3200 K 1 clear studio Clear skies C 4300 K or 2 1 4 ND or 3 D 6300 K 46 ND Cloudy or raining D 6300 K 1 clear or 2 1 4 ND Very bright conditions such C 4300 K or 3 1 16 ND or as snow at high altitudes D 6300 K 4 1 64 ND or at the seashore ASSIGN 1 2 switches You can assign the desired functions to each of the ASSIGN 1 switch push button and ASSIGN 2 switch sliding on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu For details see 7 3 5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 Switches on page 133 SHUTTER selector Set this selector to ON to use the electronic shutter Push it down to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or mode setting within the range previously set with the setup menu When this selector is operated the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area for about 3 seconds For details about the shutter speed and mode settings see 5 3 Setting the Electronic Shutter on page 88 AUTO W B BAL automatic white black balance adjustment switch This switch activates the white balance and black balance automatic adjustment functions WHITE Automatic adjustment of the white balance If the WHITE BAL switch is set to
251. ing recording Use this setting to have a consecutive time code on the disc For details see 5 6 3 Setting the User Bits on page 96 and 5 6 1 Setting the Time Code on page 96 2 8 Warnings and Indications Besides the viewfinder speaker and earphones the indicators and displays described in this section also Tally indicator DISPLAY switch TALLY switch DISP SEL switch Rear tally indicator LCD switch provide you with information such as the operating state of the camcorder and warnings Back tally indicator Back tally switch Color LCD i WARNING indicator Le ACCESS indicator Warning and Tally indicator Setting the TALLY switch on the viewfinder to HIGH or LOW enables this indicator It lights when the VDR starts recording Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder it also flashes to provide warnings The brightness of this indicator when it is lit can be switched with the TALLY switch DISPLAY switch This switches the indications on the viewfinder screen on or off ON The indications appear on the viewfinder screen OFF The indications do not appear on the viewfinder screen indication functions Setting the MENU ON OFF switch to ON displays the menu on the viewfinder screen even if the DISPLAY switch is set to OFF TALLY switch This switch controls the tally indicator as follows HIGH The tally i
252. ings e Switch function assignment e Memory Stick operations 1 1 Features You can also assign any settings to the USER menu to create customized menus Saving and recalling settings in a Memory Stick Using an optional Memory Stick D you can save menu settings for particular shooting conditions for recall as required 1 Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation High functionality viewfinder The 2 inch monochrome viewfinder allows accurate focusing The switch settings automatic black balance and white balance items status warnings and so on appear on the viewfinder screen 1 1 3 Features of the Optical Disc Drive VDR Recording and playback in clip units Each time you start and stop recording this creates an independent clip During recording material is always written to unused parts of the disc Therefore even when playing back between shooting sessions there is no danger of inadvertently overwriting the previous recording Immediately after recording you can delete clips you decide not to keep allowing efficient use of the available disc capacity During playback you can check the recorded video and audio by viewing thumbnail images of clips on the disc and jumping instantly to the first frames of other clips The i LINK FAM File Access Mode function allows you to transfer clip files by connecting a computer or by connecting the unit to a network with the CB
253. is installed you can record the external analog composite video signal input to this connector For details see 3 4 Recording Video Signals From External Equipment on page 67 2 7 Time Code System 29 g 04JUOD puke SEd JO SuONOUNY pue suoneoogq Zz JeldeuD HII S 01 U09 pue S Jeq JO SUO JOUNJ pue sUOI 2007 Z Je deyD HAIN DISPLAY switch SEL SET dial RESET button Co p To HOLD button THUMBNAIL LEVEL SEL SET TIR o ia e DI X27 crs ome oN 0 ESSENCE MARK SUB CLIP nel Ok cup MENU SH F R w Time code functions 2 DISPLAY switch This cycles the data displayed in the counter display through the sequence COUNTER TC and U BIT COUNTER Display the elapsed recording playback time hours minutes seconds frames TC Display time code U BIT Display user bit data For details see Time code display on page 34 O RESET button Pressing this button resets the time data displayed on the counter display section to 00 00 00 00 or the user bit data to 00000000 HOLD display hold button Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the counter display section The time code generator continues running Pressing this button again releases the hold You can use this button for example to determine the exact time of a particular shot When the HOLD button
254. is phenomenon is not a malfunction Such pixels have no effect on the recorded data and the unit may be used with confidence even if they are present 1 3 Precautions 1 4 MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License 1 4 MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License This product is licensed under the MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License For the personal and non commercial use of a consumer for i encoding video in compliance with the MPEG 4 Visual Standard MPEG 4 Video and or ii decoding MPEG 4 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non commercial activity and or was obtained from a video provider licensed by MPEG LA to provide MPEG 4 Video No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use Additional information including that relating to promotional internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained from MPEG LA LLC See http vww mpegla com Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls chapter 2 1 Power Supply LIGHT switch Battery attachment Attach a BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S battery pack Furthermore by attaching an AC DN10 AC Adaptor you can operate the camcorder from AC power For your safety and to ensure proper operation of the unit Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs BP GL65 BP GL95 BP L60S and BP L80S DC IN connector XLR type 4 pin male To operate the camcorder using an AC power supply connect an AC
255. is supplied as standard equipment By changing the connector service component replacement a stereo microphone can be fitted The optional slot in type WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit can be installed in the unit The two AUDIO IN connectors XLR type 3 pin on the rear panel of the unit can be switched to line input microphone input or 48V external power and also to AES EBU digital audio inputs maximum 24 bits When audio cables are connected to the two AUDIO IN connectors XLR type 3 pin on the rear panel of the unit an automatic detection function forces the recording of the audio input signals from these connectors as channels 1 and 2 The AUDIO OUT connectors XLR type 5 pin provide two channels of audio output i LINK connector The i LINK connector of this unit supports the following two functions Input and output of DV streams AV C Audio Video Control mode DV streams can be output from this unit and recorded on standard DV equipment In the same way the output from external DV devices VTRs nonlinear editors etc can be input to this unit and recorded on Professional Discs DV compliant nonlinear editors may also be connected 1 In the case of the PDW 530 530P DV stream output is also possible when the unit is set to IMX recording mode Audio data is recorded after conversion according to the specifications of this unit 2 In the case of the PDW 530 530P this is possible
256. is unit or an explanation of the specified command The following data is transferred depending on whether a command name is specified with lt command name gt e Command name specified Explanation of the specified command e No specification Command list Input example HELP RETR NOOP Does nothing except return a response NOOP lt CRLF gt Used to check whether this unit is running PWD Displays the current directory if the PWD lt CRLF gt directory is the root directory CWD Changes the current directory moves CWD lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt from the current directory to another directory Moves to a directory as follows depending on whether a directory is specified with lt path name gt e Directory specified To the specified directory e No specification To the root directory Input example CWD General CDUP Moves one level up in the directory CDUP lt CRLF gt 6 3 FTP File Operations structure makes the parent of the current directory be the current directory Command name Description MKD Creates a new directory Directories can be created only in the General directory For details see 6 1 2 File Operation Restrictions page 101 Command syntax MKD lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt RMD Deletes a directory Directories can be deleted only in the General directory For details see 6 1 2 File Operation Restrictions page 101 RM
257. it 300 CL OVER DUR The total duration of sub clips in the current clip list is over the upper limit 24 hours FAN Stopped The main unit or drive fan has stopped DR FAN Stop Avoid use under high temperatures turn off the power and contact a Sony service representative MEM REC NG only when CBK PC01 is installed Proxy data recording failed because the memory card ran out of memory Exchange the memory card and copy the proxy data that could not be recorded 1 indicates the bit rate 50 40 30 2 REC INHI appears if you attempt to start recording 10 3 Operation Warnings Phenomena specific to CCD image sensors The following phenomena that may appear in images are specific to CCD Charge Coupled Device image sensors They do not indicate malfunctions White flecks Although the CCD image sensors are produced with high precision technologies fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases caused by cosmic rays etc This is related to the principle of CCD image sensors and is not a malfunction The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases e when operating at a high environmental temperature e when you have raised the master gain sensitivity e when operating in Slow Shutter mode This product has a compensation function and the problem may be alleviated by automatic black balance adjustment see page 84 Vertical smear When
258. itches on page 133 You can change the Picture Cache mode menu settings while recording any changes that you make however do not take effect until after the recording operation is completed In Picture Cache mode the internal time code generator operating mode is always F RUN regardless of the setting of the FFRUN SET R RUN switch Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode The recording procedure in Picture Cache time is basically the same as that for normal recording However note the following differences e When you record in Picture Cache mode the picture you are shooting now is recorded to disc after the picture data stored in memory equal to the Picture Cache time is recorded to disc For this reason disc access may continue for a short time after you press the REC START button to stop recording During this time the playback control buttons are disabled as in recording mode Also if you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during this time a separate clip is recorded When you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during disc access the start point of the recorded clip may be later than the Picture Cache time especially when there are a large number of clips recorded on the disc In Picture Cache mode you should avoid stop and start recording operations in quick succession The time disc access stops after the REC START button is pr
259. jected which allows playback to start at that position whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the disc is set to REC INH 3 3 1 Normal Playback By pressing the PLAY PAUSE button you can review any length of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the color LCD There are two other ways to review the recording e Recording review You can view the last two seconds of the recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the color LCD Color playback You can see the recording in color on a color video monitor without the need for any external adaptor You may also view the picture during a fast forward or reverse search See 2 3 Audio Functions on page 16 for details about the switches and controls used to select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level Deteriorating playback conditions Deteriorating playback may be due to the following causes e Scratches and dust on the disc surface This includes fingerprints dust from the air tar from cigarette smoke and so on Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are not a problem because they are registered in advance as defects and recording avoids them However scratches and soiling which occur after recording can lead to deteriorating playback conditions Aging of disc recording layers Over several decades the recording layers of opti
260. k while the Memory Stick access indicator is lit or flashing Doing so may cause a loss of data e This device uses a standard Memory Stick a Memoy Stick PRO and a MagicGate Memory Stick equipped with MagicGate copyright protection technology 2 6 Menu Operating Section 2 7 Time Code System GENLOCK IN connector Time code functions 1 TC IN time code input connector BNC type To synchronize the time code of this unit to an external time code input the reference time code to this connector TC OUT time code output connector BNC type To synchronize the time code of an external VTR to that of the camcorder connect this connector to the reference time code input connector of the external VTR GENLOCK IN connector BNC type e This connector inputs a reference signal when the camera is to be genlocked or when the time code is to be synchronized with external equipment Use the MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H phase phase of horizontal sync signal and the sub carrier phase For details refer to the Maintenance Manual This connector also inputs a return video signal You can display the return video signal in the viewfinder screen while holding the RET button down with RETURN VIDEO set to ON on the GENLOCK page of the OPERATION menu This connector also inputs an external analog composite video signal When the CBK SCO1 extension board
261. k is performed 10 Press the STOP button again then press the PREV button Check that the image of the beginning of the current or previous clip is displayed 11 Press the NEXT button and check that the image of the beginning of the next clip is displayed 2 Testing the automatic audio level adjusting functions 1 Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to FRONT 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUTO 3 Set the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches to F front 4 Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source Check that the level indications for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the sound level respectively 3 Testing the manual audio level adjusting functions 1 Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to FRONT 2 Turn the MIC LEVEL control Check that the channel 1 and 2 audio level meters on the color and monochrome LCDs show more and more segments as you turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder 4 Testing the earphone and speaker 1 Tum the MONITOR volume control and check that the speaker volume changes accordingly 2 Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE jack Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you can hear the sound from the microphone in the earphone 3 Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the earphone volume changes accordingly 4 Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack Check the earphone as in s
262. k that the mark placed before the item changes to a mark and the mark placed before the setting of the item changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of the selected item changes 4 Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM and change the FILTER selector position in the sequence of 1 2 3 and 4 Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder screen displays the correct numbers 5 Carry out of the following operations and check that that the indicator lights if the corresponding item has been turned on on the LED page of the USER menu Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN selector and the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu Set the SHUTTER selector to ON Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST Use the lens extender Set the FILTER selector to other than the position 1 PDW 510 510P or other than the position 1B PDW 530 530P Set the reference value of the auto iris to other than the standard value 6 Move the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT repeatedly and check that the shutter setting changes on the viewfinder screen a Pointing the camera at a suitable subject focus the camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen 1 70 10 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting 8 Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT and check that when sound is input to a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the camcorder the audio le
263. l or the MENU knob The following screen display appears 4 3 Managing Clip Lists CLIP Menu 79 uoNoejeS eueoS Je deyoD WN uolDaag aUsDg yy Je deYyD HA 80 CLIP LIST TE PRS ESC The time code shown in this screen is the current initial time code of the current clip list If you have already set the initial time code for this clip list that time code is displayed Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the item HOUR MIN SEC or FRAME which you want to set then press the dial knob Turn the SEL SET dial or the Menu knob until the desired value is displayed then press the dial knob After all items have been set select OK and press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob The starting time code of the current clip list is set to the specified LTC value The count starts from that value when playback starts To check the time code after setting it Press the SUB CLIP button and the THUMBNAIL button turning their indicators on and then rotate the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the first sub clip The initial time code of the current clip list appears in the color LCD and the monochrome LCD Save the current clip list to disc See 4 2 6 Saving the Current Clip List to Disc page 77 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP button CLIP menu operations end 4 3 5 Sorting Clip Lists Proceed as follows to sort the existing clip lists by clip list name or
264. lar mark on the viewfinder shoe is pointing up Fit these holes over ey ea G 3 Using the bolts and spring washers removed in step 1 fix the viewfinder shoe to the camcorder 9 2 5 Using the BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket By fitting a BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket not supplied you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder Using the BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket To fit the BKW 401 to the camcorder proceed as follows 9 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder 157 Japioowey y dN Bumes 6 Ja deyo III Jepiooweg y dn Bumes 6 se deyo WA 158 T Turn the arm of the rotation mechanism assembly of the BK W 401 in the direction of the arrow in the following illustration Next using a hexagonal wrench 3 mm across flats remove the bolts M4 x 8 to separate the rotation mechanism assembly from the viewfinder front back positioning mechanism assembly 2 Remove the two M3 x 10 hexagon socket bolts from the front back positioning mechanism assembly together with the washers Take care not to lose these bolts and washers Hexagon socket bolts M3 x 10 3 Using a hexagonal wrench 2 5 mm across flats detach the viewfinder shoe from the camcorder body 4 Using the two bolts M3 x 10 and washers removed in step 2
265. layback Stop the disc Lid Closed The lid of the disc compartment does not open Check the lid Lid Open The lid of the disc compartment is not closed Close it securely No Clip There are no clips recorded on the disc Exchange for a recorded disc No Disc There is no disc loaded Insert a disc and try the operation again STOP ONCE The operation is not possible while the disc REC mode is being played or recorded Stop the disc Disc Top The operation is not possible because the Disc End disc is at the top or end Formatting The disc is being automatically formatted Wait until the format ends Live Logg The operation you attempted is not possible in Live Logging mode Turn Live Logging mode off and try again Recording The unit is writing to the file system Wait until writing finishes No EM Space Essence marks cannot be inserted For EM Full details see 3 2 3 Recording Essence Marks page 42 SB CLP mode Try the operation again after pressing the SUB CLIP button to turn off the sub clip indicator No SEL List No clip list is selected Create a new clip list or load a clip list from the disc No List There is no clip list Create a clip list No SUB Clip There are no sub clips in the clip list Register a sub clip or load another clip list SUB Clip NG The In and Out point positions are invalid Set correct In and Out points MAX SB CLP The total number of sub clips is over the upper lim
266. layed A file related page such as the USER FILE page of the FILE menu MEMORY STICK ALL FILE SCENE FILE LENS FILE REFERENCE FILE or ROM VERSION page 8 3 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick 153 geq Bunjes 1 sn Bulpeo7 pue Bunes g uajdeyo A Setting Up the Camcorder chapter 2 Slide the battery pack down until its LOCK arrow 9 1 Power Su pp ly points at the matching line on the camcorder The following power supplies can be used with the camcorder e BP GL65 GL95 L60S Lithium ion Battery Pack e AC power using the AC 550 550CE or AC DN10 AC adaptor LOCK arrow Matching line on the camcorder 9 1 1 Using a Battery Pack When a BP GL95 Battery Pack is used the camcorder will operate continuously for about 120 minutes Before use charge the battery pack with a BC M150 Battery Charger It takes about 145 minutes to charge one BP GL95 f ACCESS For details refer to the battery charger operation manual indicator Note on using the battery pack Holding the button in pull A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged ins oaen pack up Attaching the battery pack T Press the battery pack against the back of the camcorder aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the matching line on the camcorder Detaching the battery pack During recording or playback while the ACCESS indicator is lit
267. ld be issued Sony BEFORE END 11 5 to 17 0 V 11 5V Used when a BP L60S Battery Pack is used in 0 1 V steps Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Sony END 11 0 to 11 5 V 11 0 V Used when a BP L60S Battery Pack is used in 0 1 V steps Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued Other BEFORE 11 5 to 17 0 V 11 8 V Used when a battery pack other than a BP END in 0 1 V steps GL65 GL95 L60S M100 is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Other END 11 0 to 14 0 V 11 0 V Used when a battery pack other than a BP in 0 1 V steps GL65 GL95 L60S M100 is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued DC IN BEFORE 11 5 to 17 0 V 11 8 V Used when an external power source is END in 0 1 V steps connected to the DC IN connector Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued DC IN END 11 0 to 14 0 V 11 0V Used when an external power source is in 0 1 V steps connected to the DC IN connector Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the END warning should be issued DETECTED Info Sony Other DC Displays the type of automatically detected BATTERY IN battery Menu List No 05 AUTO Automatically detects the type of the Page BA
268. le 11 to 17 V DC DC OUT 4 pin 11 to 17 V DC maximum rated current 0 2 A LENS 12 pin REMOTE 8 pin LIGHT 2 pin i LINK 6 pin Recommended Additional Equipment Power supply and related equipment BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S Battery Pack BC M50 L500 L70 Battery Charger AC 550 550CE AC Adaptor AC DN10 AC Adaptor CA 701 702 702P Camera Adaptor Viewfinder and related equipment BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket Fog proof filter Part No 1 547 341 11 Lens assembly farsighted Part No A 8262 537 A Lens assembly low magnification Part No A 8262 538 A Lens assembly standard magnification with special compensation for aberrations Part No A 8267 737 A Optical attachments ND filter 1 g ND Part No 3 174 685 01 ND filter 1 32 ND Part No 3 174 683 01 Consult your Sony representative for more information about these filters Equipment for remote control RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit Audio equipment ECM 672 Microphone CAC 12 Microphone Holder CCXA 53 Audio Cable for converting 5 pin connector to two 3 pin connectors WRR 855A 855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit WRR 862 UHF Portable Tuner WRT 8T UHF Transmitter WRR Tuner Fitting service part number A 8278 057 A STEREO MIC IN connector MA 126A board service part number A 1053 453 A DMX P01 Portable Digital Mixer For Audio equipment described above confirm whether the connector is male or female and the number of pins on the connector
269. left of the setting changes to a mark 6 Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of frames to be recorded in each shot appears As you turn the MENU knob the number changes in the following sequence 1 2 gt 4 gt 8 7 Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 8 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to TRIGGER INTERVAL 9 Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of TRIGGER INTERVAL changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 1 OTurn the Menu knob to select the desired Manual Interval Rec mode e To select the single shot mode recording only one shot after one operation set TRIGGER INTERVAL to M In the viewfinder the TALLY indicator green flashes twice per second To select the consecutive mode recording shots repeatedly after one operation set TRIGGER INTERVAL to the desired length of interval In the viewfinder the TALLY indicator green flashes once per second O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL REC NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL PRE LIGHT ING 0 O30FUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt CACHE INTVAL REC NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL PRE LIGHTING As you turn the
270. les to and from a Memory Stick The camcorder is equipped with a Memory Stick drive which enables you to save user files scene files lens files reference files and ALL files You can load these files from the Memory Stick for immediate recall of a particular setting configuration When a menu page is displayed you can set up the camcorder so that inserting a Memory Stick automatically jumps to the appropriate file related menu page For details about scene files see 8 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files on page 148 For details about lens files reference files and ALL files refer to the Maintenance Manual For details of the function for jumping to the appropriate file related menu page see 8 3 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick on page 153 Memory Sticks usable with this camcorder With this camcorder you can use a Sony Memory Stick whose capacity does not exceed 128 MB or a Sony Memory Stick PRO whose capacity does not exceed 2 GB 8 1 1 Handling the Memory Stick The Memory Stick can be inserted to or removed from the camcorder with the power turned on or off 8 1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a Memory Stick Inserting the Memory Stick Proceed as follows 1 Open the cover of the menu operating section The Memory Stick slot is now visible 2 Hold the
271. level below which the battery status indicator segment No 2 should turn off When the battery type judgment is Others sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 1 should turn off Battery status indicator segments ESS eee 1234567 E 5 and F are always on Menu List 195 sexipueddy Ml 196 No Page Item Settings Default Description 06 AUDIO 1 CA 701 AUDIO IN ENABL DSABL ENABL When a CA 701 camera adaptor is connected selects whether or not to enable input of audio channels 3 and 4 from the camera adaptor ENABL Camera adaptor can be used DSABL Camera adaptor cannot be used AUDIO CH3 4 CH1 2 SW SW Selects the sources to be recorded to MODE channels CH 3 4 CH1 2 Same sources as CH 1 2 SW Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches REAR XLR AUTO OFF ON OFF Turns the XLR connection automatic detection on or off FRONT MIC REF 60 dB 50 dB 60 dB Sets the reference level of the front 40 dB microphone REAR MIC REF 60 dB 50 dB 60 dB Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN 40 dB CH1 connector is set to MIC MIN ALARM VOL OFF SET OFF Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone when it is turned all the way down OFF Almost inaudible SET Faintly audible SP ATT LEVEL OFF 3 6 9 dB OFF Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker Has no effect on earphone
272. lip is referenced in a clip list DELETE CLIP amp CLIP LIST The clip list that references the clip will also be deleted MIDDLE1 MIDDLE2 vr moa 7 a E E DELETE CLIP amp CLIP LIST NAME C0006 TITLE DATE 23 AUG 14 30 DUR 00 03 10 00 ON CLIP LIST To go to the clip deletion screen without displaying the THUMBNAIL menu 3 4 Recording Video After step 2 press the RESET button with the SHIFT button held down shortcut operation S i g na l S Fro m To cancel the deletion and return to the thumbnail Exte rn al Eq u i p m e nt screen Do one of the following e With CANCEL selected press the SEL SET dial With this camcorder you can select in the OPERATION or the MENU knob menu whether to record the video captured by the camera e Press the RESET button or whether to record a signal from an external video device 5 Turn the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to select If this switching function is assigned to the ASSIGN 2 OK and then press the dial or knob switch regardless of the setting in the OPERATION menu you can make the selection with the ASSIGN 2 switch While you are recording a DV stream from an external DV device the indication EXT DV appears on To delete all clips the viewfinder screen While you are recording analog composite signals with the CBK SCO01 installed the 1 Carry out steps 1 and 3 of Deleting Clips to display indication EXT IV appears on the viewfi
273. lume At the minimum position no sound can be heard However if in the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu the MIN ALARM VOL item is set to SET the alarm tone is audible even when this volume control is at the minimum position THUMBNAIL SEUSET ESSENCE MARK SUB CLIP S SEL CLIP MENU SHIFT CH 1 2 CH 3 4 MONITOR Audio output switch switch position position CH 1 2 CH 1 Audio channel 1 ALARM MIX Mix sound of channels 1 and 2 0 P Mini Maxi CH 2 Audio channel 2 aii ae CH 3 4 CH 3 Audio channel 3 ALARM volume control MIX Mix sound of channels 3 and 4 CH 4 Audio channel 4 Built in speaker The speaker can be used to monitor E E sound during recording and playback sound during playback The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings The output level of the speaker can be lowered by changing the setting of the SP ATT LEVEL item on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu If you connect an earphone to the EARPHONE jack the speaker is automatically muted See 10 3 Operation Warnings on page 174 for information about alarms LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switches LINE AES EBU MIC selectors 48V OFF switches AUDIO OUT connector AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors DC OUT 12V connector Audio functions 2 LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1
274. maining memory recording time F 95 Full to 95 minutes 95 90 95 to 90 minutes 90 85 90 to 85 minutes 15 10 15 to 10 minutes 10 5 10 to 5 minutes 5 MIN 5 to 4 minutes 4 MIN 4 to 3 minutes 3 MIN 3 to 2 minutes 2 MIN 2 to 1 minutes 1 MIN 1 to 0 minutes O MIN 0 minutes 0 MIN flashing None INH Record inhibited An INH remaining memory indication means that the memory card is record inhibited If this appears remove the memory card enable recording to the memory card and then reinsert it 3 3 Checking Recording and Playback Disc playback start position Although this unit uses optical discs it is designed to offer the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs One of these is the playback start position which works in the same way as tape as described below After playback stop The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was pressed Press the PLAY PAUSE button to resume playback at the stop position After recording The unit stops at the position where recording ended To play back a clip press the PREV button to move to the start frame of any clip or press the PREV button with the PLAY PAUSE button held down to move to any position After disc insertion The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most recently ejected Press the PLAY PAUSE button to resume playback at the most recent position The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is e
275. mark to the page to be deleted 7 1 Menu Organization and Operation 119 sBulyjas paylejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD WA sues pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue Z 1 4deyo WA 2 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST The message PRESET DATA OK appears EO1OEDIT PAGE DELETE PAGE OK 1 OUTPUT TEST OUT FUNCTION 1 AUTO IRIS EOQIOEDIT PAGE PUSH TO PAGE INSERT 01 OUTPUT 02 TEST_OUT 03 FUNCTION 1 04 VF DISP 1 ILED 05 06 07 08 UF_SETTING 09 AUTO IRIS 3 Push the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to CANCEL PRST again In the above example the VF DISP 2 page is deleted To delete a page by using the menu Proceed as follows On the EDIT PAGE screen of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu move the mark to the page to be deleted and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears 2 Select DELETE and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and the message DELETE PAGE OK appears at the upper right 3 To delete turn the menu knob to move the gt mark to YES and press the MENU knob To move a page Proceed as follows 1 Display the EDIT PAGE screen of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the page that you want to move The EDIT FUNCTION page appears 2 Select MOVE then press the MENU knob The EDIT PAGE screen appears again 3 Turn MENU knob to move the mark to
276. mation AUTO When wide picture information is detected on the disc being played back add wide picture information to the output video signals REAR BNC OUT SEL VBS SDI VBS See 7 3 2 Selecting the when option board is Output Signals on page 131 connected LIVE LOGGING OFF ON OFF See 3 2 9 Recording in Live Logging Mode on page 57 1 80 Menu List USER menu No 02 Page TEST OUT Item TEST OUT MARKER Settings OFF ON Default OFF Description Selects whether or not the marker signal is mixed to the output signal from the TEST OUT connector TEST OUT VFDISP OFF ON OFF Selects whether or not the VF DISP display signal is mixed to the output signal from the TEST OUT connector TEST OUT MENU OFF ON OFF Selects whether or not the MENU display signal is mixed to the output signal from the TEST OUT connector TEST OUT DISP SEL TEST OUT ZEBRA TEST OUT TC VF LCD OFF ON OFF ON VF OFF OFF Selects VF viewfinder or LCD for the text information mixed to the output signal from the TEST OUT connector Selects whether or not the ZEBRA display signal is mixed to the output signal from the TEST OUT connector Selects whether or not a time code signal is mixed to the output signal from the TEST OUT connector TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the output signal of TEST
277. me appears ESC YES NO ALL 6 To carry out the save move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving the mark pointing to NO The access indicator lights When the saving is completed the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off If no Memory Stick has been inserted the message NO MEMORY STICK will appear Insert a Memory Stick If you select a file number where data has already been saved The message OVERWRITE OK YES NO appears In this case the mark appears on the left of NO which is flashing e To stop overwriting press the MENU knob e To overwrite move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob You can select the information displayed on each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page For details see Selecting the display contents on page 147 8 1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a Memory Stick T To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen USER menu settings to be saved in the Memory Stick Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are saved in the Memory Stick as a user file However you can select the items which
278. mediately before the interruption of recording The amount of data lost is as follows Quick salvage From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the interruption of recording Full salvage From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the interruption of recording More data may be lost when functions such as Picture Cache and Interval Rec are being used Quick salvage When the unit is powered on again after a recording interruption due to a power interruption with the disc still loaded in the unit clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and markers recorded on the disc Processing time is about 5 seconds Full salvage When recording on an XDCAM device is interrupted because of a power interruption and a disc is manually ejected from that device with the power off clips are reconstructed on the basis of markers recorded on the disc when the disc is loaded in this unit Therefore processing takes longer than for a quick salvage about 30 seconds although it depends on the state of the disc Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage T Insert the disc on which recording did not end normally The following salvage message appears SALVAGE TO RECORD ON THE DISC IT IS NECESSARY TO EXECUTE SALVAGE SALVAGE OK YES NO 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to YES then press the MENU knob Salvage processing starts and the message EXECUTING appears A re
279. ment 3 Insert the disc in the W direction and close the disc compartment lid manually Insert the disc Y indication on the outside close the lid The disc is loaded To insert the disc correctly make sure that the camcorder is in the upright position the grip upside the bottom downside Unloading a disc With the power supply on press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid and eject the disc Then remove the disc If you are not going to insert another disc close the disc compartment lid Unloading a disc when the power supply is off If the battery is exhausted it is not possible to remove the disc by pressing the EJECT button In such cases use the following emergency procedure to remove the disc manually 1 Turn off the POWER switch 2 Carry out the operation shown in the following figure 3 1 Handling Discs 37 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup MMIII yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Ja deyo HANK 38 Open this rubber cover Using a screwdriver or similar implement slide the black metal plate visible inside in the direction of the rear of the camcorder The disc compartment lid opens A red Phillips screw is visible inside the rubber cap Insert a screwdriver into the Phillips screw and turn counterclockwise the direction shown on the rubber cap This ejects the disc Close the rubber cover firmly lt TOP MENU gt USER USER
280. ment connected to the GENLOCK IN connector Proceed as follows 1 Display the SOURCE SEL page on the screen For the operation see 3 4 1 Recording a DV Stream From External Equipment on page 67 21 SOURCE SEL TOP CAM OFF REC VIDEO SOURCE EXT REC CONTROL i LINK MODE EXT VIDEO SOURCE AU C ILINK EXT OUTPUT DELAY SYNC SET UP REMOVE 0 0 2 Move the mark to EXT VIDEO SOURCE and press the MENU knob 3 Tur the MENU knob to display CMPST This ends the setting When you input analog composite signals to the GENLOCK IN connector of the camcorder these signals are displayed on the viewfinder screen and the color LCD and can be recorded on the disc Even when the GENLOCK ON OFF item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu the camcorder is automatically synchronized with the external reference video signal when the external video signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector in EXT mode When the setting is switched to CAM mode or when no signals are input to the GENLOCK IN connector even in EXT mode the camcorder is reset to the original setting 3 5 Freezing a Picture During Playback Viewing frozen pictures Proceed as follows T Press the PLAY PAUSE button to start playback 2 Press the PLAY PAUSE button again at the instant when you want to freeze the picture A frozen picture appears The time code is displayed in the counter display a
281. mode If you disconnect the remote control unit the remote control mode is cancelled J bo PEI fal Clee Oke ele RM B150 B750 o gt REMOTE connector Remote control cable Camcorder switch functions when the remote control unit is connected The following switches on the camcorder do not function GAIN selector OUTPUT DCC switch WHITE BAL switch AUTO W B BAL switch SHUTTER selector TURBO GAIN button ASSIGN 1 switch to which the TURBO GAIN function is assigned REC START button VTR button on the lens and the ASSIGN 1 3 4 or the TURBO GAIN switch to which the REC START STOP function is assigned When the REC START STOP item on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM For details of the function of the REC START button see the item Function of the REC START button when the remote control unit is connected on this page Paint adjustment when the remote control unit is connected The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled Function of the REC START button when the remote control unit is connected You can select the function of the REC START button on the camcorder when the remote control unit is connected using the REC START STOP item on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu To disable the camcorder REC START button and the lens VTR button On the
282. mode using the following two methods e Set the POWER switch to OFF Set CACHE INTVAL REC to OFF on the FUNCTION 1 page Time required for shooting and time required for recording on the disc Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects that move very slowly To use this function you need to set the total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME The time required for shooting is the time required to capture the very slowly moving subject and the camcorder must be arranged so that during this time the subject is always in the frame The disc recording time indicates the running time of the completed recording The camcorder calculates the time lapse interval from these two times Total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME 7 ee Shooting interval Time for recording on the disc REC TIME Notes on Auto Interval Rec mode Note the following points i LINK During interval recording signal input output through the i LINK interface is impossible Time code In Auto Interval Rec mode the internal time code generator runs in R RUN mode regardless of how the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set Audio Audio signals are not recorded in Auto Interval Rec mode Playback control buttons While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode you cannot use the playback control buttons EJECT FREV F FWD
283. n 1 4 About the automatic title generation function By default clips on each disc are assigned names in the range C0001 MXF to C0300 MXF For this reason two discs can contain clips with the same names The automatic title generation function allows you to assign titles to all of the clips on several discs which facilitates clip management For example if the titles TITLE00001 to TITLE00020 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to C0020 MXF on disc 1 then the titles TTTLE00021 to TITLE00037 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to C0017 MXF on disc 2 Titles are made up of prefixes up to 10 characters in length and five digit serial numbers such as TITLE 00001 The TOP menu appears C0020 MXF arh TITLE00001 a TITLE00037 TITLE00021 Clips recorded on Disc 2 lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSIS Setting the title prefix You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a prefix list stored in internal memory or by entering the prefix directly However to choose from a prefix list you must create the list beforehand on a computer and transfer it to the unit s internal memory with a Memory Stick Setting the initial value of the serial number The initial value of the serial number can be set to 00001 the default or to any other number The number is automatically incremented by 1 each time you reco
284. n and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner Never use organic solvents such as thinners Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning 1 _ t _ Low Viewfinder Eyecup Protecting Packing Eyecup barrel holder filter ring 3 T Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel For the detaching procedure see 9 2 6 Detaching the Eyepiece on page 158 2 Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder 3 Remove the protecting filter together with the packing ring from inside the eyecup holder 4 Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring Fog proof filter Depending on the temperature and humidity the protecting filter may mist because of vapor or your breath To ensure that the viewfinder is always clear replace the protecting filter with a fog proof filter Part No 1 547 341 11 not supplied Fitting the fog proof filter Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring with the fog proof filter Be sure to correctly assemble the fog proof filter the packing ring and the eyecup so that the reassembled eyepiece is waterproof When cleaning the fog proof filter wipe it very gently with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti fogging coating 10 2 2 Note About the Battery Terminal The battery terminal of this unit the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors is a consumable part
285. n the FORMAT page then it is not possible to mix the zebra display and marker display signals on the output signal from the TEST OUT connector 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen sBulyjas paylejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sBues pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WA 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 5 To continue setting other items repeat steps 3 and 4 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen 7 2 6 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the Color Bars In the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu you can select which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color bars You can also select which of the shot IDs 1 to 4 set in the SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on the picture Proceed as follows ANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch U12OSHOT DISP DATE TIME r MODEL NAME SERIAL NO ID SEL T 16 9 ID BLINK
286. nce from the last recorded clip Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clips can be deleted in the sequence 3 2 1 lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to DISC and press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the DISC page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page M1S DISC TOP DELETE LAST CLIP EXEC DELETE ALL CLIPS EXEC QUICK FORMAT EXEC 4 Press the MENU knob then turn it to move the mark to DELETE LAST CLIP and press the MENU knob again 3 2 Recording To delete all clips within the disc Carrying out the following procedure deletes all clips that are not locked Proceed as follows 1 Onthe DISC page see the previous item move the mark to DELETE ALL CLIPS and press the MENU knob The message DELETE OK YES NO appears 2 Toexecute deleting turn the MENU knob to move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob This deletes all clips within the disc 3 2 3 Reco
287. nd the PLAY PAUSE indicator flashes one flash second 3 To restart playback press the PLAY PAUSE button once again When remotely controlling the camcorder from an RM B150 B750 remote control unit You can perform the same operation from the RM B150 B750 3 5 Freezing a Picture During Playback 69 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup WN Scene Selection chapter 4 1 Overview What is scene selection Scene selection is a function which allows you to select material clips from the material recorded on a disc and perform cut editing You can do this by operating on this unit only e Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut editing in the field and in other offline situations e Clip lists edit data created with the scene selection function can be used on XPRI and other full feature nonlinear editing systems 70 4 1 Overview Flow of scene selection editing Record material or insert disc containing recorded material into this unit To edit a clip list Create and edit a clip list e Selecting clips see page 73 e Reordering sub clips see page 74 e Trimming sub clips see page 75 e Deleting sub clips see page 76 e Previewing clip lists see page 77 Save the clip list to disc see page 77 Play back the clip list see page 64 PDW 510 510P 530 530P Load clip lists see page 78 A Ei cip 2 ane Select P P
288. nder screen the THUMBNAIL menu see page 65 The clip is deleted and you return to the thumbnail screen 2 Turn the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to select You can switch the signals to be recorded using the DELETE ALL CLIPS and then press the dial or ASSIGN 2 switch or by a menu operation at any time knob while recording on the disc However the signals recorded at the point where the signal is switched may be distorted If the camera external switching function is A cofirmation screen appears To cancel the deletion and return to the assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch you cannot use the thumbnail screen following menu operations to switch between camera Do one of the following and external source input With CANCEL selected press the SET button e Even when the REC VIDEO SOURCE item is set to Press the RESET button EXT if the external video signal is not input to the i LINK DV IN OUT S400 connector or the GENLOCK 3 Turn the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to select IN connector the camcorder does not switch to EXT OK and then press the dial or knob mode and the pictures being shot by the camcorder are recorded on the disc All clips are deleted and you return to the thumbnail screen 3 4 1 Recording a DV Stream From External Equipment Recording a DV stream is possible only when the video recording format is DVCAM If the currently set video recording format is other than DVCAM change it to D
289. ndicator brightness is high OFF The tally indicator is disabled LOW The tally indicator brightness is low Back tally indicator When the back tally switch is set to ON this indicator has the same function as the tally indicator 2 8 Warnings and Indications 31 S 01 UO0Q puke sey JO SuONOUNY pue suoneoogq zg 3 deyg HII S 01 U09 pue s Jeq JO SUOROUNJ pue suOI 2007 Z Je deyD HAIN Back tally switch This switch enables or disables the back tally and rear tally indicators ON The back tally and rear tally indicators are enabled OFF The back tally and rear tally indicators are disabled Monochrome LCD This shows the remaining battery capacity remaining disc capacity time data and so on For details see 2 9 1 Monochrome LCD on page 32 DISP SEL display selection switch This switches the display in the color LCD CHAR Display video with superimposed text With the MENU ON OFF switch set to OFF also display camcorder status indications similar to those displayed in the viewfinder see 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen on page 121 MONI Display video without superimposed text STATUS Display counter warnings and audio levels Color LCD This displays VDR related warnings remaining battery capacity remaining disc capacity audio levels time data and so on For details see 2 9 2 Color LCD on page 33 WARNING indicator This indicator lights up or fla
290. ng types of essence marks SHOT MARK 1 2 Recorded manually OVER AUDIO LIMIT Recorded when the audio level exceeds 0 dBFS GAIN CHG MARK Recorded when the gain value is changed FILTER CHG MARK Recorded when the filter is changed SHUTTER CHG MARK Recorded when the shutter speed is changed WHITE CHG MARK Recorded when the white balance is changed FLASH MARK Recorded when a sudden brightness change occurs as when the flash operates or when the camcorder in recording mode is suddenly moved into an indoor space from a bright outdoor space 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SHOT MARK 1 MI1OOESSENCE MARK SHOT MARK 1 SHOT MARK 2 OVER AUDIO LIMIT GAIN CHG MARK 4 FILTER CHG MARK SHUTTER CHG MARK WHITE CHG MARK FLASH MARK i FLASH MARK LEVEL INDEX PIC POS 6 Press the MENU knob The mark to the left of SHOT MARK 1 changes to a mark and the mark to the left of the setting changes to a mark 7 if you want to record the essence mark turn the MENU knob to display ON If you do not want to record it turn the MENU knob to display OFF 8 Press the MENU knob 9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 to set the remaining essence marks 10 When FLASH MARK is ON use the FLASH MARK LEVEL item to set the threshold brightness value in the range to 20 for essence mark recording 11 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF to end the menu operation Re
291. ning User Defined Clip Titles Automatically 52 3 2 9 Assigning User Defined Clip and Clip Eist INGIICS ieie u a e aans 55 3 2 10 Recording in Live Logging Mode 57 3 2 11 Recording Proxy Data to Memory Cards With CBK PCO1 Installed 58 3 3 Checking Recording and Playback 61 3 3 1 Normal Playback 00 0 eeeeeeeeeeeee 61 3 3 2 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording Recording Review 62 3 3 3 Checking the Recording on the Color Video Monitor Playback in Color62 3 3 4 Thumbnail Search eee 62 3 3 5 Clip List Playback ee eeeeeeeeee 64 3 3 6 Locking and Deleting Clips 65 3 4 Recording Video Signals From External EQUIPIMOIM waiiscciidsscccccesecesiscaiesavieadvense 67 3 4 1 Recording a DV Stream From External Equipment seeiis en 67 3 4 2 Recording Analog Composite Signals With the CBK SCO1 Installed 68 3 5 Freezing a Picture During Playback 69 Chapter 4 Scene Selection 4 1 OVvervieW sssssssnsnennsnennonnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnn n 70 4 2 Creating Clip Lists ceeee 73 4 2 1 Selecting Clips eeeeeneseeeeeeee 73 4 2 2 Reordering Sub Clips eee 74 4 2 3 Trimming a Sub Clip oo ee 75 4 2 4 Deleting a Sub Clip eee 76 4 2 5 Previewing the Current Clip List 77 4 2 6 Saving the Current Clip List to Disc 77 4 3 Managing Clip Lists CLIP Menu 78 4 3 1 Loading a Clip List From Disc Into Unit 4 3 2 Deleting Clip Lists From a Disc 79 4 3 3 Clea
292. nu which appears 6 2 3 Exiting file operations Proceed as follows Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3 1 Do one of the following on the ein or 5 icon displayed in the remote computer s taskbar e Double click e Right click and select one of the following commands from the menu which appears Windows 2000 Unplug or eject hardware Windows XP Safely Remove Hardware e Windows 2000 The Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog appears e Windows XP The Safely Remove Hardware dialog appears 2 Select Sony XDCAM PDW 530 or 530p 510 510P IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device and click Stop The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears 3 Select Sony XDCAM PDW 530 or 530p 510 510P IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device and click OK e Windows 2000 A confirmation message appears e Windows XP Sony XDCAM PDW 530 or 530p 510 510P IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device is deleted from the Hardware devices list This unit can now resume normal operations The limitations described in Operation limitations during FAM connections see page 104 no longer apply 4 Disconnect the i LINK cable as required 6 2 4 Reconnecting To reconnect after exiting file operations do one of the following depending on whether an i LINK cable is connected i LINK cable is not connected Connect this unit and a remote computer with an i LINK cable i LINK cable is connected Disconnect the i LINK cable from either this unit
293. nus that the camcorder This manual also explains some adjustments and settings provides for adjustments and settings using tables to be made using the OPERATION menu PAINT menu MAINTENANCE menu FILE menu and DIAGNOSIS For the menu organization and the USER menu see menu Chapter 6 For details of these menus refer to the Maintenance Manual OPERATION Menu List The following table lists and describes the items in the When the setting range in the Settings column is OPERATION menu Some pages of the OPERATION surrounded by parentheses the setup value is a relative menu have been registered in the USER menu at the value The setting range shown on the menu screen may factory These pages are indicated by a circle O in the differ from what is shown in the manual USER menu column The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add and delete pages in the USER menu to suit your requirements USER No Page Item Settings Default Description menu O 01 OUTPUT LCD BRIGHT lt L gt 32 to 31 0 See 7 3 2 Selecting the LCD BRIGHT lt H gt 32 to 31 0 Output Signals on page 131 LCD COLOR 32 to 31 0 i LINK MODE AV C FAM AV C PB WIDE ID IMX THROU AUTO THROU When playing back a disc PDW 530 530P only recorded as MPEG IMX 50 40 30 Mbps specifies whether to add wide picture information recorded on the disc to the output signal THROU Output the video signals of the disc being played back without adding wide picture infor
294. o review the proxy AV data and modify or add metadata 3 2 Recording titles comments essence marks etc You can also create clip lists Proxy data cannot be recorded to a Memory Stick inserted into the camcorder s Memory Stick slot Usable memory card or Memory Stick types Refer to the CBK PCO1 Installation Manual for information on the types of memory card and Memory Stick that can be used with the camcorder Never remove a memory card while it is being accessed while the camcorder s ACCESS indicator is lit Doing so can corrupt the data on the memory card and render the card unusable To record proxy data to memory cards in synchronization with disc recording With the CBK PCO1 installed on this unit proceed as follows T Insert a memory card into the PC card slot 2 Check the memory symbol see page 60 and the remaining memory display see page 60 You cannot record proxy data to a memory card if you start recording before the memory symbol and remaining memory display appear Especially just after inserting a memory card and after powering the camcorder on it may take some time for the memory card to be recognized 3 Check to be sure that there is enough remaining memory and then press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording in the normal way Proxy data is recorded in synchronization with recording to the disc Never remove the battery pack or
295. o a mark 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section To display the aspect ratio of 16 9 4 3 on the viewfinder screen By setting the DISP 16 9 4 3 ID item on the VF DISP 2 page of the USER menu to ON 16 9 or 4 3 appears on the viewfinder screen when the aspect ratio of 16 9 is selected For details see 7 2 2 Selecting the Display Items on page 123 To display 16 9 in color bars By setting the SHOT 16 9 ID on the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu to ON you can record a 16 9 mode indicator superimposed on the color bars For details see 7 2 6 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the Color Bars on page 126 16 9 I W Q Color bars SMPTE type Color bars EBU type 16 9 mode indicator on the color bar display 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus 137 sBulyjas p e q pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sBumes p e q pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WN 138 7 3 9 Setting the CCD Scan Mode Since the camcorder has CCDs that use an all pixels read e PsF progressive scan mode out method a progressive scan mode is also available in Installing the CBK FCO1 allows you to select the 24P addition to the conventional interlace scan mode mode You can select either of the following modes using the FORMAT page of
296. o the desired mode then press the MENU knob 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 7 4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings You can return all settings in the USER menu to the standard settings It is also possible to change the standard settings from their factory default values For details on how to change the factory settings refer to the Maintenance Manual Proceed as follows 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu appears on the screen 2 Tum the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears and press the MENU knob The USER FILE page appears UIG6OUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD D_ EXEC USER FILE SAVE EXEC OOOgooo00o000000000 USER PRESET EXEC F 1D USER FILE page 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to USER PRESET and press the MENU knob The message LOAD OK YES NO appears UI6OUSER FILE LOAD 0K YES NO USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SAVE EXEC ooo00000000000000 D EXEC Fet USER PRESET 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob The settings for all items in the USER menu are reset to the standard settings 7 4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings 143 sBulyjas paylejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III 144 Saving and Loading User Setting Data chapter 8 1 Saving and Loading User Fi
297. oceed as follows 1 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to DISPLAY MODE and press the MENU knob 8 1 3 Loading Saved Data From a Memory Stick The data loaded from the Memory Stick overwrites the data saved in the camcorder Proceed as follows 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Tum the MENU knob until the USER FILE page appears then press the MENU knob Alternatively select USER FILE on the CONTENTS page 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to USER FILE LOAD and press the MENU knob The POO USER LOAD page appears P00 USER LOAD DISPLAY MODE USER1 USER2 NO_ FILE ALL JAN 01 04 JAN 15 04 FEB 05 04 FEB 20 04 USER4 USERS 4 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then press the MENU knob 8 1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a Memory Stick 147 geq Bunjes 1 sn Bulpeo7 pue Bunes g sajdeyo A eyeq Bunjes sn Bulpeo7 pue Bulnes g Jaydeup POO USER LOAD ESC DISPLAY MODE ALL 001 USER1 002 USER2 JAN 0O1 04 JAN 15 04 FEB 05 04 FEB 20 04 003 NO FILE 004 USER4 005 USERS 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired file number to be loaded and press the MENU knob The message LOAD OK YES NO appears POO USER LOAD ESC D OK YES NO DISPLAY MODE ALL 001 USER1 2
298. of a file in the RETR lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt specified path on this unit to the current directory on the remote computer Input example RETR Clip C0001 MXF STOR Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the STOR lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt specified path on the remote computer to the current directory on this unit Depending on the type of file transferred the following items are created e C MXF file C M01 XML file metadata C S01 MXF file proxy AV data e E E01 SMI file gt E M01 XML file metadata a 0001 to 0300 b 0001 to 0099 c With firmware version 1 5 and higher the unit can handle files with user defined names in the C and E parts e For C MXF files some data such as file header metadata may be missing e Depending on the transfer destination directory and the file type transfer may not be possible For C MXF files the UMID of the copy source file is not saved However it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued For details see 6 1 2 File Operation Restrictions page 101 Input example STOR Edit E0001E01 SMI 6 3 FTP File Operations 109 suoiesedo aij 9 Jejdeup HHI II suone1ado aij 9 Jaydeyo HII 110 Command name Description Command syntax RNFR Rename a file Specify the file to be RNFR lt SP gt lt path name before
299. of an external time code You can also synchronize the time code generators of other camcorders VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder Connections for time code synchronization Connect both the reference video signal and the external time code as illustrated below Example 1 Synchronizing with an external time code Cc GENLOCK IN Reference video signal Cte TC IN External time code 1 Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu if GENLOCK is set to OFF Example 2 Interconnecting a number of camcorders for time code synchronization 4 O O Cc par il GENLOCK IN To another camcorder to be synchronized 1 Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu if GENLOCK is set to OFF Procedure for time code synchronization To synchronize the time code proceed as follows 5 6 Setting the Time Data 97 BulpsooeyY 104 sues pue s ueujsnipy gJeldeyD HII Bulpsooey 104 sBumes pue sjuewisnipy gse deyo Ml 98 oF N SED Synchronizing the time code Turn on the POWER switch Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN Set the DISPLAY switch to TC Supply a time code signal and a reference video signal complying with the SMPTE for PDW 510 530 or EBU for PDW 510P 530P standard and in p
300. on circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen but this is not a fault If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen in display mode 2 or 3 Possible messages are listed below Black balance adjustment error messages Error message Meaning ABB NG The lens iris did not close adjustment IRIS NOT was impossible CLOSED ABB NG Adjustment could not be completed TIME LIMIT within the standard number of attempts Error message Meaning ABB NG The difference between the reference R or G or B value and the current value is so great OVERFLOW that it exceeds the range Adjustment was impossible If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the black balance adjustment Keep pushing the AUTO W B BAL to BLK until BLACK SET appears after BLACK BALANCE appears If the error message occurs again an internal check is necessary For information about this internal check refer to the Maintenance Manual If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris If this happens the black balance will be incorrect Black balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the black balance is next adjusted If a memory
301. on to switch whether or CHARACTER not the characters are mixed to the video signal to be output from the TEST OUT connector MARKER Assigns the ON OFF function to display all markers ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display function to the switch D5600 Applies an electrical 5600 K filter EXT REC Selects whether or not recording control CONTROL of external devices connected through the CCZ connector 26 pin of a CA 702 is possible REC VIDEO Selects which signals you will record SOURCE 2 pictures being shot by the camcorder or video signals from external equipment connected to GENLOCK IN connector UAO1 to UA10 2 Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu 1 Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu the ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers 2 When the CBK SCO1 is not installed this item does not appears since this function is not effective 3 This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch you cannot change those settings using other menus The function assigned to ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the menu setting 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and press MENU knob The mark changes to a mark and the mark by the setting changes to a mark 5 Turn the MENU knob to switch to the desired setting and press t
302. only when the unit is set to DVCAM recording mode Computer access to files File Access Mode Use of application software 1 which supports the XDCAM series enables random access to video audio and metadata files on Professional Discs with the ability to display file lists and perform file based reads and writes Files can be transferred at high speed and thumbnail lists of disc contents can be viewed on computer screens 1 Such software includes the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software and the XPRI series 1 1 Features 9 T i N MOIMOAC J9 deUD WA Remote control connectors By connecting an optional RM B150 B750 or similar remote control unit you can control the shooting functions of this unit externally Function extension interface Installing the optional CBK SD01 SDI Output Board enables SDI signal output from the VIDEO OUT connectors By installing the optional CBK SC01 Analog Composite Input Board a composite video signal input to the GENLOCK connector can be recorded on this unit An extension connector can be attached to the battery attachment on the rear panel to allow various camera adapters to be fitted Network connector option The optional CBK NCO1 Network Adaptor can be installed on this unit to enable connections to computers and networks This makes it possible to transfer files at high speeds and to display of lists of the video audio and metadata files stored on Professional Discs
303. onvenient especially when you manage data files using Memory Stick s To make this setting proceed as follows 1 In the TOP menu select the FILE menu 2 Turn the MENU knob until the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu appears then press the MENU knob to select the page Alternatively on the CONTENTS page select MEMORY STICK to display the MEMORY STICK page 09 MEMORY STICK TOP FORMAT EXEC MS IN gt JUMP TO XE OFF 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MS IN gt JUMP TO and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of MS IN gt JUMP TO changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting target FILE menu page Setting Description OFF Disables this function USER Jumps to the USER FILE page ALL Jumps to the ALL FILE page SCENE Jumps to the SCENE FILE page LENS Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page REFER Jumps to the REFERENCE page Setting USER 1 Description Jumps to the USER 1 page 5 Press the MENU knob to confirm the selection The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark In the following cases jumping to the target page is impossible e When the power is turned on after you insert a Memory Stick e When OFF is selected for the MS IN gt JUMP TO item e When any of the following menu pages is already disp
304. or is automatically selected for audio recording regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu with the REAR XLR AUTO item In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power supply female XLR connectors 3 pin are fitted If the microphone cable has a female connector use an adaptor Using an external microphone attached to the camcorder You can attach an external microphone to the camcorder T Remove the fixing screws for external microphone holder 2 Attach the CAC 12 Microphone Holder 9 5 Audio Input System 161 Japioowey y dN Bumes 6 Ja deyo III Jepiooweg y dn Bumes 6 se deuo WA 162 Screws removed in step 1 CAC 12 When you detach the CAC 12 Microphone Holder once you have attached to the camcorder be careful not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC 12 After detaching the CAC 12 be sure to put the two screws back into their original places see the figure illustrating the step 1 operation 3 Open the CAC 12 and remove the microphone adaptor Microphone adaptor Loosen the screw 1 Attach the microphone adaptor when using a small diameter external microphone 4 Place an electret condenser microphone in the CAC 12 9 5 3 Attaching a UHF Portable
305. ory Stick You can also load data from the Memory Stick into the camcorder memory Data that can be saved in a scene file You can save the following data in a scene file Values adjusted using the PAINT menu For details of the PAINT menu refer to the Maintenance Manual Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and ECS mode The white balance data included in a scene file depends on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu For details see White balance setting data to be saved in the scene file on page 149 8 2 1 Saving a Scene File Proceed as follows to save a scene file in the camcorder memory or the Memory Stick To save a scene file in the Memory Stick insert the Memory Stick before starting the operation 1 In the TOP menu select the FILE menu 2 Tum the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page Alternatively select SCENE FILE on the CONTENTS page to display the SCENE FILE page O40SCENE FILE o1 STANDARD 02 STANDARD 03 STANDARD aa STANDARD STANDARD OSTANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE F 1D If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 3 For details on setting the file ID see Setting the file ID on page 150 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SCENE STORE and press the MENU knob
306. oss filter B 3200 K C 4300 K D 6300 K FILTER selector inner knob setting and ND filter selection FILTER selector inner knob ND filter setting 1 Clear 2 1 4 ND 3 1 46 ND 5 2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 85 BulpsooeyY 104 sues pue s uewsnipy gJeldeyD HII Bulpsooey 104 sues pue sjuewjsnipy g se deyo WA FILTER selector inner knob setting and ND filter selection FILTER selector inner knob ND filter setting 4 1 54 ND For the PDW 510 510P FILTER selector setting and filter selection AUTO W B BAL switch FILTER selector setting Filter selection 1 3200 K 2 5600 K 1 8 ND 3 5600 K 4 5600 K 64 ND If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed a message reporting the setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen in display mode 3 3 Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to it Alternatively any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used The absolute minimum white area is as follows Rectangle centered on the screen The lengths of the sides are 70 of the length and width of the screen The white object must be within the rectangle and have an area of at least 10 of the screen The switch returns to the center position and the adj
307. p shorter than 2 seconds If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting this results in a 2 second clip If you stop recording and restart within 2 seconds of the original start this creates a single continuous clip from the original start time The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on a single disc is 300 If an attempt is made to record more than 300 clips the error message DISC FULL appears even if there is free capacity on the disc Playback control buttons During recording the playback control buttons EJECT F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE STOP have no effect 3 2 Recording 41 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup MMII yoeghe q pue Bulpiovey Ja deyo HAIN 3 2 2 Deleting Clips With this camcorder you can delete clips one at a time in sequence from the last recorded clip or you can delete all clips in a single operation You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to delete the selected clip or all clips For details see Deleting clips page 66 To delete the last recorded clip If the clip is locked it cannot be deleted Proceed as follows 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears The message DELETE OK YES NO appears 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to YES and press the MENU knob again The last recorded clip is deleted 6 By repeating steps 4 and 5 you can delete a number of clips in seque
308. pending on the combination of the Memory Stick and Memory Stick compliant product you use About a Memory Stick What is MagicGate MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption technology Before using a Memory Stick Terminal Write protect tab Labelling position When you set the Memory Stick erasure prevention switch to LOCK data cannot be recorded edited or erased Data may be damaged if You remove the Memory Stick or turn off the unit while it is reading or writing data You use the Memory Stick in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or electric noise We recommend that you make a backup copy of important data that you record on the Memory Stick Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to the Memory Stick labeling position Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the labeling position Carry and store the Memory Stick in its case Do not touch the connector of the Memory Stick with anything including your finger or metallic objects Do not strike bend or drop the Memory Stick Do not disassemble or modify the Memory Stick Do not allow the Memory Stick to get wet Do not use or store the Memory Stick in a location that is Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun Under direct sunlight Very humid or subject to co
309. r SAVE Indicators on the viewfinder TALLY green tallly indicator This indicator lights when the camcorder is in Picture Cash mode Also this indicator lights when a green tally signal is received from the camera control unit REC recording red tally indicator This indicator lights red when recording starts and remains lit during recording It also lights when a red tally signal is received from the camera control unit and flashes to give a warning For details see 10 3 Operation Warnings on page 174 BATT battery indicator This indicator starts flashing when the battery connected to the camcorder is nearly exhausted and stays lit when the battery is completely exhausted The battery power level at which the indicator starts flashing can be set on the BATTERY 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu For details refer to the Maintenance Manual warning indicator This indicator lights when any of the following conditions occurs with the corresponding item set to ON on the LED page of the USER menu e The gain is set to other than 0 dB e The SHUTTER selector is set to ON scan mode J e The shutter speed is set to a value other than 1 60 scan mode PsF The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST e ATW is enabled e The lens extender is used The FILTER selector is set to other than ND 1 CC B e The reference value of auto iris adjustment is not the standard value
310. r ZOOM TELE When using a serial lens assign the WIDE 2 ZOOM TELE setting to ASSIGN 3 and the WIDE setting to ASSIGN 4 ZOOM WIDE When using a serial lens assign the TELE 3 ZOOM WIDE setting to ASSIGN 3 and the TELE setting to ASSIGN 4 SHOT MARK1 Assigns the function to record a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark SHOT MARK2 _ Assigns the function to record a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark UAO1 to UA10 4 Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 push type switch Function Description OFF Disables the switch CACHE Assigns execution of recording in picture cache mode 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus 1 Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers 2 Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can use this switch to display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder 3 Only the Assign 3SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens appear 4 This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2 slide type switch Function Content OFF Disables the switch CACHE Assigns execution of recording in picture cache mode Function Content TEST OUT Assigns the functi
311. r ECS mode check the shooting conditions You can turn on or off the EVS mode on the SW STATUS page of the PAINT menu 5 3 2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed Use the SHUTTER selector to select a shutter mode or a standard mode shutter speed To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS mode with the SHUTTER selector set to ON and the ECS or SLS mode selected use the MENU knob for adjustment You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to narrow the range of choice in advance or to select in advance whether or not you use ECS SLS Setting the shutter mode and standard mode shutter speed Once the shutter speed is selected it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off 1 Follow the procedure described in 7 2 2 Selecting the Display Items page 123 to set the VF DISPLAY MODE item to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu 2 Push the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT SHUTTER selector The current shutter setting indication appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen Examples SS 1 250 SLS 1 30 IFRAME ECS 60 0 Hz 3 Before the shutter setting indication disappears push the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT again and repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears Pushing the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT repeatedly allows you to
312. rame of the last clip recorded on the disc STOP button Press this button to stop disc playback PREV button This jumps to the beginning of the current clip and pauses During the jump the F REV indicator flashes Pressing this button together with the F REV button jumps to the first frame of the first clip recorded on the disc 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions 25 S 01 U0Q puke sey JO SuONOUNY pue suoneoog Zz JeldeyD NII S 01 U09 pue Sued JO SUOROUNJ pue sUOI e007 Z Je deyD HAIN 26 2 5 Output Video Operating Section SEL SET dial Thumbnail indicator Sub clip indicator SUB CLIP button SHIFT button THUMBNAIL button Output video operating section SEL SET select set dial When thumbnails each representing a clip are shown on the color LCD you can select a particular thumbnail with this dial Turning the dial upward moves the cursor to the left and when it reaches the left edge to the rightmost position in the row above Turning the dial downward moves the cursor to the right and when it reaches the right edge to the leftmost position in the row below After selecting the desired thumbnail with the cursor press the dial in to confirm To carry out a scene selection setting hold down the SHIFT button and press in this dial THUMBNAIL button To carry out a search using thumbnails or to create a clip
313. rd a clip When it reaches 99999 it returns to 00001 for the next clip Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the serial number setting for example if you reset the serial number to the original value after recording several clips Care should be taken when setting the serial number To assign user defined titles automatically when clips are recorded Proceed as follows 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch to ON 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OPERATION and then press the MENU knob If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears If the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to CLIP TITLE and then press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the CLIP TITLE page appears and then press the MENU knob The CLIP TITLE page appears 230CLIP TITLE TOP TITLE gt DSABL Select TITLE and then press the MENU knob The mark beside DSABL changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to display ENABL and then press the MENU knob The following items appear 230CLIP TITLE TOP TITLE gt ENABL SELECT PREFIX CLEAR NUMERIC LOAD PREFIX DATA PREFIX TITLE NUMERIC 00001 Clip titles will be generated automatically
314. rding Essence Marks Shot marks and other essence marks can be recorded on the disc Recording essence marks for scenes containing important images and sounds enables quick access to the marked points This increases editing efficiency Some essence marks are recorded automatically for example when recording starts and when the flash operates Others are recorded manually To specify essence marks to be recorded on the disc Proceed as follows MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch 1 Holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE 3 Press the MENU knob If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 4 ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to ESSENCE MARK then press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the ESSENCE page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page M1QOESSENCE MARK SHOT MARK 1 SHOT MARK 2 OVER AUDIO LIMIT WHITE CHG MARK FLASH MARK FLASH MARK LEVEL INDEX PIC POS E P SHUTTER CHG MARK The items show the followi
315. rea This shows a message if a recording fault or condensation is detected For details see 10 3 Operation Warnings on page 174 VDR operation and status indicators on the color LCD Time code display Lights in playback mode Lights in non drop frame mode PDW 510 530 only Lights when the camcorder is synchronized with an external time code Lights when the time code generator is on hold 30a 0a EL MMs B8 E Smee F m oa 2reK TERRE RERRRERRREEE STEERER EEEEERERERREEE Lights when the HOLD button is pressed 1 Lights when the time code or real time is displayed Time counter display Shows the time code user bit data and real time 1 When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the time code value the time code is displayed in the format shown below When the HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold the time code is displayed in the normal format ANA WILE LILA LLL Time code display on the color LCD 2 10 Indicators in the Viewfinder 2 10 Indicators in the Viewfinder Several indicators are provided above and below the viewfinder screen to indicate the current state and adjustments of the camera TALLY indicator REC recording indicator as BATT battery indicator BATT o Viewfinder screen ALLY REC warning indicator EE aE Spare indicator SAVE indicato
316. ress When the unit is shipped from the factory automatic acquisition of the IP address is disabled Proceed as follows to enable it 1 Holding down the MENU knob set the menu switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to NETWORK and press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the NETWORK page appears then press the MENU knob The NETWORK page appears The current settings of the items on the page appear to the right of the items M18ONETWORK TOP DISABL 192 168 1 10 255 255 255 0 00 00 DHCP IP_ADDRESS SUBNET MASK DEF GATEWAT LINK SPEED DUPLEX 4 Press the MENU knob and turn it to move the mark to DHCP then press the MENU knob The mark to the left of DHCP changes to a mark and the mark to the left of the setting changes to a mark 5 Turn the MENU knob to display ENABL then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Before enabling automatic acquisition of the IP address ch
317. ring the Current Clip List From the Unit IVIGTIONY e vecostacccantcomen sasereaians 79 4 3 4 Setting the Start Time Code of the Current Clip List ssessseseeeeeeseeesseee 79 4 3 5 Sorting Clip Lists ee eeeeeeeeeee 80 4 4 Using the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing SOMWANG west sicisincnsdencastcecivasedutarcseens 81 Chapter 5 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 5 1 Setting the Recording Format PDW 530 530P Only ee 82 5 1 1 Setting the Video Recording Format82 5 1 2 Setting the Audio Recording Format83 5 2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance cccssssssseseeeeeeneeeeeees 84 5 2 1 Adjusting the Black Balance 84 5 2 2 Adjusting the White Balance 85 5 3 Setting the Electronic Shutter 88 5 3 1 Shutter Modes we s cssaesdecrscetsssceedseees 88 5 3 2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed nesini 88 5 4 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 91 5 5 Adjusting the Audio Level 93 5 5 1 Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs From the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 Connectors eee 93 5 5 2 Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the Front Microphone 94 5 5 3 Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4 meian n e eit agamneueliyts 95 5 6 Setting the Time Data 000 96 5 6 1 Setting the Time Code 0 96 5 6 2 Saving the Actual Time in the Time Coderen aa 96 5 6 3 Settin
318. river Insert the supplied CD ROM Proxy Browsing Software PDZ 1 in the CD ROM drive of the computer and execute the Setup exe file then follow the installation instructions For details refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD ROM disc Use Version 1 4 or higher of the FAM driver The FAM driver on the supplied CD ROM is Version 1 4 or higher If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer check the version To check the version click Add or Remove Programs Windows XP or Add Remove Programs Windows 2000 select ProDisc and then click Click here for support information To enable FAM connections over the i LINK connector Proceed as follows 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed page appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the OUTPUT page then press the MENU knob The OUTPUT page appears The current settings appear on the right side of each item 3 Move the mark to i LINK MODE then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark and the mark changes to a mark 6 2 File Access Mode File Operations 103 suonesedo aij 9 Jejdeyup HII suoneiado aij 9 Jaydeyo HII U0 100UTPUT LCD BRIGHT lt L gt LCD BRIGHT lt H gt LCD COLOR i LINK MODE _AU C PB WIDE ID IMX THROU REAR BNC OUT SEL UBS LIVE LOGGING OFF 4 Tur the MENU knob to select FAM then press the MENU knob The setting is confirmed The
319. rly effective in the following cases e Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day e Shooting a subject indoors against a background through a window e Any high contrast scene 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions 21 04JUOD puke sey JO suonouny pue suoneoogq z 3 deyo MMIII S 01 U09 pue Sued JO SUOROUNJ pue sUOI e007 Z Je deyD HAIN 22 BARS DCC OFF A color bar signal is output and the DCC circuit does not operate For example use the setting for the following purposes e Adjusting the video monitor e Recording the color bar signal 0 BARS CAM DCC OFF E The video signal from the camera is l output and the DCC circuit does not 4 OFF ON operate DCC CAM DCC ON The video signal from the camera is output and the DCC circuit operates OUTPUT DCC selector WHITE BAL white balance memory switch This switch controls the white balance setting PRST preset Adjusts the color temperature corresponding to the position of the FILTER selector Use the PRST setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance A or B When the AUTO W B BAL switch is pushed to WHT the white balance is automatically adjusted according to the current position of the FILTER selector and the adjusted value is stored in either memory A or memory B There are two memories for each CC filter allowing a total of eight adjustments to be stored When this switch is set to A or B the camcorder automatically a
320. rmat D5600 indication This appears when the electric 5600 K color temperature filter function is on EM indicator This appears when essence marks are recorded on the disc For details see 3 2 3 Recording Essence Marks page 42 7 2 2 Selecting the Display Items To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen from the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu turn on or off the indication next to each item To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen proceed as follows CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch Item Description DISP SHUTTER Shutter speed and ECS mode indicator DISP AUDIO Audio level indicator DISP DISC Remaining disc capacity indicator DISP IRIS Iris opening indicator 1 The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder 2 For detailed information on the display mode see 7 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages on page 124 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page appears and press the MENU knob to select the page VF DISP 2 page Item Description DISP ZOOM Zoom position indicator DISP COLOR Displays the color temperature TEMP DISP BATT Displays the battery voltag
321. ront of the page number The camcorder is now in page selecting mode 2 Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears 3 Press the MENU knob when the desired page appears To end menu operations You can end menu operations using the following two methods e Turn the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF e Close the cover of the menu operating section When you close the cover the MENU ON OFF switch is set to OFF automatically The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen when the viewfinder DISPLAY switch is set to ON or the VF DISP item on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu is set to ON For details of the viewfinder display see 7 2 2 Selecting the Display Items on page 123 7 1 4 Editing the USER Menu The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and items that you need by adding deleting or replacing the pages Adding a new page The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add a new page to the USER menu While the EDIT page contains factory preset items the USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages and the ASSIGN SEL EDIT page are all blank in their initial state You can register up to 10 items including blank lines on each of these pages To add a new page proceed as follows T While holding down the MENU knob move the MENU ON OFF switch from the OFF
322. roper phase relationship to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector respectively This operation synchronizes the internal time code generator with the external time code After about 10 seconds you can disconnect the external time code without losing the synchronization However there will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or disconnect the time code signal during recording When you finish the above procedure the internal time code is immediately synchronized with the external time code and the counter display will show the value of the external time code However wait for a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the frame frequency of the camcorder the camera cannot be correctly genlocked In such acase the internal time code is not correctly synchronized with the external time code When the GENLOCK ON OFF item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu the 5 6 Setting the Time Data time code cannot be synchronized with the reference video signal In this case set the GENLOCK item to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu User bit settings during time code synchronization When the time code is synchronized only the time data is synchronized with the external time code value Therefore the user bits can have their own settings for each camcorder You can also sync
323. rrosive substances Memory Stick Access Indicator If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing data is being read from or written to the Memory Stick At this time do not shake the computer or product or subject them to shock Do not turn off the power of the computer and product or remove the Memory Stick This may damage the data Precautions To prevent data loss make backups of data frequently In no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the provisions of copyright law When you use a Memory Stick that has been pre recorded be sure that the material has been recorded in accordance with copyright and other applicable laws The Memory Stick application software may be modified or changed by Sony without prior notice Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage performances and other entertainment events even if they are recorded for personal use only ce Memory Stick and MagicGate Memory Stick RY STI are trademarks of Sony Corporation Memory Stick Duo and Memory STICK Duo are trademarks of Sony Corporation Memory Stick PRO and Memory STICK PRO are trademarks of Sony Corporation MagicGate and MIAAGICGATE are trademarks of Sony Corporation About a Memory Stick 207 sexipueddy MM Glossary AES EBU A standard established jointly by the AES Audio Eng
324. s 165 9 7 Attaching the Shoulder Strap 166 9 8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position Pa aeaa aaan aiaa a Aa Kedari 166 9 9 Connecting the Remote Control Unit A E E A T 167 Chapter 10 Maintenance 10 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting eiii ie neiise eanit 169 10 1 1 Preparations for Testing 169 10 1 2 Testing the Camera 169 10 1 3 Testing the VDR eee 170 10 2 Maintenance cccccccsessseeeeeeeeees 173 10 2 1 Cleaning the Viewfinder 173 10 2 2 Note About the Battery Terminal 173 10 3 Operation Warning6 0 0 174 Appendixes SPECiINICANONS iieseecasvessestsceewemscoaeeninnens 177 SEDER AL senine nna a aa 177 Video Camera Section 177 Optical Disc Drive Section 178 Recommended Additional Equipment 179 Menu LIST i ississtsictecieentsnntsnisientnineenneenanenes 180 OPERATION Menu List eee 180 PAINT Ment TeiStisceics eenczeret isiensceatsinnces 188 MAINTENANCE Menu List 193 FILE Ment LS sii oo usisne ness 202 DIAGNOSIS Menu List 204 About a Memory Stick ccccseseeeee 206 GIOSSOLY scincieciisssdeniseisendeendecciunnintanctirees 208 NING OX assiccaencivnstounacanaticaneenenenintecbecawenvanael 211 Overview chapter 1 1 Features The PDW 510 510P 530 530P is a camcorder for ENG and EFP in which a color video camera using 3 inch high definition CCDs of a 16 9 aspect ratio and a Professional Disc drive
325. s of the camcorder is shown along the top and bottom of the screen 7 3 2 Selecting the Output Signals When the CBK SD01 is installed you can select the type of video signals VBS SDI from the VIDEO OUT connector on the OUTPUT page of the USER menu Use the POWER SAVE page to specify whether or not to enable DV stream output from the i LINK DV IN OUT S400 connector of this unit When DV stream output is enabled it is output when the recording format is any of MPEG IMX 50Mbps 40Mbps 30Mbps or DVCAM To select the signal output from the VIDEO OUT connector Proceed as follows T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The last accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Turn the MENU knob until the OUTPUT page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page U0100UTPUT LCD BRIGHT lt L gt LCD BRIGHT lt H gt LCD COLOR 1 LINK MODE AU C PB WIDE ID IMX THROU REAR BNC OUT SEL UBS LIVE LOGGING OFF Item LCD BRIGHT lt L gt Description Adjusts the LCD brightness when the LCD switch is in the L position LCD BRIGHT lt H gt Adjusts the LCD brightness when the LCD switch is in the H position LCD COLOR i LINK MODE Adjusts the color saturation of the LCD Selects whether or not to use the i LINK connector SBP2 interface REAR BNC OUT SEL Selects the type of the video signal to be output from the VIDEO OUT connector SDI Outputs the SDI signal When SDI is s
326. s the camera is in the H FRAME consecutive mode of the Manual Interval Rec mode S M H indicates the trigger interval and FRAME indicates the number of frames LOW LIGHT Appears depending on the setting to indicate the subject illumination is inadequate ON BOARD Appears when the backup battery for BATTERY EMPTY the internal clock has been used up HIGH Indicates that temperatures have risen TEMPERATURE inside the unit Avoid continued use in this state 1 To replace the backup battery contact your nearest Sony dealer A message for DVR operation is displayed in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area in the viewfinder see page 124 Message ILL Disc ILL Index No FS Unknown FS Meaning and action to take The disc cannot be used by this unit Insert another Professional Disc Index file or file system error Exchange or format the disc 6 During recording pause 7 During recording or pause 8 During recording displayed in color LCD only when the DISP SEL switch is set to STATUS Message Meaning and action to take No Support A recorded clip cannot be handled by this unit Exchange or format the disc FORMAT NG The disc cannot be used by this unit Exchange the disc Disc Damage The disc cannot be recorded To record exchange the disc Non AV Full The disc is full Exchange or format the MAX Files
327. selector GAIN HIGH Sets the gain value corresponding to the H position of the GAIN selector GAIN TURBO Sets the gain value corresponding to TURBO GAIN button selection TURBO SW IND _ OFF When you operate the GAIN selector after pressing the TURBO GAIN button once the video gain is changed according to the GAIN selector operation ON When the video gain is boosted to the video gain to the value preset by pressing the TURBO GAIN button once the video gain is not changed even if you operate the GAIN selector until you press the TURBO GAIN button once more 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item you want to set and press MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Any of 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 or 48 dB can be set for each of the L M and H positions in any sequence For TURBO any of 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 or 48 dB can be selected To change the gain corresponding to another switch position return to step 3 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section The menu display disappears and the current statu
328. ser defined name M24OF ILE NAMING NAMING FORM AUTO NAMING 7 Turn the MENU knob to select AUTO NAMING and then press the MENU knob 8 Tum the MENU knob to display TITLE and then press the MENU knob The same name will now be given to newly recorded clips e An FTP client that supports UTF 8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF 8 e When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP AUTO TITLING menu is a space or period the clip name is the title string minus the first letter To use clip names and clip list names by FAM and FTP Carry out steps 2 and 6 of To assign clip names on this unit It is now possible to write transfer and rename clips and clip lists with user defined names over file access mode FAM connections see page 104 and FTP connections see page 106 User defined clip names can be used by FAM and FTP Sakura SMI User defined clip list names can be used by FAM and FTP To check clip names Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen and select the clip whose name you want to check The name of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen See Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails page 64 for more information about the thumbnail screen The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed according to the following order
329. shes when there is a fault in the VDR For details see 10 3 Operation Warnings on page 174 ACCESS indicator This lights when data is written to or read from the disc Rear tally indicator When the back tally switch is set to ON this indicator has the same function as the tally indicator LCD switch This controls the backlights of the color LCD and the monochrome LCD OFF The color LCD is turned off the backlight of the monochrome LCD is off L The color LCD is adjusted for viewing indoors the backlight of the monochrome LCD is on H The color LCD is adjusted for viewing outdoors the backlight of the monochrome LCD is on 2 9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs 2 9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs 2 9 1 Monochrome LCD Disc status and battery status Disc status indicator Full capacity is available DISC EEE Close to full state DISO flashes Full disc must be replaced DISC and E flash BATT EB BEEBE Battery status indicator Fully charged BAIT E BH EERE Nearly dead BATT flashes Dead battery battery must be charged BATT and E flash Display of remaining disc capacity and remaining battery capacity on the monochrome LCD Time code display Lights when the time code or real time is displayed Time counter display Shows the time code user bits and real time BATT EB BBS L
330. signed to suppress certain types of noise inherent to CCDs See also CCD Hunting Repeated brightening and darkening of an image resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control i LINK Another name for the IEEE1394 1995 standards and their revisions XDCAM uses the i LINK interface to transfer DV streams by the AV C protocol and to read and write MPEG IMX and DVCAM data files by FAM File Access Mode Interlaced scan mode CCD output A scanning method in which odd rows fields are read alternately with even rows Odd row fields and even row fields contain images from different times IRE scale International Radio Engineers scale A scale of values that defines the brightness level of a video signal The IRE is now the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Metadata Information about the properties of video and audio content XDCAM records metadata such as UMIDs and essence marks and the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software PDZ 1 can be used to record information such as titles and comments MXF Material eXchange Format A file exchange format developed by the Pro MPEG Forum Equipment from different manufacturers can exchange files in this format ND filter Neutral Density filter ND filters reduce the amount of incident light equally across the entire visible wavelength range without affecting color Non audio General term for audio signals other than linear PCM
331. ssed the last frame of the recorded clip and the message PUSH RET FOR CLIP DELETE appears 2 Inthis state press the RET button 3 2 Recording yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sajdeup MIMI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Ja deyo HANK 52 The message DELETING LAST CLIP appears and the processing for deleting the last recorded clip begins When the deleting has finished the message LAST CLIP WAS DELETED appears If an operation other than recording review which is not a retake operation is carried out after the last clip has been recorded the retake function does not work even when the camcorder is in the recording pause state In this case the message RE TAKE NOT ALLOWED appears When you want to replace the last clip with a new clip see 3 2 2 Deleting Clips page 42 Once you carry out a retake operation the last clip is deleted even if you do not carry out a recording operation afterwards 3 2 7 Auto Clip List Recoding for Automatic Inclusion of Recorded Clips in Clip Lists Auto clip list recoding is a function for automatically including the clips generated by recording operations in a selected clip list The updated clip list is saved to the disc Proceed as follows For operations see 4 3 1 Loading a Clip List From Disc Into Unit Memory page 78 3 Press the SUB CLIP button turning on the sub clip indicator The camcorder enters auto clip list recording mode The
332. ssociated Using the Extended UMID You have to enter a country code organization code and user code Set the country code referring to the ISO 3166 table and set the organization code and user code independently For details see UMID Menu Setup on page 140 Functions of UMID data The UMID data enables the followings e Add a globally unique ID to every shot of audio visual material The unique ID is used to detect the material source and to link it with the original source material Distinguishing between original material and copied material 00 is added to the Instance Number for original material Recording based on the UTC The UTC is used when recording the UMID This enables uniform control of source material recorded all over the world based on the universal time code Calculating the date difference among source materials The source material is recorded based on the MJD Modified Julian Date which enables easy calculation of date difference among source materials UMID Menu Setup The UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu allows you to make settings for UMID data Proceed as follows 1 Holding down the MENU knob set the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OPERATION and press the MENU knob 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus If this is the first time the Operation menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If
333. sults message appears when the processing finishes If the salvage succeeded the message COMPLETED appears If the salvage failed the message INCOMPLETED appears Clips for which recording did not end normally are lost To exit without salvaging Select NO in step 2 to exit without performing salvage processing However the status of the disc does not change Salvage is still required to recover the clips for which recording did not end normally The salvage message will appear again when that disc is inserted again or when the camcorder is powered on again If salvage processing is not done sections which were recorded normally can be played back but no new recording can be done on the disc 3 1 Handling Discs 39 yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey sa deup MIMI yoeghe q pue Bulpiooey Ja deyo HANK 3 2 Recording 3 2 1 Basic Procedures This section describes the basic procedures for shooting and recording Before a shooting session ensure that the camcorder is functioning properly For details see 10 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting on page 169 Recording format settings PDW 530 530P only With the PDW 530 530P you can select the recording formats for each of video and audio Note that it is not possible to use different recording formats on a single disc Be sure to select the same format as the existing recording if you use a disc on which material is recorded or otherwise
334. support UTF 8 In the command syntax column lt SP gt means a space entered by pressing the space bar and lt CRLF gt means a new line entered by pressing the Enter key Command name Description Command syntax USER Send this command to begin the login USER lt SP gt lt username gt lt CRLF gt process Input example USER admin PASS After sending the USER command PASS lt SP gt lt password gt lt CRLF gt send this command to complete the login process Input example PASS pdw 530 or 510 QUIT Terminates the FTP connection If a file QUIT lt CRLF gt is being transferred terminates after completion of the transfer PORT Specifies the IP address and port to PORT lt SP gt lt h1 h2 h3 h4 p1 p2 gt lt CRLF gt which this unit should connect for the next file transfer for data transfer from h1 most significant byte to h4 least significant byte IP this unit address e p1 most significant byte p2 least significant byte Port address Input example PORT 10 0 0 1 242 48 IP address 10 0 0 1 Port number 62000 PASV This command requests this unit to PASV lt CRLF gt listen on a data port which is not its default data port It puts this unit into passive mode waiting for the remote computer to make a data connection 6 3 FTP File Operations 107 suoijesedo aij 9 Je deup HII suoyesedo aij 9 Je deyo HII 108 Command name TYPE STRU MODE LIST 6
335. t accessed menu page appears on the screen 2 Tum the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page appears OSOFUNCTION ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL REC 3 Press the MENU knob A mark appears on the left of the currently selected item and a mark appears on the left of the setting O3OFUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF CACHE INTVAL REC 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to CACHE INTVAL REC 5 Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE INTVAL REC changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark O30FUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF DF CACHE INTVAL REC OFF 6 Turn the MENU knob until CACHE appears As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes in the following sequence OFF gt CACHE gt A INT gt M INT When CACHE appears the camcorder is in Picture Cache mode where picture sound and time code are constantly saved in memory The TALLY indicator green is on while picture data is being stored in memory O30FUNCTION1 ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt TURBO SW DF NDF DF CACH
336. t for the auto white balance setting 133 MENU knob 27 Menu list 180 MENU ON OFF switch 27 MIC IN connector 16 MIC LEVEL control 16 Microphone 16 UHF potrable tuner for wireless system 162 using an external microphone 161 using the supplied microphone 160 MONITOR switch 16 MONITOR volume control 17 Monochrome LCD 32 MTX LINEAR page 191 MTX MULTI page 191 N ND COMP page 201 Network connector 10 Network setting 141 NEXT button 24 O OFFSET WHT page 185 OPERATION menu list 180 Operation warnings 174 Optical disc drive section specifications 178 Optional board CBK FC01 8 CBK SC01 10 68 CBK SD01 10 OUTPUT page 180 Output video operating section 26 OUTPUT DCC selector 21 P PAINT menu list 188 PDZ 1 81 installation 81 system requirements 81 PEAKING control 19 Picture Cache function 44 PLAY PAUSE button and indicator 24 Playback 61 freezing a picture 69 in color 62 48V OFF switch 18 Power supply 13 154 using a battery pack 154 using an AC adaptor 155 using the Anton Bauer Ultralight system 155 POWER switch 13 Precautions 12 PRESET WHT page 199 PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch 30 PREV button 25 Proxy AV data 9 Proxy Browsing Software See also PDZ 1 81 Proxy data 58 Q Quick salvage 39 R Rear tally indicator 32 REC START button 24 REC TIME 49 Recommended additional equipment 179 Recording 40 adjustments and settings 82 analog composite signals 68 setting the recording format 82 video s
337. t the mask level 1 2 1 4 or 1 8 LVL when the ASPECT MASK is set to ON 100 MARKER To display the effective pixel area set to ON 1 The ASPECT MASK item is for processing the signal to be output to the viewfinder When R G or B is selected for the TEST OUT SELECT item from the menu the same video signal is output to the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector Thus when the ASPECT MASK 4 3 item is set to ON with R G B selected the masked video signal is output to the TEST OUT connector 3 Perform the settings for each item Turn the MENU knob to move the gt mark to the item you want to set and press MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to the mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 To continue setting other items repeat step 3 5 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen 7 2 5 Setting the Viewfinder Use the VF SETTING page of the USER menu to select items related to the viewfinder CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob M
338. t to set and press MENU knob The mark on the left of the selected item changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 4 Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to display the selected window then press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 5 To continue setting other windows repeat steps 3 and 4 6 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section 7 2 9 Confirming the Image of the Return Video Signal in the Viewfinder You can set whether or not the image of the return video signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector is displayed in the viewfinder using the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu Proceed as follows T Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON while holding down the MENU knob The TOP menu appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to MAINTENANCE then press the MENU knob If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the MAINTENANCE menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to GENLOCK then press the MENU knob to display the GENLOCK page If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the GENLOCK page appears then press the MENU knob to select the page M
339. tep 3 5 Testing external microphones You can do this test by using both of the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors simultaneously Alternatively you can do the test by using one of the connectors and then execute the same procedure using the other connector The following is the testing procedure when both connectors are used Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors 2 Set the 48V OFF switches as follows e If the connected microphone is of the internal power supply type set the switch to OFF If the connected microphone is of the external power supply type set the switch to 48V 3 Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to REAR 10 1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting 171 vueugueN 0L Je deyD iii soueualule OL Ja deyo nA 172 Aim the microphones at a sound source Check that the audio level meters on the color and monochrome LCDs and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level 6 Checking the XLR connection automatic detection function Before starting to check remove the front microphone connected to the MIC IN connector if it is connected 1 2 Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2 explained in 5 Testing external microphones Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to FRONT Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5 explained in 5 Testing external microphones If the audio level meters on the color and monochrome
340. tery capacity is automatically detected and indicated as a percentage even when the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to OFF The indicated value changes in steps of 10 Until the remaining battery capacity is reduced to 40 the indications MAX 90 80 40 are displayed for three seconds in the viewfinder each time the remaining battery capacity reduces by 10 When the remaining battery capacity is less than 40 the indication is displayed all the time When the remaining battery capacity is less than 10 P the the indication flashes When the remaining battery capacity is reduced further the LOW indication flashes 1 This value can be set to either 10 or 20 on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu 16 9 mode recording indicator This indicates recording in the 16 9 mode This indicator is recorded together with the color bars Setting change and adjustment progress message display area For details see 7 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages on page 124 Operation error message display area For details see Operation error messages on page 175 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 121 sBulyjas paylejaq pue sAejdsiq nuaw z Ja deuD III sBumes pejlejeq pue sxejdsiq nue z 1 4deyo WA Iris setting auto iris override This indicates the f stop iris setting of the lens Also the auto iris override is displayed using bars
341. the external equipment connected to the i LINK DV IN OUT or GENLOCK IN connector The mark on the left of REC VIDEO SOURCE changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 6 Tum the MENU knob to display EXT 21 SOURCE SEL TOP REC VIDEO SOURCE EXT EXT REC CONTROL OFF i LINK MODE AV C 21 SOURCE SEL TOP REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM EXT REC CONTROL OFF l LINK MODE AV C 5 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to REC VIDEO SOURCE then press the MENU knob 3 4 Recording Video Signals From External Equipment 7 Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark During i LINK DV stream input the image on the viewfinder screen and the color LCD may occasionally show an overlapped frame or skipped frame but this does not affect the recording on the disc During i LINK DV stream input the audio within the DV stream is recorded as the audio input During i LINK DV stream input a black picture is shown on the viewfinder screen and on the color LCD and nothing is recorded if the DV device on the sending side of the i LINK DV connection is also in a stream input state 3 4 2 Recording Analog Composite Signals With the CBK SC01 Installed Installing the CBK SCO1 Composite Input Board in the camcorder enables you to record analog composite signals from external equip
342. the OPERATION menu Each mode is described below using timing charts e I interlace scan mode I interlace scan mode CCD output oO E 0 E Tg T Video output signal 0 E O E l r O Odd E Even Interlace scan mode timing chart The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an Thus the timing of the odd field video signal and even even scanning line are output from the CCD alternately field video signal are different PsF progressive scan mode CCD output lt F Video output signal O A VAN E O Odd l r E Even Progressive scan mode timing chart The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an odd field and even field scanning lines Thus the timing of even scanning line are output from the CCD at the same an odd field video signal and an even field video signal are time Then they are sent to the memory and separated into the same 24P mode 2 3 pull down mode PDW 510 530 only 23 98 frames per second CCD output Video output signal AO AE BO BE BO CE CO DE DO DE AO AE O Odd 29 97 frames per second E Even 24P mode timing chart After reading from the CCDs in 24P mode 23 98 frames frames 29 97 frames per second of the normal per second a pull down conversion is carried out to the 30 progressive scan mode 7 3 Adjustments and Settings From Menus Se
343. the picture with a crosshair For details see 7 2 4 Setting the Marker Display on page 124 Diopter adjustment ring Use this ring to adjust the viewfinder image for your vision Viewfinder front rear positioning lever To adjust the viewfinder position in the front rear direction loosen this lever and the LOCK knob After adjustment retighten this lever and the LOCK knob FILTER selector ASSIGN 1 2 switches SHUTTER selector AUTO W B BAL switch Viewfinder left right positioning ring Loosen this ring to move the viewfinder sideways Camera operator tally indicator This indicator lights while the camcorder is recording Slide the window open when you shoot with your eye away from the viewfinder This indicator flashes when the battery level is running low or the disc is almost full Viewfinder stopper Pull up this stopper to detach the viewfinder from the camera LOCK knob To adjust the viewfinder position in the front rear direction loosen this knob and the viewfinder front rear positioning lever After adjustment retighten this knob and the viewfinder front rear positioning lever ASSIGN 3 4 switches TURBO GAIN button WHITE BAL switch OUTPUT DCC selector GAIN selector Shooting and recording playback functions 2 FILTER selector Use this selector to select the most appropriate filter to match the light source illuminating th
344. the position to where you want to move the page selected in step 1 7 1 Menu Organization and Operation 4 Press the MENU knob The page selected in step 1 is moved to the position selected in step 3 In the above example AUTO IRIS moves to the 04 position and the VF DISP 1 and following items move down one line 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating status a center marker a safety zone marker etc When the MENU ON OFF switch is set to OFF and the DISPLAY switch is set to ON the items for which an ON setting was made in the VF DISP1 page of the USER menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen The messages that give details of the settings and adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear for about 3 seconds while settings are being changed during adjustment and after adjustment For information about the display item selection ssee 7 2 2 Selecting the Display Items on page 123 For information about setting change and adjustment progress messages see 7 2 3 Display Modes and Setting Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages on page 124 For information about marker display see 7 2 4 Setting the Marker Display on page 124 7 2 1 Layout of the Status Display on the Viewf
345. the power cord during recording to the memory card while the camcorder s ACCESS indicator is lit Recording processing will not finish normally which means that the clip proxy data recorded immediately before the interruption will be lost If the remaining memory on a memory card is exhausted during recording the message MEM REC NG appears The clip proxy data that was being recorded immediately before the message appeared is lost If this occurs exchange the memory card refer to the next section To copy proxy data for all clips on the disc to amemory card and copy the data that could not be recorded e It is not possible to record only proxy data to a memory card without recording to the disc To stop recording Recording to memory cards stops when recording to the disc stops You do not need to take any special steps to stop recording to memory cards To delete recorded proxy data To delete material recorded on a disc and proxy data recorded on a memory card at the same time execute DELETE LAST CLIP DELETE ALL CLIPS or QUICK FORMAT on the DISC page of the MAINTENANCE menu see page 201 To delete only proxy data on a memory card carry out the steps in To delete all proxy data in a memory card page 59 To copy proxy data for selected clips on the disc to a memory card To select clips on the disc and copy proxy data to a memory card one clip at a time proceed as follows T Insert a memory
346. the top left on the viewfinder screen e The auto iris functions correctly 10 1 3 Testing the VDR Perform tests 1 to 7 consecutively 1 Testing the recording and playback functions T Set the VDR SAVE STBY switch to SAVE and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on 2 Set the VDR SAVE STBY switch to STBY and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off 3 Set the switches located below the color LCD as follows LCD switch L or H DISP SEL switch STATUS DISPLAY switch COUNTER 4 Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET and set the F RUN SET R RUN to R RUN 5 Press the REC START button and check the following points e The indication in the counter display is changing The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on The RF and SERVO indicators on the color LCD are off 6 Press the REC START button again and check that recording stops and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off 7 Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6 this time using the VTR button on the lens Press the RESET button and check that the indication in the counter display on each of the color and monochrome LCDs is 00 00 00 00 8 Press the F REV button and check that fast reverse playback is performed Next press the PLAY button and check that normal playback is performed Q Press the STOP button and check that playback stops Next press the F FWD button and check that fast forward playbac
347. the viewfinder to the switch Item Description ASSIGN SW 1 Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1 push type switch ASSIGN SW 2 Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2 slide type switch ASSIGN SW 3 Assigns the function to ASSIGN 3 push type switch ASSIGN SW 4 Assigns the function to ASSIGN 4 push type switch 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the item corresponding to the switch to which you want to assign the function and press the MENU knob The corresponding ASSIGN SW SEL window appears ASSIGN SW1 lt 3 4 gt SEL window ey aie SW1 SEL ESC OFF PICTURE CACHE ON OFF TEST OUT CHARACTER MARKER RE TAKE ATW RETURN VIDEO TURBO SWITCH ASSIGN SW2 SEL window rege SW2 SEL ESC OFF PICTURE CACHE ON OFF TEST OUT CHARACTER MARKER ZEBRA FREEZE MIX FREEZE MIX Manual DS600 EXT REC CONTROL LENS RET Assigns the same function as that of the RET switch on the lens to the switch REC SWITCH _ Assigns the VTR S S start stop function to the switch TURBO Assigns the turbo gain function to the SWITCH switch ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display function to the switch FREEZE MIX Outputs the freeze image and camera input alternately to allow frame alignment automatic switching FREEZE MIX Outputs the freeze image and camera Manual input alternately to allow frame alignment manual switching D5600 Applies an electrical 5600 K filte
348. ting and Recording Playback Functions VIDEO OUT connector BNC type This connector outputs a composite video signal for a video monitor With a video monitor connected to this connector you can monitor the picture being shot by the camera or the picture played back by the VDR To choose between the composite video signal output and SDI signal output use the menu When synchronizing the time code of an external VDR with that of the camcorder connect this connector to the GENLOCK IN connector of the external VDR By installing the CBK SD0O1 extension board not supplied you can output an SDI signal supporting embedded audio and the EDH function from this connector For details on how to select the output signal see 7 3 2 Selecting the Output Signals on page 131 REMOTE connector 8 pin Connect the RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit which makes it possible to control the VDR and camera remotely GENLOCK IN connector BNC type e This connector inputs a reference signal when the camera is to be genlocked or when time code is to be synchronized with external equipment Use the MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H phase phase of horizontal sync signal and the sub carrier phase For details refer to the Maintenance Manual This connector also inputs a return video signal You can display the return video signal in the viewfinder screen while holding the RET button down with RETURN VIDEO set to ON
349. to an AC power source using the AC DN10 AC Adaptor 9 1 4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight System By fitting the camcorder with the Anton Bauer Ultralight system and setting the LIGHT switch to AUTO you can switch the light on and off automatically as you start and stop REC operation This system operates with lights powered by 12 V with a maximum power consumption of 50 W 9 1 Power Supply 155 Japioowey y dN Bumes 6 Ja deyo III Jepiooweg y dn Humes 6 se deuo WA 9 2 Adjusting the Viewfinder For maximum viewing convenience you can adjust the viewfinder position in the left right and backward forward directions 1 Loosen the viewfinder front rear positioning lever and the LOCK knob 2 Slide the viewfinder longitudinally to the most convenient position 3 Tighten the viewfinder front rear positioning lever and the LOCK knob 9 2 1 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position Adjusting the position to the left or right Proceed as follows Adjusting the position to the left or right T Loosen the viewfinder left right positioning ring 2 Slide the viewfinder to the most convenient position 3 Tighten the viewfinder left right positioning ring To store the camcorder in the carrying case Always store the camcorder with the viewfinder moved fully in the direction opposite to the barrel and the viewfinder left right positioning ring tightene
350. to provide a satisfactory video output level 3 Loosen the fixing screws on the F f or F B ring flange focal length adjustment ring 4 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto 5 Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it 6 Set the zoom ring to wide angle T Turn the Ff or F B ring until the chart is in focus being careful not to disturb the focus ring 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto 9 Tighten the F f or F B ring fixing screws 9 4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length 9 5 Audio Input System 9 5 Audio Input System 9 5 1 Using the Supplied Microphone You can use the supplied microphone either detached from or attached to the camcorder Using the microphone detached from the camcorder h o ini Connect to the MIC IN connector Set the AUDIO IN switch for the desired audio recording channel to FRONT Using the microphone detached from the camcorder When using the supplied microphone with an extension cable always use an external power supply type cable Using the microphone attached to the camcorder 1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp Clamp of the Microphone holder 2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder Place the microphone in the holder so that UP is at the top Close the microphon
351. tter speed in seconds in standard mode scan mode PsF ECS ECS mode EVS EVS mode 7 2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 1F to 8F 16F Number of frames in SLS mode Gain This indicates the gain of the video amplifier as set by the GAIN selector White balance memory This indicates the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory A Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A B Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B P Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST or when the preset button on the RM B150 has been pushed T Displayed when ATW is being used Filter This indicates the currently selected filter types Time code This indicates the time code user bits or other information selected by the DISPLAY switch ID number This indicates the ID number selected from ID 1 to ID 4 The ID number is recorded together with the color bars Date and time This indicates the date and time of recording which are recorded together with the color bars Model name and serial number This indicates the model name and serial number of the camcorder which are recorded together with the color bars 16 9 4 3 mode 16 9 or 4 3 is displayed depending on the currently selected aspect ratio This flashes when the color bars are displayed and is recorded together with the color bars Recording format This indicates the current recording fo
352. tting the CCD scan mode The scan mode of the camcorder has been set to the interlace scan mode at the factory The FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu allows you to change the CCD scan mode to the progressive scan mode or 24P mode PDW 510 530 only 1 Follow the procedures given in steps 1 to 3 described in 7 3 4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance Setting on page 133 to display the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to SCAN MODE and press the MENU knob The mark on the left of SCAN MODE changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark 1SOFORMAT 16 9 4 3 SELECT SCAN MODE UC J SELECT 3 Tum the MENU knob to display PsF or 24P and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark 1SOFORMAT 16 9 4 3 SELECT SCAN MODE UC J SELECT 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF 7 3 10 Using UMID Data To perform operations from interviewing to editing effectively and to detect audio visual materials easily when reusing them metadata that provides additional information is recorded along with audio visual data on a What is a UMID The UMID Unique Material Identifier is a unique identifier for audio visual material defined by the SMPTE330M 2003 standard disc As one of application of metadata the UM
353. ttings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file SCENE RECALL EXEC Recalls the scene file from the memory of the camcorder or the Memory Stick SCENE STORE EXEC Stores the scene file in the memory of the camcorder or the Memory Stick F ID 16 characters Sets the File ID Menu List MAINTENANCE Menu List The following table lists and describes the items in the MAINTENANCE menu When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses _ the setup value is a relative value The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual No Page Item Settings Default Description 01 WHITE WHT SHAD CH R G B TEST R Selects the channel adjusted by this menu If SHADING SEL TEST is selected the setting is the same as the setting of TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT SELECT ENC R G B ENC Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT connector R G B WHT H SAW 99 to 99 0 H Saw white shading compensation R G B WHT H PARA 99 to 99 0 H Parabola white shading compensation R G B WHT V SAW 99 to 99 0 V Saw white shading compensation R G B WHT V PARA 99 to 99 0 V Parabola white shading compensation WHITE SAW PARA OFF ON ON Turns white shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off 02 BLACK BLK SHAD CH SEL R G B TEST R Selects the channel adjusted by this menu If SHADIN
354. uper cardioid directional external power supply type 1 Operation manuals English version 1 Japanese version 1 CD ROM manual 1 PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software 1 Video Camera Section General 4 inch type 16 9 widescreen Power HAD EX CCD Total picture elements 1038 H x 1008 V for PDW 510 530 1038 H x 1188 V for PDW 510P 530P Effective picture elements 980 H x 988 V for PDW 510 530 980 H x 1164 V for PDW 510P 530P Imager Configuration RGB 3 CCDs Spectral system F1 4 prism system with quartz filter Imager 177 Specifications sexipueddy Ml Built in filters PDW 510 510P CC ND filter 1 3200K 2 5600K g ND 3 5600K 4 5600K 1 64 ND PDW 530 530P CC filter A Cross filter B 3200K C 4300K D 6300K ND filter 1 Clear 2 1 4 ND 3 t16 ND 4 64 ND Lens mount Sensitivity F11 standard 89 9 reflection chart 2000 Ix Minimum illumination 0 13 1x at F1 4 48 dB gain 0 008 Ix F1 4 48 dB with 16 frame accumulation 5 inch 48 bayonet mount Video S N ratio 65 dB Y typical for PDW 510 530 63 dB Y typical for PDW 510P 530P Modulation at screen center 4 3 mode 55 16 9 mode 70 Registration 0 05 or less for entire screen area excluding distortion due to lens Geometric distortion None identified excluding distortion due to lens Smear 140 dB Y typical LCD panel 6 3 cm 2 5 inches Pixel resolution 211 200 pixels 960 wide x 220 high
355. uration of selected sub clip or time code of first frame a When a title has been assigned to a clip see page 52 the title is enclosed in double quotation marks for example TITLE00001 To escape from the thumbnail display to the full screen display Press the THUMBNAIL button turning it off 2 Turn the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob to select the sub clip you want to cue up 3 Tocue up the selected sub clip press the SEL SET dial or the MENU knob To start playback from the selected sub clip press the PLAY PAUSE button 3 3 6 Locking and Deleting Clips In the thumbnail screen you can delete selected clips or lock them so that they cannot be deleted 1 1 This function is supported from firmware version 1 5 Locking Clips Locking prevents the following operations on clips e Delete e Rename by FAM or FTP e Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when you format a disc e Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write Inhibit tab of the disk is in the recording disabled position Proceed as follows You can lock one clip at a time 1 With the sub clip indicator off press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail indicator lights and the thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear 2 Tur the SEL SET dial or MENU knob to select the clip to lock 3 Holding down the SHIFT button and press the SUB CLIP button The THUMBNAIL menu appears 23 AUG 14 30 DUR 00 03 10 00 To escap
356. use a different disc For details of the setting operations see 5 1 1 Setting the Video Recording Format on page 82 and see 5 1 2 Setting the Audio Recording Format on page 83 Thumbnail image setting As required you can select the frame to display as the thumbnail image of a clip The factory default setting is to display the first frame in the clip as the thumbnail image See 5 7 Setting the Thumbnail Image on page 99 for more information about how to make this setting Basic procedure for shooting from turning on the camcorder to loading a disc Proceed as follows ao of Basic procedure for shooting from power supply to disc loading 3 2 Recording T Attacha fully charged battery pack For details see 9 1 Power Supply on page 154 2 Turn on the POWER switch 3 Set the DISP SEL switch to STATUS and check on the color LCD that the following conditions are met The HUMID indicator is not showing If it is wait until it disappears The battery status indicator W shows at least five segments If it does not replace the battery pack with a fully charged one 4 Check that there are no obstructions such as cables near the disc compartment lid Then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid 5 After checking that the disc is not write protected see P page 36 load it and close the disc compartment lid Basic procedure for shooting from adjusting t
357. ustment is executed During adjustment the message WHITE OP is displayed on the viewfinder screen in display mode 2 or 3 The white balance adjustment ends in about one second with the message shown in the following figure and the adjustment setting is automatically stored in the memory A or B that was selected in step 1 Approximate color temperature of the subject Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle 4 Adjust the lens iris Manually adjusted lens set the iris to an appropriate setting Lens with automatic iris set the automatic manual switch on the lens to automatic 5 Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to WHT and then release the switch 5 2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris the iris may hunt during the adjustment To prevent this adjust the iris gain knob indicated as IG IS or S on the lens For details refer to the lens operation manual 1 Hunting Repeated brightening and darkening of the image resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen Possible messages are listed below White balance adjustment error messages Error message WHITE NG LOW LEVEL Meaning Th
358. utomatically selected when an audio cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector In sucha case set REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu The audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 depend on the settings of the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches without being affected by the XLR connection automatic detection function Fitting the WRR 862 Using a BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S Battery Pack 1 1 Attach the WRR tuner fitting not supplied service part number A 8278 057 A to the back of the camcorder Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the four screws placed in the tuner fitting For three of these screws insert the screwdriver through the corresponding hole and tighten the screw Loosen the adjustment screws Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S Battery Pack to be attached and tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR 862 2 Attach the battery pack BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S Adjustment screws OJO Mount plate supplied with WRR 862 Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT connector of the camcorder and the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector 4 Set the switches as follows Set the LINE AES EBU MIC switch for the channel to which the audio out cable is attached to MIC When the XLR connection autom
359. ve the mark to USER MENU CUSTOMIZE then press the MENU knob If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the menu appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob to move the mark to EDIT PAGE then press the MENU knob to display the EDIT PAGE screen If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the EDIT PAGE screen appears then press the MENU knob to select the page eee PAGE UF SETTING AUTO IRIS 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to where you want to add the page then press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears EDIT FUNCTION INSERT MOVE DELETE BLANK ESC 5 Select INSERT and press the MENU knob The selection screen appears CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 f 8 9 6 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired page then press the MENU knob This adds the number and name of the selected page above the item selected in step 4 To cancel adding a page Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6 turn the MENU knob to move the mark to ESC at the top right of the screen then press the MENU knob The EDIT PAGE screen appears again To delete a page by using the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch Proceed as follows 1 Open the EDIT PAGE and turn the MENU knob to move the
360. vel indicators appear on the viewfinder screen Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the viewfinder screen The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as expected depending on the settings relating to the viewfinder display function In this case set the desired items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu For details see 7 2 2 Selecting the Display Items on page 123 Testing the iris and zoom functions 1 2 Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that the power zoom operates correctly Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom functions manually Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the camera at objects of different brightness Check that the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and check that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris correctly Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check the following points when the GAIN selector is moved from L to M to H e For objects of the same brightness the iris is adjusted to correspond to the change in setting e The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes to correspond to the change in setting If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens put the extender lever of the lens into the 2x position and check the following points e The indication EX appears at
361. viewfinder screen shows the number of the clip list loaded in the current clip list The number of the clip list loaded in the current clip list EX Z99 Hama WE 134V 16 9 0004 DC IN TCG 00 30 11 03 1A W A18dB 1 2000 45 40 oof 1 7 THUMBNAIL ie ESSENCE MARK SUB CLIP SUB cLip O button apiu oF pio PRESET RUN REGEN SET te R RUN SEUSET SSEL 1 Insert a disc 2 Loada clip list from the disc e To create a new clip list load a NEW FILE empty clip list e To add clips to an existing clip list load that clip list Always load either a new or existing clip list from disc 3 2 Recording 4 Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording and press again to stop recording A clip is generated automatically from the video and audio recorded in this interval and added as a sub clip to the the currently loaded clip list The updated list is also written to disc automatically 5 Repeat the process of recording and stopping until you have included all the required clips To change target clip lists carry out step 2 once more to load the desired clip list into the current clip list To exit auto clip list coding mode Press the SUB CLIP button turning off the sub clip indicator 3 2 8 Assigning User Defined Clip Titles Automatically 1 This is supported from firmware versio
362. volume HEADPHONE OUT STREO MONO MONO Selects whether to make the rear earphone monaural or stereo 07 AUDIO 2 AU DATA LEN IMX 16 bit 24 bit 16bit Sets the bit length of the digital audio PDW 530 530P recording only AU REF LEVEL 20 dB 18 dB 20 dB Sets the reference level Head Room 16 dB 12 dB EBUL AU REF OUT EBUL O dB 4 dB 0 dB Sets the output reference level 3 dB AU CH12 AGC MONO STREO MONO Selects whether to perform automatic input MODE level adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 independently for each channel or in stereo mode AU CH34 AGC MONO STREO MONO Selects whether to perform automatic input MODE OFF level adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 3 and 4 independently for each channel or in stereo mode or not at all OFF AU AGC SPEC 6 9 12 15 dB__ 6 dB AGC saturation level setting AU LIMITER MODE OFF 6 9 12 OFF For manual audio input level adjustment 15 17 dB selects the limiter saturation level for loud input signals AU OUT LIMITER OFF ON ON Turns the audio output limiter on or off i LINK AUDIO OUT 2CH 4CH 2CH 2CH Output channels 1 and 2 16 bits 48 ksps 4CH Output channels 1 to 4 12 bits 32 ksps Menu List No 08 Page AUDIO 3 Item AU SG 1kHz Settings ON OFF AUTO Default OFF Description Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone during the Color Bar mode or not ON a 1 kHz test tone
363. wfinder screen When the camcorder is powered on open the cover of the menu operating section and set the MENU ON OFF switch to the ON position This displays menus on the viewfinder screen regardless of the ON OFF setting of the viewfinder DISPLAY switch Displaying menus on the color LCD With the camcorder powered on proceed as follows 1 Open the cover of the menu operating section and set the MENU ON OFF switch to the ON position 2 Set the DISP SEL switch at the lower left of the color LCD to CHAR This displays menus on the color LCD In the remainder of this section the viewfinder display is generally shown as an example menu display but the display on the color LCD is similar 7 1 3 Basic Menu Operations When you open the cover of the menu operating section the MENU ON OFF switch appears If the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON the USER menu is displayed on the screen Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU ON OFF switch Cover of the menu operating section Controls used for the basic use of the menu oerations Displaying the TOP menu Hold down the MENU button and move the MENU ON OFF switch from the OFF to the ON position Depending on the internal switch settings display of the TOP menu may be disabled For details refer to the Maintenance Manual 7 1 Menu Organization and Operation sBulyjeas paylejaq
364. which appear in the upper and lower parts to the left of the F number respectively For details see Changing the reference value on page 9 Remaining disc capacity This indicator indicates the remaining disc recording time in minutes of the VDR Examples of remaining disc recording time indication Indication Remaining disc recording time F 30 Full to 30 minutes 30 25 30 to 25 minutes 25 20 25 to 20 minutes 20 15 20 to 15 minutes 15 10 15 to 10 minutes 10 5 10 to 5 minutes 5 MIN 5 to 4 minutes 4 MIN 4 to 3 minutes 3 MIN 3 to 2 minutes 2 MIN 2 to 1 minutes 1 flashing 1 to O minutes O MIN flashing 0 minutes Audio level These indicate the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2 The peak indication of the VDR level meter is related as follows to the audio level when an 1 kHz sine wave is input Audio channel 1 levelindicator 4 DD GEBOOO Audio channel 2 level indicator 2 RENEM LIL VDR level meter e 46 26 20 10 5 dB indicator Shutter speed This indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode However if the SHUTTER selector is set to OFF nothing is displayed 1 100 PD W 510 530 or 1 60 PDW 510P 530P 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 Shutter speed in seconds in standard mode scan mode 1 40 1 60 1 120 PD W 510 530 or 1 33 1 50 1 100 PDW 510P 530P 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 Shu
365. xample SITE CHMOD 444 Clip C0001 MXF Lock clip CO0001 MXF a This is supported from firmware version 1 5 6 3 FTP File Operations 6 4 Recording Continuous Time Code With FAM and FTP Connections 1 This is supported from firmware version 1 4 When you are connected to the unit by FAM or FTP you can create new clips with time code that is continuous with the time code of the last frame of the last clip on the disc To record continuous time code set PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN and then proceed as follows FAM connection Write clip files to the unit from the computer or other device that is connected to this unit FTP connection Use the STOR command to transfer clip files from the computer that is connected to this unit If you issue the SITE UMMD command immediately before the STOR command the original time code of the transferred file is recorded regardless of the setting of PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch 6 4 Recording Continuous Time Code With FAM and FTP Connections 113 suoiesedo aij 9 Jeldeup HHI II Menu Displays and Detailed Settings chapter 7 1 Menu Organization and Operation 7 1 1 Menu Organization The following shows the organization of menus that you can use to make various settings and adjustments TOP MENU USER 00 CONTENTS The USER menu consists of geal ine the pages shown on the right 02 TEST OUT If required you can add 0
366. y corresponding to the setting A or B of the WHITE BAL switch The camcorder has four built in filters so a total of eight 4 x 2 adjustments can be stored The number of memories allocated to each of A and B can be limited to one by setting the WHT FILTER INH item to ON on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu In this case the memory contents are not linked to the filter settings If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B and on the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu the WHITE SWITCH lt B gt item is set to ATW the ATW function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions If a memory error occurs If the error message STORED DATA NG flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on the white balance and black balance memory contents have been lost Adjust the white balance and black balance again Contact your Sony representative if this message continues to appear even after the white balance and black balance have been adjusted again For details refer to the Maintenance Manual 5 2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 87 BulpsooeyY 104 sues pue s ueujsnipy gJeldeyD HII Bulpsooey 104 sues pue sjuewisnipy gse deyo Ml 88 5 3 Setting the Electronic Shutter This section describes the shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter of the camcorder and describes the procedure
367. yback You can play back clips in the order of clip lists created with the scene selection function see page 70 Playing back in clip list order Proceed as follows 3 3 Checking Recording and Playback 1 Ifthe clip list that you want to play exists on the disc load it into the current clip list see page 72 For the clip list loading operation see 4 3 1 Loading a Clip List From Disc Into Unit Memory page 78 2 Press the SUB CLIP button turning it on 3 Press the PLAY PAUSE button Playback begins from the first sub clip in the current clip list Depending on the length of sub clips in the clip list and their arrangement on the disc playback may freeze momentarily between sub clips Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails With the desired clip list loaded in the current clip list proceed as follows 1 Press the SUB CLIP button and the THUMBNAIL button turning on the indicators Thumbnails of the first frames in the sub clips appear If the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON set it to OFF and press the THUMBNAIL button If you set the MENU ON OFF to ON during thumbnail display thumbnail display is cancelled and replaced with menu display Sixth frame is selected Name of the current clip list a from a total of 34 sub clips Total duration of sub clips in clip list 27 AUG 14 00 Te ite 00 05 20 00 Currently selected sub clip Recording date and time of selected sub clip D
368. yntax SITE MEID lt CRLF gt SITE FUNC Acquires the function and version of the expanded commands Information is sent in the following format lt main function gt lt SP gt lt branch function gt lt SP gt lt branch function version gt For XDCAM sent in a format like 200 MXF DISK 1 200 is a response code SITE FUNC lt CRLF gt SITE UMMD SITE DF When C MXF file is sent with the STOR the copy source UMID is saved if this command is invoked immediately before the STOR command Acquires the amount of free disc space SITE UMMD lt CRLF gt SITE lt SP gt DF lt CRLF gt SITE CHMOD Locks and unlocks clips Also sets permissions for directories and files in the General directory SITE CHMOD lt SP gt lt flag gt lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Specify one of the following values in lt flag gt according to the specification in lt path name gt e When a clip is specified in lt path name gt 444 Lock 666 Unlock e When a directory in the General directory is specified in lt path name gt 555 Forbid writing to the directory 777 Allow writing to the directory e When a file in the General directory is specified in lt path name gt 444 Forbid writing to and execution of the file 555 Forbid writing to the file but allow execution 666 Allow writing to the file but forbid execution 777 Allow writing to and execution of the file Input e
369. zebra pattern is displayed MOMENT The zebra pattern is displayed and stays for 5 to 6 seconds The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas where the video level is approximately 70 You can use the setup menu to change the setting so that areas where the video level is 100 and above are also displayed at the same time For information about how to change the zebra pattern setting in the setup menu see 7 2 5 Setting the Viewfinder on page 125 1 The zebra pattern aids in manual iris adjustment by indicating areas of the picture where the video level is approximately 70 and 100 and above O TALLY switch This switch controls the tally indicator setting its brightness HIGH or LOW or turning it off HIGH The tally indicator brightness is high OFF The tally indicator is disabled LOW The tally indicator brightness is low 2 4 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions 1 9 S 01 UO0Q puke sey JO suonouny pue suoneoogq ZJeldeyD HII S 01 U09 pue Sued JO SUO JOUNJ pue sUOI e907 Z Je deyD HAIN Viewfinder The viewfinder lets you view the image in black and white while shooting recording or playing back It also displays various warnings and messages related to the settings or operating conditions of the camcorder a zebra pattern safety zone marker and center marker 2 1 The safety zone marker is a rectangle indicating the effective picture area 2 The center marker indicates the center of

Snapper 1695195 Lawn Mower User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents